JP6168494B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines (pachinko gaming machines, generally also referred to as “pachinko gaming machines” or “pachinko machines”), and revolving gaming machines (generally referred to as “pachislot machines”). It is about.

  The gaming machine is configured to execute an internal lottery regarding an advantageous game such as a big hit for each game. For example, in a general pachinko gaming machine, a lottery (a special lottery) is made using a game medium (for example, a game ball) and triggered by the game medium launched into the game area by a launching device entering a predetermined starting port. There is known a gaming machine that performs a lottery and displays a special symbol variably based on the lottery result (for example, Patent Document 1).

  In such a gaming machine, an internal lottery (special lottery) is performed by a complete probability method in which a lottery is performed independently for each game trial with a pre-determined winning probability, and a big win is won by a special lottery. The probability of doing is defined for each gaming machine. However, in such a gaming machine, a fair internal lottery is performed with a pre-determined winning probability. However, since a bias occurs in the lottery result of the internal lottery, an advantageous game in an actual game (for example, a big hit) The winning probability is not necessarily equal to the specified winning probability. Also, the number of games required to win the next advantageous game is not constant. Therefore, even if the player continues the game for a predetermined period, the player may not win the big hit and may not obtain the advantageous game.

JP 2012-245277 A

  In the conventional gaming machine as described above, when an advantageous game (for example, a big hit) cannot be obtained over a long period of time, "Isn't it possible to win a big hit in a little more?" There are few players who have increased their gambling in spite of not being able to win special bonuses and having excessive investment, with the thought of `` If you can get a lot of game media in some cases '' There was a problem that it existed.

  Then, an object of this invention is to provide the gaming machine which can suppress excessive gambling.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention performs a lottery regarding the winning of the advantageous game for the game using the game medium, and when the advantageous gaming state is started by winning the advantageous game, the normal gaming state is started. A game machine configured to provide a player with an advantageous game, wherein the lottery is performed by performing a winning determination using information for determining a winning that is determined each time a predetermined lottery opportunity is satisfied. A lottery unit for controlling the game state to one of a plurality of gaming states including the advantageous gaming state and the normal gaming state based on a lottery result by the lottery unit, and the lottery unit Determination information display means for displaying determination information based on the winning determination information used in the lottery, wherein the determination information display means is capable of identifying the winning in the winning determination. The winning mode display means for displaying the determination information and the determination information at the time of winning the winning determination are displayed in areas other than the vicinity than the ratio displayed in the vicinity of the determining information at the time of winning the winning determination. And a ratio change display means for displaying the ratio in a manner that can increase the ratio. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the determination information display means displays the determination information so that the player can view it. A gaming machine characterized by further comprising a euphoria suppression means capable of suppressing a sense of expectation for winning a game.

  According to the present invention, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the determination information based on the winning determination information used for determining the winning of the advantageous game by the lottery means is displayed, and in such a display, at the time of the winning in the winning determination Since the determination information (at the time of loss) is displayed in a manner that can be displayed more in the other distance than the vicinity of the position where the determination information at the time of winning is shown, the expectation of winning the advantageous game Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suppress excessive gambling with the gaming machine. The determination information may be the winning determination information itself.

  According to a second invention, in the first invention, the lottery means determines information value for determination to determine the value of the information for determination of winning, a winning value for the determination of winning and the information for determination of determination Based on the comparison result with the value of the winning determination information determined by the winning determination means for determining the winning of the advantageous game, and determination information based on the winning determination information used for the determination by the winning determination means Determination information holding means for holding, and the determination information display means identifies the winning in the winning determination based on the determination information held in the determination information holding storage means after the previous advantageous game winning About the winning mode display means to display in a possible mode and the determination information at the time of winning the winning determination, display other than the vicinity than the ratio displayed in the vicinity of the determination information based on the winning value And a ratio change display means for displaying in a manner that can increase the ratio of the percentages to be played, and further, a game of a predetermined period or more is performed after winning the previous advantageous game, and the gaming state control means When the game state is controlled to a game state other than the advantageous game state, it is provided with gambling suppression means that can suppress the expectation of winning the advantageous game by displaying the determination information on the determination information display means. It is a feature. According to the gaming machine configured in this way, based on the determination information (for example, random number information) held in the determination information holding means, it is displayed farther from the winning value than the ratio displayed in the vicinity of the winning value. Since the judgment information at the time of loss is displayed so that the proportion of the game played is increased, the player understands that it is not intentional to win the advantageous game and the game that is not satisfied with the gaming machine The game can be ended with the feelings wiped out. And according to such a gaming machine, it can be expected that the dissatisfaction of the player with respect to the gaming situation so far will be wiped out and an excessive increase in gambling for the gaming machine will be suppressed.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suppress excessive gambling.

It is an external appearance front view of a gaming machine. It is a perspective view of the game machine which opened the main body frame and the front frame. It is an external appearance front view of a game board. It is a disassembled perspective view of a game board. It is an external appearance front view of a front unit and a rear unit. It is an external appearance front view of a rear unit. It is an external appearance front view of the rear unit which removed the cover member. It is detail drawing of the character body located in the front right side. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a character body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a character body. It is detail drawing of the character body located in front upper direction. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a character body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a character body. It is detail drawing of the character body located in the front left side. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a character body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a character body. It is a perspective view of two kinds of a front unit and a rear unit. It is a perspective view of the front unit and rear unit from another angle. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a front unit. It is an enlarged view of the right edge part of a front unit. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the left side edge part of a front unit. It is a perspective view of a front unit and a rear unit. FIG. 23 is a plan view of an operation mechanism including a cross section taken along line XX in FIG. 22. It is an enlarged view of the lower edge part of a front unit. It is a functional block diagram of a main board and a peripheral board. It is a functional block diagram of a 1st electrical decoration control board. This is a start winning process executed by the main control board. It is a list of random numbers updated by the main control board. This is a special symbol variation process executed by the main control board. This is a big hit determination process executed by the main control board. This is a variable display pattern setting process executed by the main control board. It is a table | surface of the fluctuation | variation display pattern which a main control board selects. It is explanatory drawing which shows the form of a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a notice effect and a reach effect. This is a reset process executed by the sub-integrated board. This is timer interrupt processing executed by the sub-integrated board. Command reception interrupt processing executed by the sub-integrated board. This is command reception end interrupt processing executed by the sub-integrated board. This is an effect control process that is a subroutine of the reset process. It is a list which shows the random number which a sub integrated board updates. This is a symbol setting process that is a subroutine of the effect control process. This is a notice selection process that is a subroutine of the effect control process. This is an advanced notice selection process that is a subroutine for the notice selection process. It is a table | surface of the advance notice pattern for the daytime background which a sub integration board | substrate selects. It is a list of the advance notice pattern for night backgrounds which a sub integration board chooses. It is a list display which shows an advanced notice pattern. It is a list of the comment notice pattern which a sub integrated board chooses. It is a list of comment notice patterns. This is an intense heat notice selection process that is a subroutine of the notice selection process. It is a table | surface figure which shows the intense heat warning pattern selected with a sub integration board | substrate. It is a list display figure showing an intense heat notice pattern. This is a lightning notice selection process which is a subroutine of the notice selection process. It is a table | surface of the lightning warning pattern for the daytime background which a sub integrated board | substrate selects. It is a table | surface of the lightning warning pattern for night backgrounds which a subintegrated board selects. It is a list display which shows a lightning bolt notice pattern. This is a mini character notice selection process that is a subroutine of the notice selection process. It is a list of the 1st mini character notice pattern which a sub integrated board chooses. It is a list of the 2nd mini character notice pattern which a sub integrated board chooses. It is a list of a mini character notice pattern. This is a branch effect notice selection process that is a subroutine of the notice selection process. It is a list figure of the branch production notice pattern which a sub integrated board chooses. It is a list of branch production notice patterns. It is a list of the branching effect production notice pattern which a sub integrated board chooses. It is a table | surface figure which shows a branch character effect notice notice pattern. This is a sound control process that is a subroutine of the effect control process. It is a sound determination table which determines a sound output mode. This is a sound change determination process that is a subroutine of the sound control process. This is a button input process that is a subroutine of the effect control process. This is a button notice selection process which is a button input process subroutine. It is a list of button notice patterns to be selected by the sub-integrated board. It is a list of button notice patterns to be selected by the sub-integrated board. It is a list of button notice patterns to be selected by the sub-integrated board. It is a list which shows a button notice pattern. This is a 16 ms stepping motor scheduler activation process. It is a table of a stepping motor scheduler. This is a 2 ms stepping motor scheduler activation process. This is a stepping motor scheduler pattern setting process. This is a 2 ms stepping motor scheduler operation process. It is an allocation figure of the 1st excitation data and the 2nd excitation data. Excitation data clear processing at the time of abnormality. Excitation data transmission processing. It is a time chart at the time of transmission of the 1st excitation data and the 2nd excitation data. It is a time chart at the time of reception of the 1st excitation data and the 2nd excitation data. Stepping motor processing. This is character body (Franken) abnormality determination processing. This is character body (Dracula) abnormality determination processing. It is a shielding member (Dracula) abnormality determination process. This is a character body (wolf man) abnormality determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by a liquid crystal display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by a liquid crystal display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by a liquid crystal display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by a liquid crystal display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by a liquid crystal display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by a liquid crystal display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by a liquid crystal display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by a liquid crystal display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by an effect display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by an effect display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by an effect display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the screen structure by a liquid crystal display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by an effect display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by an effect display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect by an effect display. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows a process at the time of a start opening prize. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol fluctuation waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows the process which displays determination information. It is a screen block diagram which shows an example of the display mode of random number distribution display. It is a screen block diagram which shows an example of the display mode of random number distribution display. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific example of the extraction procedure of random number information. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the random number distribution information produced | generated based on extraction of the random number information shown by FIG.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

(1) External configuration of gaming machine FIG. 1 is a diagram showing an external configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment.
FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an external configuration in a state in which the main body frame 3, the game board 4, and the front frame 5 are opened from the outer frame 2 of the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the gaming machine 1 is a pachinko machine that includes an outer frame 2, a main body frame 3, a game board 4, a front frame 5, and the like.

  The outer frame 2 has a vertically long rectangular shape with upper, lower, left, and right frame members, and is configured to include a lower plate 6 that receives the lower surface of the main body frame 3 at the lower front side. The outer frame 2 includes a hinge mechanism 7 on one side of the front surface. The hinge mechanism 7 attaches the body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 so as to be opened and closed.

  The main body frame 3 is configured by integrally molding the front frame body 8, the game board mounting frame 9 and the mechanism mounting frame 10 with a synthetic resin material. The front frame 8 formed on the front side of the main body frame 3 is formed in a rectangular frame shape having a size corresponding to the outer shape excluding the backing plate 6 of the outer frame 2. In the present embodiment, when the gaming machine 1 is installed on the island, the side that is visible to the player is the front side, and the opposite side is the rear side. For example, the main body frame 3 side with respect to the front frame body 8 is the rear side.

  A game board mounting frame 9 integrally formed at the rear portion of the front frame body 8 is configured such that the game board 4 is mounted so as to be attachable and detachable from the front. A guide rail 11 having an outer rail and an inner rail is provided on the front surface of the game board 4. A game area 12 is defined inside the guide rail 11.

  A low-frequency speaker 14 is mounted via a speaker mounting plate 13 near one side of the front lower portion of the front frame body 8 positioned below the game board mounting frame 9. A launch rail 15 that guides the game ball toward the launch path of the game board 4 is attached to the upper portion in the lower region of the front surface of the front frame 8 in an inclined manner.

  On the other hand, a lower front member 16 is attached to a lower portion in the lower region of the front surface of the front frame body 8. A lower pan 17 is provided substantially at the center of the front surface of the lower front member 16, and an operation handle 18 is provided closer to one side.

  A function of locking the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 is provided on the rear surface of the main body frame 3 (front frame body 8) opposite to the side where the hinge mechanism 7 is provided. Then, a locking device 19 having a function of locking the front frame 5 is mounted.

  The locking device 19 includes a plurality of upper and lower body frame locking hooks 21 that are detachably engaged with a closing tool 20 provided on the outer frame 2 to lock the main body frame 3 in a closed state, and an open side of the front frame 5. It comprises a plurality of upper and lower door locking hooks 23 that are detachably engaged with a closing tool 22 provided on the rear surface and lock the front frame 5 in a closed state.

  Then, a key is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 24 and rotated in one direction, so that the engagement between the main body frame locking hook 21 and the closing tool 20 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is unlocked. Is done. Further, when the key is rotated in the reverse direction, the engagement between the door locking hook 23 and the closing tool 22 of the front frame 5 is released, and the front frame 5 is unlocked.

  The front end portion of the cylinder lock 24 is exposed to the front surface of the lower front member 16 through the front frame 8 and the lower front member 16 so that the unlocking operation can be performed by inserting a key from the front of the gaming machine 1. Arranged.

  In the present embodiment, the main body frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key clockwise, and the main body frame is operated by rotating the key counterclockwise. 3, the front frame 5 is unlocked. That is, when the direction of the rotation operation is changed, either the main body frame 3 or the front frame 5 can be unlocked.

  When the main body frame 3 is locked in the closed state, the locking device 19 locks the main body frame locking hook 21 so that the engagement between the main body frame locking hook 21 and the closing tool 20 of the outer frame 2 is not released by an external operation other than the key. It is configured with a locking mechanism.

  In the locking device 19, when the main body frame 3 is locked in the closed state, the main body frame locking hook 21 is locked by the locking mechanism, and the main body frame locking hook 21 is further away from the gap between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3. Arranged at the position. By disposing the locking device 19 in such a deep position, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized attempt to unlock the main body frame 3 by operating the main body frame locking hook 21 with a wire or the like inserted from the gap. it can.

  The front frame 5 is mounted on the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable by a hinge mechanism 25 provided on one side. The front frame 5 includes a door main body frame 26, a side decoration device 27, an upper plate 28, an acoustic illumination device 29, and operation buttons 38. The door main body frame 26 is formed of a pressed metal frame member, and is formed to have a size that covers a portion extending from the upper end of the front frame 8 to the upper edge of the lower front member 16.

  A substantially circular opening window 30 through which the game area 12 of the game board 4 can be seen through from the front is formed at substantially the center of the door body frame 26. A window frame 31 having a rectangular frame shape larger than the opening window 30 is provided on the rear side of the door body frame 26. A transparent plate 32 is attached to the window frame 31.

  In the present embodiment, the game area 12 formed in the game board 4 is formed by disposing the cylinder lock 24 below the game board 4 and thinning the locking device 19 arranged on the right side of the game board 4. The area can be increased as compared with the conventional case. Furthermore, in this Embodiment, the interest with respect to a player's visual recognition can be heightened by providing the large-sized character bodies 150, 152, and 154 mentioned later.

  In addition, since the game area 12 can be enlarged, even if the stage device 40 described later is arranged at the center of the game area 12, the start winning port 45 and the electric start prize port 46 arranged below the stage device 40 can be used. It is possible to prevent the player from thinking that it is difficult to guide the game ball. Further, the opening window 30 of the front frame 5 is enlarged in accordance with the enlargement of the game area 12, so that the rigidity of the front frame 5 is lowered. However, by configuring the front frame 5 integrally with the upper plate 28, it is possible to suppress a decrease in rigidity of the front frame 5.

  On the front side of the door main body frame 26, an upper plate 28 is provided at the lower portion around the opening window 30, side decoration devices 27 are mounted on the left and right sides, and an acoustic decoration device 29 is mounted on the upper portion. An operation button 38 is provided near the left side of the upper plate 28.

  The side decoration device 27 is mainly composed of a side decoration body 33 in which a lamp substrate is disposed and formed of a synthetic resin material. A plurality of slit-like opening holes that are long in the horizontal direction are arranged in the side decoration body 33 in the vertical direction, and a lens 34 corresponding to a light source disposed on the lamp substrate is incorporated in the opening hole.

  The acoustic illumination device 29 includes a transparent cover body 35, a speaker 36, a speaker cover 37, a reflector body, and the like (not shown), and these constituent members are assembled together to form a unit.

  FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a front configuration of the game board 4. The game board 4 is configured to include a game area 12, and includes an effect device 40 at the center of the game area 12. The rendering device 40 includes a front unit 140 and a rear unit 142, which will be described later. The external configuration of the front unit 14 and the rear unit 1142 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The front unit 142 includes a special symbol display 41, a special symbol storage lamp 54, and a liquid crystal display 116. The special symbol indicator 41 displays the special symbol in a variable manner by lighting a plurality of light emitters. In the special figure memory lamp 54, a predetermined determination condition is satisfied by lighting of a plurality of light emitters (a game ball is won at the start winning opening 45 or the electric starting winning opening 46), but the change of the special symbol is still started. No starting memory number is displayed. The liquid crystal display 116 includes a display area 42 that displays a variety of effects while variably displaying a plurality of types of decorative symbols including three symbols of left, middle, and right.

  Further, effect lamps 44 a and 44 b are attached to the right side portion of the effect device 40. The light emitting areas of these effect lamps 44 a and 44 b are turned on in accordance with the effect display by the display area 42.

  Below the stage device 40, a start winning opening 45 and an electric start winning opening 46 having a pair of opening and closing blades 47 below the start winning opening 45 are arranged. The electric start winning opening 46 is controlled so that the opening / closing blade 47 is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the display result of the normal symbol display 50 is “winning”. For example, the opening / closing blade 47 is controlled to be opened once in 0.5 seconds in the normal state and to be opened three times in 0.8 seconds in the probability variation state.

  In the present embodiment, the start winning opening 45 can always win a game ball from above. On the other hand, when the electric start winning opening 46 is blocked by the start winning opening 45 and the open / close wing 47 is closed, the game ball cannot enter the winning state. Therefore, the game ball can be won only when the opening / closing wing 47 is in the open state.

  When a game ball wins the start winning opening 45 or the electric start winning opening 46, the game balls are detected by the start opening sensors 55a and 55b (only the reference numerals are shown in FIG. 25), and these detections (predetermined determination conditions are established). Based on this, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. The predetermined number is, for example, three when a game ball wins the start winning opening 45 (detected by the start opening sensor 55a), and when the game ball wins the electric start winning opening 46 (start opening). (When detected by the sensor 55b).

  When a game ball wins the start winning opening 45 or the electric start winning opening 46, the special symbol display 41 permits the variation display of the special symbol (the variation display of the decorative symbol in the display area 42). When a game ball is won at the start winning opening 45 or the electric start winning opening 46 and the game ball is detected by the start opening sensors 55a and 55b, a big hit determination random number for determining whether or not to give a big hit gaming state to be described later. Is extracted. When it is determined that the big hit gaming state is given, the display result of the special symbol on the special symbol display 41 is determined to be a win (specific display mode).

  Further, the jackpot determination random number extracted based on the fact that the game ball has won the start winning opening 45 or the electric start winning opening 46 and is detected by the start opening sensor 55 during the change of the special symbol, is a predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces). ), And the stored number (starting stored number) is displayed by turning on the special-purpose memory lamp 54 composed of a plurality of (for example, four) light emitters.

  The special figure memory lamp 54 is disposed below the effect device 40. In the present embodiment, two start winning ports, the start winning port 45 and the electric start winning port 46, are provided as the winning ports for which the variation display of the special symbol is permitted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to be provided only in one of the start winning opening 45 or the electric starting winning opening 46.

  In the present embodiment, three game balls are paid out when a game ball wins the start winning opening 45, and four game balls are paid out when a game ball wins the electric start winning opening 46. Since the start winning opening 45 can always win a game ball from above, if there are too many payouts for winning a game ball, it will be a loss for the hole. Therefore, the hole loss can be suppressed by setting the number of payouts in this way.

  On the other hand, the electric start winning opening 46 is controlled to extend the opening time and the number of opening times of the open wing 47 in a short time state to be described later, and the winning probability that a game ball wins the electric start winning opening 46 increases. However, on the other hand, the amount of game balls consumed in a predetermined period becomes large, and if the number of game balls to be paid out is too small, it is a loss for a player who does not want to reduce the number of game balls. Therefore, the player's loss can be suppressed by setting the number of payouts in this way. In consideration of these game balances, the number of payouts for each of the start winning opening 45 and the electric start winning opening 46 is set.

  On the left side of the game area 12, a normal symbol display 50 is provided for variably displaying normal symbols by lighting and blinking of the light emitter. Further, a game state lamp 51 for lighting a light emitter according to the game state is attached below the normal symbol display 50. In the present embodiment, the gaming state lamp 51 is controlled so that the illuminant is lit in red in the probability variation state, the illuminant is lit in green in the short-time state, and the illuminant is turned off in the normal state. The

  Below the normal symbol display 50, a left gate having a gate switch 53a and a right gate having a gate switch 53b are provided. When the game ball passes through the left gate or the right gate, the game ball is detected by the gate switch 53a or the gate switch 53b, and the normal symbol display 50 starts the fluctuation display of the normal symbol.

  That is, the normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display 50 is permitted in accordance with the detection of the game ball by the gate switch 53a and the gate switch 53b. When a game ball is detected by the gate switch 53a and the gate switch 53b, a normal random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol is determined is extracted.

  When it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit, the normal symbol display result on the normal symbol display 50 is determined as a hit. Further, the normal random number determined per normal symbol extracted based on the fact that the game ball passes the left gate or the right gate during the normal symbol change and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 53a or 53b is a predetermined number (for example, 4 Can be stored, and the stored number is displayed by turning on the general memory lamp 56 composed of a plurality of (for example, four) light emitters. The general memory lamp 56 is arranged on the right side of the game area 12.

  Below the electric start winning opening 46, a large winning opening 60 having an opening / closing plate 62 for opening and closing a horizontally long rectangular opening is disposed. The special winning opening 60 is configured to include a solenoid 63 and a count sensor 64 (both of which are indicated only by reference numerals in FIG. 25), which are driving sources for opening and closing the opening and closing plate 62. When a game ball wins the big winning opening 60, it is detected by the count sensor 64, and based on this detection, a predetermined number (for example, 14) larger than when the game ball wins the starting winning opening 45 or the electric starting winning opening 46. Game balls are paid out.

  At the bottom of the gaming area 12 below the big winning opening 60 is provided an out opening 48 through which the gaming balls that have flown down the gaming area 12 and have not won any winning openings or winning devices are taken. Four winning ports 66 a to 66 d are provided on the left and right of the starting winning port 45, the electric starting winning port 46 and the big winning port 60. When a game ball wins the winning openings 66a to 66d, a predetermined number (for example, 13) of game balls are paid out. In addition, an electric decoration lamp 49 (only a reference numeral is shown in FIG. 25) is attached to the game area 12 so that lighting and blinking are controlled in accordance with the game state.

  Here, a game realized by various winning devices provided on the game board 4 will be described. First, when a game ball is launched by a launching device (not shown) provided on the back side of the gaming machine 1 and is released to the upper part of the game area 12 through the launch rail 15 and the guide rail 11, the game ball is played in the game area 12. Flows down toward the out port 48 while colliding with an obstacle nail or the like.

  Next, when the game ball passes through the left gate or the right gate in the game area 12 and is detected by the gate switch 53a or 53b, the normal symbol display 50 displays the variation of the normal symbol (the illuminant alternates between green and red). Is lit). The normal symbol fluctuation display on the normal symbol display 50 stops after a predetermined period.

  When the display result of the normal symbol at the time of the stop is “hit” (the illuminator is turned on in green), the opening / closing blade 47 of the electric start winning opening 46 is opened for a predetermined time or a predetermined number of times. For example, the opening / closing blade 47 is opened only once in 0.5 seconds in the normal state. On the other hand, when the display result of the normal symbol at the time of the stop is “losing” (the illuminant is lit in red), the open / close wing 47 is not opened, so that the electric start winning opening 46 remains in a state where the game ball cannot be won. It becomes.

  If the game ball is won in the start winning opening 45 or the electric start winning opening 46 and the game ball is detected by the start opening sensor 55, the special symbol display 41 can start the variation display of the special symbol. Then, the special symbol display 41 starts to display the variation of the special symbol. The state where the special symbol variation display can be started is, for example, a state where the jackpot game is not being played or a state where the special symbol and the decorative symbol variation display is not being performed. When the special symbol variation display is started, the decorative symbol variation display is also started by the liquid crystal display 116.

  The change display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is stopped after a predetermined period. When the display mode when the special symbol and the decorative symbol are stopped is a specific display mode, the control of the big hit gaming state (profit granting state) is started. The specific display mode is a display mode in which a jackpot symbol is displayed. For example, a special symbol is a state in which lighting of a plurality of light emitters is combined, and a decorative symbol is a state in which the same decorative symbol is combined.

  In the big hit game state, the open / close plate 62 of the big prize opening 60 falls to the near side and the entrance is opened, and the big prize opening 60 is opened until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) has been won. Control that is maintained as it is is performed. In addition, when there is a predetermined time or a predetermined number of winnings, the opening / closing plate 62 stands up to close the large winning opening 60, and the large winning opening 60 is kept closed until a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses. Is done.

  Then, when the predetermined time has elapsed, the opening / closing plate 62 is again tilted to the near side, so that the special winning opening 60 is opened. And control which repeats this opening and closing cycle 15 times is performed. This open / close cycle is called a round (R).

  In this way, when the control in the big hit gaming state is executed, the big winning opening 60 is opened. By winning game balls in the opened big winning opening 60, it is possible to acquire a larger number of game balls in a shorter time than winning game balls in the starting winning opening 45 or the electric starting winning opening 46. Therefore, in this case, a large profit can be given to the player, and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  In the present embodiment, the variation display of the decorative symbols is controlled to stop in the order of the left decorative symbol 80a → the right decorative symbol 80c → the middle decorative symbol 80b. The variation display of the left decorative design 80a stops after, for example, 6800 msec from the variation start. Further, the change display of the medium decorative design 80b stops, for example, after 8000 msec from the start of the change. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol means a combination of symbols in a state where all of the left and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c are stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when the display mode when the special symbol and the decorative symbol are stopped is a more special display mode among the specific display modes, the probability of the next jackpot gaming state after the control of the jackpot gaming state is performed The control of the so-called probability variation state (special game state) in which the value becomes high is started. The special display mode is a display mode in which a probable big hit symbol is displayed. For example, a special symbol is a state in which lighting of a plurality of light emitters which are probable big hits is combined, and a decorative symbol is a state in which the same specific symbols are combined.

  In the present embodiment, the probability of shifting to the jackpot gaming state in the normal state is 1/490, and the probability of shifting to the jackpot gaming state in the probability variation state is 1/70. In the probability variation state, the control for increasing the probability that the normal symbol variation display result on the normal symbol display 50 is “win”, and the normal symbol variation display result on the normal symbol display 50 is “win”. Control for extending the opening time of the opening / closing blade 47 opened based on the above is performed.

  Further, when the display mode when the special symbol and the decorative symbol are stopped is a specific display mode that is not a special display mode, the control of the short-time state is performed after the control of the big hit gaming state. In the control in the short time state, the probability that the result of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 50 is “hit” until the special symbol change display is performed by the special symbol display 41 a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). For example, the opening time of the opening / closing blade 47 that is opened based on the fact that the result of the normal symbol variation display is “hit” is controlled by the normal symbol display 50.

  In the short time state, until the special symbol display 41 executes the special symbol fluctuation display a predetermined number of times, the winning probability to the electric start winning opening 46 increases, and the number of executions of the special symbol fluctuation display in the predetermined period is increased. Can be increased. Therefore, the player can obtain an advantageous state due to the short time state. In the probability variation state described above, in addition to the time-shortening control, the normal symbol display 50 increases the probability that the result of the normal symbol variation display is “hit”, so that it is more advantageous to the player than the time-shortening state. Become. The normal state is a state other than the probability variation state and the short time state described above.

  FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 4. The effect device according to the present embodiment is configured to include two units on the front and rear sides of the game board 4a. Specifically, the front unit 140 is disposed on the front side of the game board 4a, and the front unit 140 is attached from the front side of the game board 4a. Conversely, a rear unit 142 is disposed on the back side of the game board 4a, and the rear unit 142 is attached from the back side of the game board 4a.

  A through hole 144 is formed in the game board 4a by punching the plywood material in the thickness direction. The through-hole 144 is greatly opened from the center of the game area 12 to a slightly upper range, and the opening shape substantially matches the outer shape of the front unit 140.

  The front unit 140 is formed in a shape in which the second half portion (connecting insertion portion) facing the game board 4 a is completely inserted into the through hole 144. The front unit 140 is attached to the game board 4 a in a state in which the second half portion is fitted in the through hole 144. The rear half of the front unit 140 has a thickness that is substantially the same as the thickness of the game board 4a. For this reason, when the front unit 140 is attached to the game board 4a, the second half portion is in a so-called flush state where the skin is aligned with the back surface of the game board 4a.

  Further, the front unit 140 is formed with a boss 140a that protrudes rearward from the second half portion (insertion connecting portion). A total of three bosses 140a are formed, one at the upper position of the front unit 140 and two at the lower position. When the three bosses 140a are all inserted from the front side of the game board 4a through the through holes 144, the three bosses 140a protrude rearward from the back side of the game board 4a.

  On the other hand, when the front unit 140 is attached to the game board 4a, the front half part projects to the front side of the game board 4a. The front half portion is formed to have substantially the same thickness as that of the guide rail 11, for example. Therefore, when the front unit 140 is attached to the game board 4a, the front half part projects forward from the board surface within the game area 12, thereby guiding and guiding the flow of the game ball.

  On the other hand, the rear unit 142 is formed so that the front surface facing the back surface of the game board 4a is almost flat, and this flat front surface is attached to the game board 4a with the mounting surface 142a. When the rear unit 142 is attached to the game board 4a, the attachment surface 142a is in close contact with the back surface of the game board 4a. However, gaps due to manufacturing errors and distortions are allowed.

  Although the attachment surface 142 a is not fitted into the through hole 144, a part of the mounting surface 142 a is in a positional relationship facing the through hole 144. That is, when the rear unit 142 is attached to the game board 4 a, the attachment surface 142 a partially protrudes inside the through hole 144 and is exposed to the front side of the game board 4 a through the through hole 144. However, since this exposed part is covered with the front unit 140, it is not directly visible to the player.

  Further, the rear unit 142 has three boss holes 142b corresponding to the bosses 140a of the front unit 140. When the front unit 140 and the rear unit 142 are attached to the game board 4a from the front and rear, three boss holes 142b are formed. The bosses 140a reach the rear unit 142 through the through holes 144 and are respectively inserted into the corresponding boss holes 142b. In this state, the front unit 140 and the rear unit 142 are positioned relative to each other.

  A display unit (not shown) is further attached to the game board 4 from behind the rear unit 142. The display unit is configured as a unit in which the liquid crystal display 116 and the second illumination control board 113 (only the reference numerals are shown in FIG. 25) are integrated, and displays a stunning image on the screen. The screen (display area 42) of the display unit in a state where the game board 4 is completed can be visually recognized by the player from the front side through the through hole 144.

  FIG. 5 is an external front view of the state in which the front unit 140 and the rear unit 142 are connected. The front unit 140 plays a role of giving a player a certain visual effect / impact from modeling / decoration applied to the outer surface thereof. In addition, such modeling and decoration of the front unit 140, combined with the design of the decorative sheet (cell board) attached to the front surface of the game board 4a, has the effect of making the player clearly recognize the model and game concept of the gaming machine 1. Play.

  At the same time, in the present embodiment, the front unit 140 is attached at a substantially central position of the game area 12, so that an effect area in which an effect operation is performed is formed. In the present embodiment, in this effect area, for example, a light emission effect by lighting / flashing of an LED, an image display effect by a liquid crystal display, an operation effect by a movable accessory, and the like are performed.

  Further, the central portion of the front unit 140 and the rear unit 142 is opened in a rectangular shape so that the display unit can be visually recognized. Therefore, the display area 42 is formed in the opening portion. In the display area 42, an effect is displayed by displaying an effect image on the liquid crystal display 116.

  The overall appearance of the front unit 140 is formed using a “monster house” as a motif. The “monster house” here is a building where characters (comic characters imitating imaginary monsters) appearing in creative stories are living, and the appearance is Western-style brick construction. ing.

  When the front unit 140 is regarded as a “monster house”, the roof decoration portion 140b corresponding to the roof has a shape that widens to the left and right. In addition, the roof decoration portion 140b functions to distribute the game balls flowing down from above the game area 12 to the left and right. The part that works to distribute left and right is called the so-called armor cover.

  A comical character body (monster) 140c is arranged immediately below the left roof decoration portion 140b. The character body (monster) 140c corresponds to the character who becomes the master of the “monster house” in the above story, and is visually designed to imitate a human boy. In terms of design, this character body (monster) 140c looks through the wall from the attic and looks into the face and both hands.

  Further, the center of the roof decoration portion 140b swells in a dome roof shape, and a window decoration portion 140d imitating a “roof window” is disposed immediately below. The window decoration portion 140d can be easily recognized as a window in appearance by adopting transparent parts. Further, an LED 140l is mounted on an LED substrate (not shown) at the back of the window decoration portion 140d. Therefore, in the window decoration portion 140d, a light emission effect is performed by turning on and blinking the LED 140l.

  The LED board is built in the front unit 140. In the present embodiment, the window decoration portion 140d and the LED 140l function as an effect lamp 44a (see FIG. 3). As described above, the present embodiment is configured to include the LEDs 140l and 140m as the predetermined light source.

  Another spherical guiding member 140e is attached to the front face of the window decoration portion 140d so as to obliquely close the “roof window”. The ball guide member 140e is arranged so as to be braided together with the other decoration member 140f on the front surface of the window decoration portion 140d. Each of the ball guiding member 140e and the decorative member 140f is three-dimensionally provided with a wood grain pattern on the front surface.

  The left and right side edges of the front unit 140 extend downward so as to surround both sides of the display area 42, and the right edge of the front unit 140 is wider than the left edge. The roof decoration portion 140b extends from the upper part of the front unit 140 to the left and right side edges, so that the outer edges of the left and right side edges are outside the game area by the roof decoration portion 140b. 12.

  A wall decoration body 140g is attached to the right edge of the front unit 140 along the inside of the roof decoration portion 140b. Further, another wall decoration body 140h is attached to the right edge from the upper edge to the right edge of the display area 42, and a certain gap is provided between the wall decoration body 140h and the previous wall decoration body 140g. It is secured. These wall decorations 140g and 140h are each formed into a shape in which bricks are stacked, and the atmosphere as a “monster house” is created by the formation of these wall decorations 140g and 140h.

  On the other hand, a window decoration portion 141 is formed on the left edge of the front unit 140 so as to be located inside the roof decoration portion 140b. The window decoration portion 141 is a decoration as a “light window” leading to the interior of the “monster house”.

  On the right edge of the front unit 140, a sphere guide passage 148 is formed in a space between the wall decorations 140g and 140h. The ball guide passage 148 extends downward from the upper side of the display area 42 so as to bypass the right side, and is opened toward the game area 12 below. During a game by the gaming machine 1, the game ball that has flowed down from above the front unit 140 is guided by the ball guide member 140 e and sent into the ball guide passage 148.

  A wall surface member 140 i is attached to the right edge of the front unit 140 at a position behind the ball guide passage 148 as viewed from the front. The wall surface member 140i has light transmittance by adopting transparent parts (plate-like members), and an LED 140m is mounted on an LED substrate (not shown) at a position behind the wall member 140i. For this reason, in the sphere guide passage 148, a light emission effect by lighting / flashing of the LED 140m is performed similarly to the window decoration portion 140d. In the present embodiment, the wall surface member 140i and the LED 140m function as the effect lamp 44b.

  Although not shown in detail in FIG. 5, the wall surface member 140 i has a light diffusion lens cut (for example, a prism cut or a diamond cut) on the back surface thereof. On the other hand, the front surface of the wall member 140i is processed into a shape having visual uniformity with the surface shapes of the wall decorations 140g and 140h. Specifically, since the wall decorations 140g and 140h have a shape in which bricks are stacked, a protrusion that imitates each brick is also formed on the front surface of the wall surface member 140i.

  A ball receiving stage 140j is formed at the lower edge of the front unit 140. In the present embodiment, not only the front unit 140 but also the ball receiving stage 142c is formed at the lower edge of the rear unit 142. When the front unit 140 and the rear unit 142 are combined together, Stages 140j and 142c are integrated.

  The ball receiving stages 140j and 142c are divided into upper, middle, and lower three stages. Of these, the upper and middle ball receiving stages 142c are formed in the rear unit 142, and the lower ball receiving stage 140j is formed in the front unit 140. . Among these, the upper ball receiving stage 142c is located at the innermost position, and the position of the upper ball receiving stage 142c and the lower ball receiving stage 140j are sequentially lowered to the front side.

  In relation to the ball receiving stages 142c and 140j, a guide passage 142d is formed in the rear unit 142. The guide passage 142d is lowered from the center position of the upper and middle ball receiving stages 142c and bent to the front. And extend. Further, the front unit 140 is formed with a discharge port 140k of the guide passage 142d at the center position of the lower edge thereof.

  The functions of the ball receiving stages 142c and 140j and the guide passage 142d are substantially the same as those known. That is, the ball receiving stages 142c and 140j roll the game ball so that it swings to the left and right on the upper surface, and the destination of the game ball cannot be predicted. In this process, the game ball falls to the lower stage or is inserted into the guide passage 142d. Therefore, it is possible to add interest to the game by the movement of the game ball in the meantime. When the game ball is inserted into the guide passage 142d, the game ball is discharged directly from the lower discharge port 140k, so that it is easy to win the start winning port 45 (see FIG. 3).

  Although not shown in detail in FIG. 5, a warp passage is formed in the front unit 140 in relation to the ball receiving stages 142c and 140j. The warp passages are formed on the left and right side edges of the front unit 140, respectively, and both play a role of guiding the game ball to the ball receiving stage 142c. In the present embodiment, the form and arrangement of the warp passage are different on the left and right.

  FIG. 6 shows the outer shape of the rear unit 142 in detail. Unlike the front unit 140, most of the rear unit 142 is hidden behind the game board 4a. However, since the part of the ball receiving stage 142c and the part surrounding the display area 42 are exposed to the front and directly touch the player's eyes, they are decorated similarly to the front unit 140.

  Above the upper ball receiving stage 142c, a decoration member 142e is disposed at the back position, and the decoration member 142e extends to the left and right so as to partition the lower edge of the display area. In addition, the decoration member 142e is formed into a shape in which bricks are arranged in a horizontal row, so that the decoration and the visual unity of the front unit 140 are maintained. The decorative member 142e is divided into left and right portions with a guide passage 142d.

  A decorative member 142f is also disposed on the left portion of the upper edge of the display area 42. The decorative member 142f is also formed into a shape in which bricks are arranged in a horizontal row when viewed from the front, and is further formed into a shape in which bricks are arranged in the depth direction.

  With respect to the other periphery of the display area 42, the same decoration (decoration simulating the arrangement of bricks) is applied to the right position of the decoration member 142f, and the same decoration is applied to the right edge. On the other hand, the left edge of the display area 42 is slightly different from the others and is decorated like a wooden door. Such a decoration of the rear unit 142 is not so conspicuous because it is located just behind the front unit 140 when viewed from the front, but the player changes the direction and angle of the line of sight to change the display area 42. If the periphery is looked into, the decoration of the rear unit 142 is clearly visible.

  As indicated by a broken line in FIG. 6, the rear unit 142 has built-in performance action bodies that can appear and disappear in the display area 42, that is, character bodies 150, 152, and 154. These character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are accommodated around the display area 42 in a state where they are located at the back (inside the rear unit 142) from the mounting surface 142a. It moves toward the display area 42 and appears on the front side of the display screen.

  The rear unit 142 is provided with three cover members 142g at positions corresponding to the mounting surface 142a. The cover member 142g is made of a transparent or translucent resin plate having a thin wall thickness (for example, about 2 mm), and the mounting surface 142a is formed from the front surface of the cover member 142g. In FIG. 6, the outer shapes of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are indicated by broken lines. However, since the cover member 142g has transparency, the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are actually visible through the front side. Is done.

  FIG. 7 is an external front view of the rear unit 142 with the cover member 142g removed. The three character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are arranged so as to surround the display area 42, and one character body 150, 152, and 154 is arranged above, on the right side, and on the left side, respectively.

  Each of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 is designed in a different form. These character bodies 150, 152, and 154 all resemble some kind of “monster” appearing in a famous mysterious novel, but are visually designed to be deformed.

  The character body (Franken) 150 located on the right side of the display area 42 is imitating a “Frankenstein monster”, and its expression is formed so that it feels like it is missing somewhere. The character body (Dracula) 152 located above the display area 42 is imitating “Vampire Dracula”, and is formed so as to receive an impression that seems somewhat weak from the face. A character body (wolf man) 154 located on the left side of the display area 42 is imitating a “wolf man”, and its expression is formed with a mascot-like affection.

  In the rear unit 142, accommodating portions 156, 158, and 160 (standby accommodating portions) are formed corresponding to the three character bodies 150, 152, and 154, respectively. A photo sensor 150n is installed in the housing unit 156, photo sensors 152n and 153n are installed in the housing unit 158, and a photo sensor 154n is installed in the housing unit 160, respectively. The rear unit 142 is entirely covered with a casing 162, and the three accommodating portions 156, 158, and 160 are formed inside the casing 162.

  The casing 162 has a substantially rectangular outer shape, its front surface is largely open, and its rear surface is closed by a back wall 162a. The outer edge of the casing 162 is surrounded by a side wall 162b, and the side wall 162b is formed so as to rise from the peripheral edge of the back wall 162a to the front side. And said accommodating part 156,158 and 160 are formed inside the side wall 162b in the space before this back wall 162a.

  In the accommodating portions 156, 158 and 160, the side ends adjacent to the display area 42 are the entrances and exits of the character bodies 150, 152 and 154. Character bodies 150, 152, and 154 (production members) are housed in housing portions 156, 158, and 160, respectively, so that they cannot be seen from the front (standby position), and the front of the display screen (front that faces the player). It shifts to a state (appearance position) that appears in a visible manner.

  At this time, the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 enter and exit through the aforementioned entrances. The character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are detected by the photosensors 150, 153n, and 154n when they are accommodated in the accommodating portions 156, 158, and 160, respectively, and become standby positions (original positions). The photosensor 152n detects the original position of a shielding member (dracula) 166 described later.

  The rear unit 142 is attached to the back side of the game board 4a, and the front unit 140 is attached to the front side thereof, so that the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are accommodated in the accommodating portions 156, 158, and 160, respectively. When it is in the state, it is hidden behind the front unit 140 and the game board 4a and is not visible from the front.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a shielding member (Franken) 164, a shielding member (Dracula) 166, and a shielding member corresponding to each of the character body (Franken) 150, the character body (Dracula) 152, and the character body (Wolf man) 154. (Wolf man) 168 is provided. These shielding members 164, 166 and 168 serve to block the exposure of the inside of the accommodating portions 156, 158 and 160 through the display area 42 from the front side. Therefore, as indicated by the solid line in FIG. 7, when the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are accommodated in the accommodating portions 156, 158, and 160, they are accommodated by the corresponding shielding members 164, 166, and 168, respectively. The doorways of the sections 156, 158 and 160 are closed.

  On the other hand, as indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 7, the shielding members 164, 166, and 168 are all displaced toward the display area 42 to open the entrances and exits of the corresponding accommodating portions 156, 158, and 160, respectively. . In this case, the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 appear on the front side of the display area 42.

  At this time, with respect to the character bodies 150 and 152 on the right side and the upper side of the display area 42, the respective shielding members 164 and 166 are rotated along the front surface of the display screen around one end portion so that the doorway is opened. For the character body 154 on the left side of the display area 42, the doorway is opened when the shielding member (wolf man) 168 rotates about the vertical axis toward the display screen.

  Further, the shielding members 164, 166, and 168 are provided with a decoration that is consistent with the decoration on the outer surface of the front unit 140. For example, the shielding members 164 and 166 located on the right side and the upper side of the display area 42 are decorated in the same manner as the decoration member 142f, which is similar to the arrangement of bricks. On the other hand, the shielding member (wolf man) 168 located on the left side of the display area 42 is decorated like a wooden door as described above.

  In the present embodiment, the three character bodies 150, 152, and 154 perform the appearing and appearing operations in the display area 42. However, each of the operation ranges is designed not to interfere with each other, or for control purposes. The operation without interference is performed. For example, the character body (wolf man) 154 on the left side of the display area 42 moves linearly to the right from the left end of the display area 42, but the motion range A1 at this time is the other two character bodies 150. And 152 does not overlap with the operation range A2.

  Regarding the character bodies 150 and 152 located on the right side and the upper side of the display area 42, there is a design overlap in the operation range in which the respective shielding members 164 and 166 rotate. However, for these character bodies 150 and 152, control is performed so that the mutual movement ranges (angles) B1 and B2 do not interfere with each other during actual movement.

  FIG. 8 specifically shows an operation mechanism for the character body (Franken) 150 and the shielding member (Franken) 164. The motion mechanism including the character body (Franken) 150 and the shielding member (Franken) 164 is unitized in a state of being housed in a box-shaped mechanism box 150a. The mechanism box 150a is housed in the rear unit 142 as a whole unit, and in this state, a housing portion 156 is formed inside the mechanism box 150a.

  The character body (Franken) 150 is composed of a combination of three movable parts, and specifically includes a head part 150b, a left arm part 150c, and a right arm part 150d. These parts 150b, 150c, and 150d are pin-joined to form a link mechanism, and each corresponds to a section of the link mechanism.

  In addition, an elevating slider 150e is accommodated in the mechanism box 150a, and the elevating slider 150e also constitutes one action mechanism together with the character body (franken) 150. The elevating slider 150e is supported so as to be movable up and down in the mechanism box 150a.

  The head part 150b of the character body (Franken) 150 is supported by the mechanism box 150a via a fulcrum 150f at a portion corresponding to the chest of the “monster”. A lever 150g extends obliquely downward from this portion, and the head part 150b and the lift slider 150e are joined by slider through the lever 150g.

  The left arm part 150c and the right arm part 150d of the character body (Franken) 150 are connected to each other at a portion corresponding to the base of the arm. The left arm part 150c and the right arm part 150d operate as a unit on the mechanism without relatively moving.

  However, the head part 150b is located between the right arm part 150d and the left arm part 150c when viewed in the front-rear direction, and these are stored in the mechanism box 150a so as to overlap in the front-rear direction. Accordingly, an appropriate clearance is secured between the head part 150b, the left arm part 150c, and the right arm part 150d. Accordingly, in the present embodiment, the character body (Franken) 150 has a large thickness as a whole, and is structurally different from a movable accessory having only one thin plate.

  Although not shown in FIG. 8, the head part 150 b is pin-joined to the left arm part 150 c and the right arm part 150 d at a portion corresponding to the back of the “monster”. On the other hand, the right arm part 150d is pin-joined to the shielding member (Franken) 164 at a portion corresponding to the palm area. As a result, a single mechanism from the elevating slider 150e to the shielding member (franken) 164 via the head part 150b and the right arm part 150d is configured.

  By constructing a single mechanism, the character body (Franken) 150 as a whole has a thickness as well as a two-dimensional visual effect by a single action like a movable member having only one thin plate. It can be shown as being. Further, the character body (Franken) 150 can be shown in three dimensions. Further, it is possible to obtain a visual effect in which the image displayed in the display area 42 on the rear side of the character body (Franken) 150 has a depth.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, a stepping motor 150h (drive source) is attached to the back side of the mechanism box 150a. The character body (Franken) 150 and the shielding member (Franken) 164 can operate using the stepping motor 150h as a drive source.

  In the mechanism box 150a, an open hole 150j is formed in the right side wall 150i in FIG. The opening hole 150j opens the space inside the mechanism box 150a in the right direction and ensures the visibility to the inside. Note that the casing 162 of the rear unit 142 is also entirely molded from a transparent resin, and even when the mechanism box 152a is housed in the casing 162, the inside thereof can be viewed through the opening hole 150j.

  FIG. 9 and FIG. 10 are diagrams showing an operation example of the character body (franken) 150 and the shielding member (franken) 164. The lift slider 150e is lifted and lowered by the power from the stepping motor 150h. The power from the stepping motor 150h is transmitted to the lifting slider 150e by a pinion 150r attached to the output shaft giving a rotational motion to the rack 150s formed on the lifting slider 150e.

  The raising / lowering operation of the raising / lowering slider 150e is transmitted to the head part 150b via the lever 150g. When the elevating slider 150e is raised, the lever 150g is pulled up accordingly, and thereby the head part 150b rotates around the fulcrum 150f. By the rotation of the head part 150b at this time, a movement in which the character body (Franken) 150, which is just a “monster”, protrudes the head forward is realized.

  An engaging groove 150k is formed at the lower end of the elevating slider 150e, and the elevating slider 150e and the head part 150b are joined via the engaging groove 150k.

  A character plate (franken) reference plate 150m is formed on the lift slider 150e below the engagement groove 150k, and the character plate (franken) reference plate 150m is housed in a recess of the photosensor 150n. Position (see FIG. 8A). The size of the reference plate 150m is approximately twice as large as the concave portion of the photosensor 150n.

  When the head part 150b is further rotated, the movement is transmitted to the left arm part 150c and the right arm part 150d, and the right arm part 150d is connected to the shielding member (Franken) 164 as a connecting node. As a result, the shielding member (franken) 164 is obliquely displaced from the initial posture (hanging state), so that an operation as if the shielding member (franken) 164 was pushed up in the upper left direction is realized.

  At this time, the left arm part 150c and the right arm part 150d work as articulated nodes having no fixed fulcrum, so the left arm part 150c and the right arm part 150d move in the upper left direction according to the movement of the shielding member (Franken) 164 and the head part 150b. To do.

  Therefore, as the entire motion mechanism, the character body (Franken) 150, which is a “monster”, pushes the shielding member (Franken) 164 with both hands, and an effect operation is realized as if the face sticks out from there. In addition, since the shielding member (Franken) 164 is decorated to resemble a brick wall, the movement of the character body (Franken) 150 at this time causes the “monster” to have its monster power, The visual effect can be obtained as if the brick wall of the “house” was forcibly pushed up.

  FIG. 11 is a diagram specifically illustrating an operation mechanism for the character body (Dracula) 152 and the shielding member (Dracula) 166. The motion mechanism including the character body (Dracula) 152 and the shielding member (Dracula) 166 is also unitized in a state of being housed in the box-shaped mechanism box 152a. Similarly, the mechanism box 152a is housed in the rear unit 142 as a whole unit, and in this state, a housing portion 158 is formed inside the mechanism box 152a.

  The character body (Dracula) 152 is a single component, and two link mechanisms are provided in the mechanism box 152a. Of these, one system is for rotating (or swinging) the character body (Dracula) 152 and the shielding member (Dracula) 166 as a whole, and the other system is for the character body (Dracula) 152 being a shielding member. (Dracula) For sliding in the longitudinal direction of 166.

  Of the two link mechanisms, the first one (second link mechanism) includes a main part 152b formed integrally with the shielding member (dracula) 166, as well as the main part 152b (swing member). A lever 152c for rotating (or swinging) the character body (Dracula) 152 is included. The main part 152b is supported by the mechanism box 152a via a fulcrum 152d, and swings freely in the left-right direction around the fulcrum 152d.

  One lever 152c is swingably supported by the mechanism box 152a via a fulcrum 152e. The end of the lever 152c located on the lower side from the fulcrum 152e is joined to the main part 152b.

  A guide groove 152i is formed at the end of the lever 152c along its longitudinal direction, and an engagement pin (not shown) is provided on the main part 152b so as to protrude rearward in the front-rear direction. The main part 152b is mechanically connected to the lever 152c by inserting the engaging pin into the guide groove 152i.

  A guide groove 152f is formed along the longitudinal direction on the opposite side, that is, on the end located on the upper side from the fulcrum 152e, and the tip of the crank 152g is inserted into the guide groove 152f. The crank 152g is connected to the output shaft of the stepping motor 152h, and rotates or rotates with its power.

  The remaining one system (first link mechanism) includes a connecting rod 153a connected to the character body (Dracula) 152 and a lever 153b connected to the connecting rod 153a. The character body (Dracula) 152 is designed in a posture as if “Vampire Dracula” is flying in the sky, and the connecting rod 153a is pin-joined backward as viewed in the flight direction of the character body (Dracula) 152.

  On the other hand, the character body (Dracula) 152 is slidably supported with respect to the main part 152b of another system. For this reason, a guide groove 153c is formed along the longitudinal direction of the main part 152b. An engagement pin (not shown) is formed behind the character body (Dracula) 152 when viewed from the front side, and this engagement pin is in a state of being inserted into the guide groove 153c.

  The lever 153b is also formed with a guide groove 153d along the longitudinal direction thereof, and the tip of the crank 153e is inserted into the guide groove 153d. The crank 153e is connected to the output shaft of the stepping motor 153f and is rotated or rotated by its power.

  As for the character body (Dracula) 152, the entire mechanism box 152a is formed of transparent parts. For this reason, the state of the two link mechanisms can be easily confirmed from various directions around them.

  FIG. 12 and FIG. 13 show an operation example of the character body (Dracula) 152 and the shielding member (Dracula) 166. For one system of link mechanism (second link mechanism), when the crank 152g is rotated in one direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 12) by the power of the stepping motor 152h (drive source), this causes the lever 152c to move. It rotates in one direction (clockwise in FIG. 12).

  When the lever 150g is rotated, the main part 152b is thereby rotated in one direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 12). As a result, one end portion of the character body (Dracula) 152 and the shielding member (Dracula) 166 ( The right end portion in FIG. 12 rotates downward.

  Further, a reference plate 152m of a shielding member (dracula) 166 is formed at the lower right of the main part 152b, and a state where the reference plate 152m of the shielding member (dracula) is housed in the recess of the photosensor 152n is the original position (FIG. 11 (a)). The size of the reference plate 152m is approximately twice as large as the concave portion of the photosensor 152n.

  For the remaining one-system link mechanism (first link mechanism), when the crank 153e is rotated in one direction (clockwise in FIG. 12) by the power of the stepping motor 153f (drive source 3), As a result, the lever 153b rotates in one direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 12).

  When the lever 153b rotates, the connecting rod 153a is pushed in one direction (left direction in FIG. 12), and as a result, the character body (Dracula) 152 moves along the main part 152b in the tip direction (lower left in FIG. 12). Direction).

  A reference plate 153m of the character body (Dracula) 152 is formed on the right side of the lever 153b connected to the connecting rod 153a. (See FIG. 11A). The size of the reference plate 153m is about twice as large as the concave portion of the photosensor 153n.

  Therefore, as a whole of the operation mechanism, whether the character body (Dracula) 152 as “Vampire Dracula” appears together with the shielding member (Dracula) 166 so as to hang down from the ceiling of the “Monster House” and floats in the air as it is. Such a production operation is realized.

  Since the image of “Vampire Dracula = Bat” is generally established, the character body (Dracula) 152 imitating “Vampire Dracula” appears from the ceiling as in this embodiment. It is easy for everyone to accept it.

  As is apparent from the above description, of the two types of link mechanisms, the link mechanism (first link mechanism) for sliding the character body (Dracula) 152 is a mechanism element including the stepping motor 153f. It is understood that the whole is mounted on a separate link mechanism (second link mechanism).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the character body (dracula) 152 is located at the left end with the fulcrum 152d of the main part 152b as the center, and the stepping motor 153f is located at the right end on the opposite side. Yes.

  For this reason, when the main part 152b swings, the character body (Dracula) 152 and the stepping motor 153f are balanced in balance, and the stable swing is realized.

  In particular, the mass of the stepping motor 153h also acts as a counterweight when the character body (dracula) 152 attempts to return from the state in which the character body (dracula) 152 is displaced downward to the inside of the housing portion 158. There is an advantage that a large torque is not required.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram specifically showing an operation mechanism for the character body (wolf man) 154 and the shielding member (wolf man) 168. Similarly to the above, the motion mechanism including the character body (wolf man) 154 and the shielding member (wolf man) 168 is also unitized while being accommodated in the box-shaped mechanism box 154a. And the mechanism box 154a is accommodated in the rear unit 142 as a whole unit, and the accommodating part 160 is formed inside the mechanism box 154a in this state.

  The character body (wolf man) 154 is composed of a combination of two movable parts, and specifically includes a main body part 154b and a left arm part 154c. In the mechanism box 154a, a slide block 154d and a push / pull rod 154e are disposed as other mechanism elements.

  The slide block 154d extends vertically in the mechanism box 154a, and upper and lower ends thereof are supported so as to be slidable in the lateral direction with respect to the mechanism box 154a. Correspondingly, two guide grooves 154f are formed in the mechanism box 154a, and these guide grooves 154f extend in the lateral direction while being kept parallel to each other.

  One push / pull rod 154e extends in the horizontal direction (rightward in FIG. 14) with the base end fixed to the slide block 154d, and the tip of the push / pull rod 154e extends slightly outside the mechanism box 154a.

  The main body part 54b of the character body (wolf man) 154 is fixed to one end (right end in FIG. 14) of the slide block 154d. Therefore, the movement of the character body (wolf man) 154 in the lateral direction is basically realized by the sliding motion of the slide block 154d. On the other hand, the left arm part 154c is relatively moved in accordance with the operation of the main body part 154b while being pin-bonded to the main body part 154b.

  Further, the upper and lower ends of the shielding member (wolf man) 168 are rotatably supported by the mechanism box 154a. As already described, the shielding member (wolf man) 168 is decorated to resemble a wooden door, and its movement is the same as that when opening and closing the door.

  Two engaging pieces 168a and 168b for engaging with the push / pull rod 154e are formed on the upper end portion of the shielding member (wolf man) 168. The engaging pieces 168a and 168b are formed by the decorative member 142f described above. It is located above.

  The engagement pieces 168a and 168b extend in the horizontal direction from the rotation shaft of the shielding member (wolf man) 168. When the mechanism box 154a is viewed from directly above, the two engagement pieces 168a and 168b are just V-shaped. Arranged to open.

  On the other hand, engagement protrusions 154g and 154h are formed at the tip (right end in FIG. 14) of the push / pull rod 154e corresponding to the engagement pieces 168a and 168b. As shown in FIG. 14, in a state where the character body (wolf man) 154 is housed in the housing portion 160, two engagement protrusions 154g and 154h are provided between the two engagement pieces 168a and 168b. Both are located.

  In this state, the engagement protrusion 154h located on the inner side of the accommodating portion 160 (leftward in FIG. 14) abuts on the engagement piece 168b of the shielding member (wolf man) 168, whereby the shielding member (wolf man) 168 Hold posture. At this time, the shielding member (wolf man) 168 is in a state in which the entrance / exit of the housing portion 160 is closed, thereby hiding the presence of the character body (wolf man) 154 located in the housing portion 160.

  In the mechanism box 154a, an open hole 154j is formed in the left side wall 154i in FIG. The opening hole 154j can open the space inside the mechanism box 154a to the left side and ensure the visibility to the inside.

  FIG. 15 and FIG. 16 are diagrams showing an operation example of the character body (wolf man) 154 and the shielding member (wolf man) 168. The slide block 154d is slid by power from the stepping motor 155 (drive source). The power from the stepping motor 155 is transmitted to the slide block 154d via the crank 155a and the lever 155b.

  The lower end of the lever 155b is pin joined to the mechanism box 154a, while the upper end of the lever 155b is slider joined to the slide block 154d. A guide groove 155c extending in the vertical direction is formed in the slide block 154d, and a pin 155d that fits into the guide groove 155c is formed at the upper end portion of the corresponding lever 155b.

  The lever 155b is also formed with a guide groove 155e along its longitudinal direction, and the tip of the crank 155a is inserted into the guide groove 155e. A character plate (wolf man) reference plate 154m is formed on the slide block 154d above the guide groove 155c, and the character plate (wolf man) reference plate 154m is housed in the recess of the photosensor 154n. (See FIG. 14A). The size of the reference plate 154m is approximately twice as large as the concave portion of the photosensor 154n.

  Therefore, when the crank 155a is rotated in one direction (clockwise in FIG. 15A) by the power of the stepping motor 155, the lever 155e is thereby moved in one direction (clockwise in FIG. 15A). Rotate.

  When the lever 155e rotates, the slide block 154d is pushed in one direction (rightward in FIG. 15A). As a result, the character body (wolf man) 154 slides outward (in the right direction in FIG. 15A) from the inside of the housing portion 160.

  In conjunction with such sliding of the slide block 154d, the push / pull rod 154e also slides in one direction (rightward in FIG. 15A). Then, the engagement protrusion 154g located at the head in the sliding direction pushes the engagement piece 168a of the shielding member (wolf man) 168, so that the shielding member (wolf man) 168 is rotated around the axis. Become.

  The main body part 154b of the character body (wolf man) 154 simply slides in one direction (rightward in FIG. 15A) in accordance with the slide operation of the slide block 154d, but the left arm part 154c slides. The movement that rotates with the movement is added.

  Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 15B, a lever 155f is attached to the back of the left arm part 154c, the lever 155f extends from the front end of the left arm part 154c to the rear of the main body part 154b, and A slider is joined to the mechanism box 154a. A guide groove 155g is further formed in the mechanism box 154a, and a slide pin 155h that fits into the guide groove 155g is provided at one end of the lever 155f.

  The guide groove 155g extends horizontally from one side end (left side end in FIG. 15A) to the other side end in the mechanism box 154a, and is bent obliquely upward in the middle. For this reason, in a state where the character body (Dracula) 152 and the shielding member (wolf man) 168 are accommodated in the accommodating portion 160 (FIG. 14), the slide block 154d is unidirectional from there (rightward in FIG. 15A). When the slide is started, the slide pin 155h of the lever 155f does not appear to be displaced in the vertical direction.

  However, when the slide operation of the slide block 154d reaches the final stage, the slide pin 155h is guided by the bent portion of the guide groove 155g and gradually displaced upward. Thereby, the movement which rotates so that the front-end | tip of the lever 155f, ie, the front-end | tip part of the left arm part 154c, falls below is implement | achieved.

  Therefore, as a whole of the motion mechanism, the character body (wolf man) 154 which is a “monster” vigorously pushes open the shielding member (wolf man) 168 which is a “wooden door” and suddenly jumps out of the room. Operation is realized. Conversely, when the character body (Dracula) 152 is retracted into the room, the shielding member (wolf man) 168 that is the “wooden door” is closed accordingly, and a natural performance action as if the room was shielded is realized. .

  In this embodiment, the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are controlled by driving the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155, so that the character 150, 152, and 154 are not visible to the player and the appearance position that is visible to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this.

  For example, the solenoids may be driven to control the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 to reciprocate between a standby position that is not visible to the player and an appearance position that is visible to the player.

  Moreover, not only reciprocal driving but also rotational driving may be used. That is, the driving means and the driving method are not limited as long as the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are configured to be able to leave and exit at the standby position where the player cannot visually recognize the character body 150, 152 and 154.

  Stepping motors 150h, 153f, 152h and 155 are four-phase stepping motors and are controlled by a bipolar drive system. The bipolar drive method is a method of switching the magnetic field by exciting the coil by changing the direction of the current by switching between positive and negative voltages applied to both ends of the stator coil.

  FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a state where the front unit 140 and the rear unit 142 are combined from two angles. As shown in FIG. 17, when the operation mechanism of the rear unit 142 is in an inoperative state, a character body (wolf man) is formed on the left side of the display area 42 by a shielding member (wolf man) 168 simulating a “wooden door”. 154 and other operating mechanisms are obscured.

  On the right side of the display area 42, the character body (Franken) 150 and other motion mechanisms are covered with a shielding member (Franken) 164 simulating a “brick wall”. These shielding members 164 and 166 are visually unified in outer surface shape such as the window decoration part 141 of the front unit 140 and the outer surface shape of the wall decoration body 140h. There is nothing that reminds me of the existence, and it is almost unaware that there is any device.

  FIG. 18 is a view showing a state in which the front unit 140 and the rear unit 142 are combined from an angle looked up slightly. As shown in FIG. 18, when the operation mechanism of the rear unit 142 is in an inoperative state, a character body (dracula) 166 that imitates a “brick ceiling” is displayed above the display area 42. (Dracula) 152 and other operating mechanisms are covered.

  Similarly, the outer surface shape of the shielding member (Dracula) 166 is visually unified with the outer surface shape of the wall decoration 140h of the front unit 140, and the player is hardly aware of the existence of the operation mechanism.

  FIG. 19 is a view showing a longitudinal section in the front half of the front unit 140. A portion of the front unit 140 that protrudes from the front surface (board surface) of the game board 4a to the front side includes a roof decoration portion 40b, a ball guiding member 140e, wall decoration bodies 140g and 140h, and the like.

  The ball guide passage 148 has an entrance that opens obliquely upward to the left above the front unit 140, and the game ball that has jumped in from here rolls in the lower right direction while being guided by the ball guide member 140e. The ball guiding member 140e has a cross-sectional shape that is stepped down along the rolling direction of the game ball. Therefore, when the game ball is guided on the ball guiding member 140e, the stepped uneven surface The rolling speed is relaxed above.

  On one decorative member 140f, a braking protrusion 141a is formed so as to face the uneven surface of the ball guiding member 140e. The braking protrusion 141a is in a positional relationship where it collides with a game ball rolling on the uneven surface of the ball guiding member 140e in such a manner as to hit it. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the ball guide passage 148 collides with the braking protrusion 141a and is decelerated.

  Similarly, a braking protrusion 141b is also formed on the wall decoration body 140g, and when advancing further from the braking protrusion 141a to the back of the ball guide passage 148, the game ball is now relative to the braking protrusion 141b of the wall decoration body 140g. The rolling speed is also relaxed here.

  When the game ball further advances in the ball guide passage 148, the game ball rolls while contacting the outer surfaces of the two wall decorations 140g and 140h, and the rolling speed is appropriately reduced in the process. Further, in the present embodiment, since the uneven surface is also formed on the front surface of the wall surface member 140i, the game ball is not only frictional with the uneven surface of the wall surface member 140i as well as the two outer surfaces of the wall decoration bodies 140g and 140h. The braking force is also applied by. As a result, an appropriate braking force acts on the rolling of the game ball in the ball guide passage 148, and the player can follow the rolling process with his eyes.

  At the right edge of the front unit 140, the warp passage extends obliquely downward to the left through the inside of the front unit 140 (inside the outer surface). A warp inlet 148a is formed in the lower end portion of the ball guide passage 148 so as to open to the wall surface member 140i, and a game ball rolling on the ball guide passage 148 may enter the warp passage from the warp inlet 148a. .

  A discharge approach 148b is formed on the right edge of the front unit 140, and the discharge approach 148b protrudes from the exit of the warp passage toward the ball receiving stage 142c (not shown in FIG. 19). The game ball that has passed through the warp passage is discharged to the ball receiving stage 142c through the discharge approach 148b.

  Here, a see-through hole 148c is formed in the wall surface member 140i of the front unit 140, and the see-through hole 148c penetrates the wall surface member 140i in the thickness direction. For this reason, the appearance (part) of the game ball passing through the warp passage is visible to the player through the see-through hole 148c.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the decorative shape of the wall surface member 140i (the shape as if bricks are stacked), see-through holes 148c are formed just at the positions of the gaps between the individual bricks. For this reason, in this embodiment, even if the inside of the warp passage can be visually recognized from the front side by forming the see-through hole 148c, the decorative shape of the front unit 140 is not hindered thereby. Benefits.

  In the present embodiment, the gate switch 53 is disposed in the game area 12, but the gate switch 170 may be integrally attached to the left and right side edges of the front unit 140. In this case, the gate switch 170 is disposed inside the left and right roof decoration portions 140b. Therefore, a passage guide passage 170a communicating with the gate switch 170 is formed in the roof decoration portion 140b.

  FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating a state where a game ball passes through the right gate switch 170. Usually, since the gate switch 170 is hidden behind the roof decoration part 140b, it is not visually recognized from the front side. However, the through hole 170b is formed in the roof decoration portion 140b, and the player can partially see the appearance of the game ball passing through the gate switch 170 through the through hole 170b.

  As a result, it is obvious to the player that the normal symbol determination is firmly performed in the gaming machine 1, so that the possibility of causing doubt to the player regarding the presence or absence of the normal symbol determination can be suppressed. Although not shown here, a similar through hole is also formed in the left gate switch.

  FIG. 21 is a view showing a cross section of the left edge portion of the front unit 140. Similarly, the gate switch 170 and the passage guide passage 170a are formed inside the roof decoration portion 140b for the left edge portion. Although not shown here, a through-hole is formed in the roof decoration portion 140b also on the left edge, so that the state of the game ball passing through the gate switch 170 becomes visible to the player.

  A warp passage 172 extending in the vertical direction is formed at the left edge of the front unit 140, and the warp passage 172 has a warp inlet 172a at a relatively high position. That is, the warp inlet 172a is formed to open to the upper left from the roof decoration part 140b, and the game ball that has entered from here rolls as it is to the back side of the roof decoration part 140b.

  Although not shown here, a through hole (similar to the passage guide passage 70a) is also formed in the roof decoration portion 140b in the vicinity of the warp inlet 172a. Therefore, when a game ball jumps into the warp inlet 172a, The process of rolling forward from there becomes visible to the player through the through hole.

  Further, when the warp passage 172 is bent from the back side to the back side of the roof decoration portion 140b, the warp passage 172 is bent downward from the roof decoration portion 140b to extend the back side position of the window decoration portion 141 downward. In addition, the warp passage 172 is bent rightward to reach the vicinity of the boundary with the display region 42, and further bent further to the rear side to receive the ball receiving stage 142c (shown in FIG. 21) of the rear unit 142. Not open).

  In the present embodiment, a transparent plate (outer surface member) is employed in a portion corresponding to the window glass of the window decoration portion 141, thereby enhancing the decorative effect that actually imitates the “light-removal window” in the window decoration portion 141. Is done.

  Further, the transparent plate of the window decoration portion 141 is provided with a semipermeable film by, for example, aluminum vapor deposition, and the transparent plate of the window decoration portion 141 functions as a so-called magic mirror by the semipermeable film processing. Accordingly, the window decoration portion 141 does not simply show the back side, and the rear side (rear unit 142 or character body (wolf man) 154) of the back side due to the difference in the light reflectance between the front side and the back side. Existence is shielded.

  Therefore, even if the game ball flows down behind the window decoration part 141 in the process of passing the game ball through the warp passage 172, the state of the game ball is not clearly seen through, but the semi-permeable membrane prevents the game ball from being seen. The contour is projected on the front side.

  For this reason, the player does not see the presence of the warp passage 172, the rear unit 142, the character body (wolf man) 154 and the like behind the window decoration portion 141, and the game ball passes through the warp passage 172. Is visible by its outline (projection).

  FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating a superposition relationship between the front unit 140 and the rear unit 142. Here, the cover member 142g located in the right part of the rear unit 142 will be described in particular.

  Since the rear unit 142 is attached to the game board 4a (not shown in FIG. 22) in a state of being superimposed behind the front unit 140, the cover member 142g is not directly visible from the front side. Absent.

  However, the right edge of the front unit 140 has a complicated shape designed in a decorative manner instead of a straight line with the display area 42 due to the shape of the wall decoration body 140h. For this reason, if one side edge part (edge part which prescribes | regulates the boundary with the display area 42) is made into a linear shape for the cover member 142g, when the front unit 140 is piled up on the front side, a mutual shape will become. It will not match.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the shape of the one end edge portion of the cover member 142g viewed from the front side and the outer shape of the front unit 140 (the outer shape of the wall decoration body 140h) are matched with each other, whereby the cover member 142g is viewed from the front side. Is prevented from being noticed unnaturally.

  FIG. 23 is a diagram showing the motion mechanism of the character body (Franken) 150 from above. The character body (Franken) 150 and the shielding member (Franken) 164 enter and exit in the lateral direction (indicated by a double arrow W in the drawing) with respect to the housing portion 156. One side end (left side end in FIG. 23) of the mechanism box 150a is an entrance / exit of the accommodating portion 156.

  The cover member 142g is attached so as to close the front opening of the mechanism box 150a. Therefore, in a state where the shielding member (franken) 164 is accommodated in the accommodating portion 156, the shielding member (franken) 164 is covered with the cover member 142g as viewed from the front side. At this time, the cover member 142g also functions as a partition that partitions the periphery of the entrance / exit of the housing portion 156.

  On the other hand, one side edge (on the left side edge in FIG. 23) of the cover member 142g is formed in an irregularly curved shape in accordance with the wall decoration 140h of the front unit 140 (see FIG. 23). The periphery of the entrance / exit of the part 156 is partially cut away in the entering direction (right direction in FIG. 23).

  Further, in the present embodiment, a notch 156a is formed in the mechanism box 150a around the periphery of the entrance / exit of the accommodating portion 156, and this notch 156a is U-shaped in the entry direction (rightward in FIG. 23) from the opening end of the entrance / exit. It extends in a shape (see FIG. 8B).

  Thus, even when the shielding member (franken) 164 is housed in the housing portion 156, the shielding member (franken) 164 is grasped from both sides through the notch portion of the cover member 142g and the notch portion 156a of the mechanism box 150a. (The white arrow in FIG. 23). Therefore, even if some trouble occurs in the operating mechanism, the inside of the housing portion 156 can be easily opened by gripping and pulling out the shielding member (franken) 164. Therefore, maintenance / inspection work can be performed quickly and easily.

  The notch 156a has a configuration suitable for maintenance and inspection of the operating mechanism, but additionally has a configuration for smoothing normal movement by the operating mechanism.

  A chamfered portion 156b is formed at one end edge (the right end edge in FIG. 23) of the cover member 142g. The chamfered portion 156b is formed with an inclined surface that guides the character body (franken) 150 and the shielding member (franken) 164 in the entering direction (rightward in FIG. 23). As a result, the actions of the character body (Franken) 150 and the shielding member (Franken) 164 (especially the action when entering the housing portion 156) are smoothly performed.

  Although not specifically illustrated here, the configuration of the chamfered portion is also applied to the accommodating portions 158 and 160 of the other character bodies 152 and 154.

  FIG. 24 is an enlarged view of the lower edge portion of the front unit 140. As shown in FIG. 24A, two light emitting regions 174 are formed on both sides of the discharge port 140 k in the lower edge of the front unit 140. These light emitting areas 174 are turned on and blinked by the light of the LED 176 shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, these four light emitting areas 174 and LEDs 176 function as the special symbol display 41 (see FIG. 3).

  For example, if there is a start winning in the normal gaming state, a special symbol change display is performed in response to that. Then, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the determination result (winning result) is displayed. In the present embodiment, the change display and the stop display at this time are represented by lighting and blinking of the four light emitting areas 174.

  For example, during the variable display, the light emitting area 174 repeatedly blinks in a certain pattern, and when the fluctuation is stopped, the four light emitting areas 174 are turned on or off to display the determination result. Various patterns can be considered for the display mode. Here, when the judgment result is a hit (big hit), all four light emitting areas 174 are turned on, and when they are out of judgment, one of them is turned off. And

  Further, below the left and right light emitting areas 174, four lighting areas 178 for performing start hold display are formed. In these lighting regions 178, lighting is performed by the light of the LED 182 shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, these four lighting regions 178 and the LED 182 function as the special figure storage lamp 54 (see FIG. 3).

  As shown in FIG. 24B, a light guiding member 180 is attached to the lower edge of the front unit 140 on the back side of the outer surface, and the LED 176 is further connected to the back of the light guiding member 180. Placed in. The LED 176 is mounted on an LED board (not shown), and an LED 182 for start-up hold display is also mounted on the same LED board.

  The light guiding member 180 has a certain depth when viewed from the front side, and the LED substrate is positioned rearward by the depth of the light guiding member 180. The light guide member 180 is formed with four light guide paths 180a penetrating the inside thereof in the front-rear direction, and these light guide paths 180a are formed corresponding to the four LEDs 176, respectively. The light guiding path 180 a opens at the front surface of the light guiding member 180 and directly passes to the back of the light emitting region 174.

  The light emitted from the individual LEDs 176 is guided forward through the light guide path 180 a and is irradiated to the front side through the light emitting region 174. A transparent member is fitted in the light emitting region 174, and thereby, the light emitting region 174 is visually recognized as if it is surface emitting as a whole.

  In the present embodiment, since the light guiding member 180 is molded from a dark resin material, the inner wall of the light guiding path 180a exhibits a relatively high light shielding property, whereby the light from the LED 176 passes through the light guiding path 180a to the surroundings. It becomes difficult to leak. For this reason, since the player can visually recognize that only the light emitting area 174 is clearly lit and flashing, the player can clearly recognize the variation display and stop display modes of the special symbol.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the shape of the outline of the light emitting region 174 is formed as a decorative shape imitating a pattern (for example, a pattern representing a figure where a bat flies). For this reason, the lighting and blinking of the light emitting area 174 are not easily recognized as a point light emitting operation, and it is possible to suggest (teach, appeal and announce) that the player has some meaning.

(2) Functional configuration of gaming machine FIG. 25 is a conceptual diagram showing the functional configuration of the main board 100 and the peripheral board 110.
The main board 100 includes a main control board (main control means) 101 and a payout control board 102. The main control board 101 includes a CPU 101a, a ROM 101b, and a RAM 101c.

  The CPU 101 a is a microcomputer mounted on the main control board (main control means) 101. The ROM 101b is a memory that stores various processing programs and various commands. The RAM 101c is a memory that temporarily stores data.

  The main control board 101 inputs detection signals from the gate switches 53a and 53b, the start port sensors 55a and 55b, and the count sensor 64, and based on the input detection signals, the solenoid 63, the special symbol display 41, and the normal symbol display. A drive signal is output to the device 50, the special figure memory lamp 54, and the universal figure memory lamp 56. The main control board 101 comprehensively controls the operations of the solenoid 63, the special symbol display 41, the normal symbol display 50, the special symbol storage lamp 54, and the general symbol storage lamp 56. Further, the CPU 101a controls the operation of the probability fluctuation state lamp 51 by outputting a drive signal to the probability fluctuation state lamp 51 (not shown).

  Specifically, when the probability variation state flag is set to ON, the main control board 101 outputs a drive signal to the probability variation state lamp 51 to display it on. Further, the main control board 101 outputs a drive signal to the probability variation state lamp 51 and turns it off based on the probability variation state flag being reset to OFF.

  The main control board 101 and the payout control board 102 serially transfer various commands between the boards. The main control board 101 and the sub-integrated board 111 transfer various commands from the main control board 101 to the sub-integrated board 111 in parallel between the boards.

  The main control board 101 is supplied with a stable common voltage Vcom by a power supply device (not shown). The common voltage Vcom is 12V, for example. The main control board 101 generates a reference voltage Vstd from the common voltage Vcom by a power supply IC (not shown). The reference voltage Vstd is a voltage lower than the common voltage Vcom, for example, 5V. The reference voltage Vstd is a control voltage of the main control board 101.

  The payout control board 102 includes a CPU 102a, a ROM 102b, and a RAM 102c. When the payout control board 102 receives various commands serially transferred from the main control board 101, the payout control board 102 controls the operation of the payout device 103 based on the input various commands. For example, when the payout control board 102 receives a serially transferred command from the main control board 101, the payout control board 102 outputs a drive signal to the payout device 103 based on the received command. When the payout device 103 receives the drive signal, the payout device 103 pays out a game ball or a rental ball based on the received drive signal.

  When the payout control board 102 receives the serially transferred command from the main control board 101, the payout control board 102 outputs a drive signal to the launching device 104 based on the received command. Upon receiving the drive signal, the launch device 104 drives the drive motor to launch a game ball toward the game area 12.

  The launching device 104 launches a game ball by driving the drive motor on condition that the detection signal from the operation handle 18 is detected. The operation handle 18 is configured to include a touch sensor that detects a player's contact, and detects a player's contact and outputs a detection signal to the launching device 104 when the operation handle 18 is detected.

  The game balls from the payout device 103 are paid out to the upper plate 28. When the game ball paid out to the upper plate 28 becomes full, the game ball is stored in the lower plate 17 communicating with the upper plate 28. The lower plate 17 is configured with a lower plate full tank switch. When the game ball stored in the lower plate 17 becomes full, the lower plate full tank switch detects that the game ball is full and outputs a detection signal to the operation handle 18 and the launching device 104.

  When the operation handle 18 receives a detection signal from the lower pan full switch, the operation handle 18 performs control to prohibit acceptance of the handle operation. In addition, when the detection signal from the lower pan full tank switch is input, the launching device 104 performs control for prohibiting the launching of the game ball.

  The peripheral board 110 includes a sub-integrated board (peripheral control means) 111, a first electrical decoration control board 112, a second electrical decoration control board 113, and a waveform control board 114. The sub integrated substrate 111 includes a CPU 111a, a ROM 111b, and a RAM 111c. The CPU 111 a is a microcomputer mounted on the sub integrated substrate (peripheral control means) 111. The ROM 111b is a memory that stores data corresponding to the command from the main control board 101 in association with 1: 1. The RAM 111c is a memory that temporarily stores data.

  The first electrical decoration control board 112 will be described in detail in FIG. The second electrical decoration control board 113 includes a CPU 113a, a ROM 113b, a RAM 113c, and a VDP (Video Display Processor) (not shown). The second electrical decoration control board 113 performs display control of the liquid crystal display 116 based on various commands from the sub-integrated board 111.

  The waveform control board 114 includes a ROM 114b and a RAM 114c for storing voice and performance data, and a sound source IC (not shown). The waveform control board 114 controls the sound wave device (sound output means) 115 based on various commands from the sub-integrated board 111. The sonic device includes a bass speaker 14 and a speaker 36. For example, the waveform control board 114 performs control so that sound effects are output from the sound wave device 115 in accordance with various effects displayed in the display area 42.

  FIG. 26 is a conceptual diagram showing functional configurations of the sub-integrated board 111 and the first electrical decoration control board 112. In the CPU 111a, the sub-integrated board 111 includes an arithmetic processing unit 111aac, an output port 111aop, an input port aip, and serial units 111aso and 111aso '. The sub-integrated board 111 includes level converter units 111e and 111f.

  The arithmetic processing unit 111aac performs various arithmetic processes. The arithmetic processing unit 111aac outputs data on which various arithmetic processes have been performed to the output port 111aop, and processes data serially transferred between the serial units 111aso and 111aso '. The arithmetic processing unit 111aac inputs a detection signal from the input port 111aip and signals indicating various states from the serial units 111aso and 111aso '.

  Here, the signals indicating various states are the transmission permission bit Te, the transmission buffer empty flag Tb, and the transmission register empty flag Tr. The transmission permission bit Te is a signal indicating a transmission permission state.

  The transmission buffer empty flag Tb is a signal indicating whether or not transmission data is output from the transmission buffer register 111asb to the transmission register 111asr. The transmission register empty flag Tr is a signal indicating whether or not all transmission data has been transmitted from the transmission register 111asr.

  The output port 111aop outputs the latch signal SM-LAT, the latch signal PL-LAT, and the gradation signal mode to the first electrical decoration control board 112. The latch signal SM-LAT is a signal for converting the serially transferred excitation data into parallel data. The latch signal PL-LAT is a signal for driving the effect lamps 44a and 44b and the decoration lamp 49 connected to the effect lamp driving unit 112g of the first electrical decoration control board 112, respectively. The gradation signal mode is a signal for performing gradation control.

  The input port 111aip is a photo sensor 150n, 153n, 152n, and 154n that detects the original positions of the character body (Franken) 150, the character body (Dracula) 152, the shielding member (Dracula) 166, and the character body (Wolf man) 154, respectively. Detection signals SEN1 to SEN4 are input.

  The serial unit 111aso includes a transmission buffer register 111asb, a transmission register 111asr, and a transmission control unit 111asc.

  The transmission buffer register 111asb is a register having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and receives transmission data from the arithmetic processing unit 111aac.

  The transmission register 111asr is a register having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). Transmission data from the transmission buffer register 111asb is used as excitation data SM-DAT for the stepping motors 150h, 153f, 152h, and 155 as the first electric power. Serial transfer to the decoration control board 112.

  The transmission control unit 111asc generates a transfer clock SM-CLK when the excitation data SM-DAT is serially transferred from the transmission register 111asr, and the generated transfer clock SM-CLK is sent to the first illumination control board 112. While outputting, the signal which shows the various states mentioned above is output to the arithmetic processing part 111aac.

  The serial unit 111aso 'has the same configuration as the serial unit 111aso described above, and serially transfers the transfer clock PL-CLK and the lamp drive data PL-DAT to the effect lamp drive unit 112g of the first electrical control board 112. The lamp driving data PL-DAT is data for driving the effect lamps 44a and 44b and the decoration lamp 49 connected to the effect lamp driving unit 112g.

Level converter unit 111e, the output method is an open collector, to boost converter the voltage of the electrical signal output from the sub-integrated substrate 111 to the first illuminations control board 112 to a predetermined voltage by the downstream pull-up resistor 112r ₁₂ of. For example, the level converter 111e boosts and converts the voltage of the 5V electrical signal to 12V. The step-up conversion is performed in order to suppress the influence of noise. 12V is a common voltage Vcom, and 5V is a reference voltage Vstd.

The level converter unit 111e steps down converted to a predetermined voltage by the pull-up resistor 111 r ₅ the voltage of the electrical signal upstream from the CPU 111a. For example, the level converter 111e steps down the voltage of the 12V electrical signal to 5V. 5V is a control voltage of the sub integrated substrate 111.

In addition, the level converter unit 111f has an open collector output method, and outputs the detection signals SEN1 to SEN4 from the photosensors 150n, 153n, 152n, and 154n input from the first electrical control board 112 to the sub-integrated board 111. Step-down conversion to a predetermined voltage is performed by the downstream pull-up resistor 111r ₅ '. For example, the level converter 111f performs step-down conversion of the voltage of the 12V electric signal to 5V.

  The sub integrated substrate 111 is supplied with a stable common voltage Vcom by a power supply device (not shown), and generates a reference voltage Vstd lower than the common voltage Vcom by a power supply IC (not shown) from the common voltage Vcom.

  The CPU 111a of the sub-integrated board 111 includes a plurality of output ports (not shown), and transfers various commands to the second electrical control board 113 and the waveform control board 114 in parallel. In addition, the CPU 111 a outputs a drive signal to the side decorative body 33.

  Similarly, the sub-integrated board 111 boosts and converts various commands and electrical signal voltages output to the second electrical decoration control board 113 and the waveform control board 114 from 5 V to 12 V by a level converter (not shown). The CPU 111a of the sub-integrated board 111 is configured to include a plurality of input ports (not shown), and inputs an operation signal from the operation button 38.

  The first electric decoration control board 112 includes an effect lamp driving unit 112g, serial / parallel conversion units 112h and 112i, and drive circuits 112j, 112k, 112m, and 112n.

  The effect lamp driving unit 112g drives the decoration lamp 49 and the effect lamps 44a and 44b based on the gradation signal mode and the lamp drive signal serially transferred from the sub-integrated board 111. The serial / parallel converters 112h and 112i convert the excitation data of the stepping motors 150h, 153f, 152h, and 155 serially transferred from the sub-integrated board 111 into parallel data.

  The serial / parallel converters 112h and 112i include shift registers 112hs and 112is and storage registers 112ht and 112it.

  The shift registers 112hs and 12is convert the excitation data SM-DAT of the stepping motors 150h, 153f, 152h, and 155 serially transferred from the sub-integrated board 111 into parallel data, and transfer the parallel data to the storage registers 112ht and 112it.

  When the parallel data is input, the storage registers 112ht and 112it output the input parallel data to the drive circuit units 112j, 112k, 112m, and 112n.

  The drive circuits 112j and 112k receive the parallel data converted by the serial / parallel conversion unit 112h as an excitation signal, and drive the stepping motors 150h and 153f based on the input excitation signal.

  Specifically, the drive circuits 112j and 112k perform stepping that operates the character body (Franken) 150 based on the excitation signals SM1-1 to SM1-4 and SM2-1 to SM2-4 from the serial / parallel conversion unit 112h. Excitation current switching is performed on the phase coils φ1 to φ4 of the motor 150h and the phase coils φ1 to φ4 of the stepping motor 153f that operates the character body (dracula) 152.

  The drive circuits 112m and 112n receive the parallel data converted by the serial / parallel conversion unit 112i as an excitation signal, and drive the stepping motors 152h and 155, respectively, based on the input excitation signal.

  Specifically, the drive circuits 112m and 112n perform stepping that operates the shielding member (dracula) 166 based on the excitation signals SM3-1 to SM3-4 and SM4-1 to SM4-4 from the serial / parallel conversion unit 112i. Excitation current switching is performed for each phase coil φ1 to φ4 of the motor 152h and each phase coil φ1 to φ4 of the stepping motor 155 that operates the character body (wolf man) 154.

  The stepping motor 150h is connected to the mechanism box 150a. The reference plate 150m of the character body (Franken) is stored in the mechanism box 150a. The stepping motors 153f and 152h are connected to the mechanism box 152a.

  The reference plate 153m of the character body (Dracula) and the reference plate 152m of the shielding member (Dracula) 166 are housed in the mechanism box 152a. The stepping motor 155 is connected to the mechanism box 154a. The reference plate 154m of the character body (wolf man) is stored in the mechanism box 154a.

  The first electrical decoration control board 112 includes a level converter unit 112e, a Schmitt trigger unit 112f, and a level converter unit 112d.

Level converter unit 112e, the output method is an open collector, steps down into a predetermined voltage the voltage of the electric signal output from the sub-integrated substrate 111 to the first illuminations control board 112 by the downstream of the pull-up resistor 112r _5. For example, the level converter 112e steps down the voltage of the 12V electric signal to 5V. 12V is a common voltage Vcom, and 5V is a reference voltage Vstd.

  In addition, the Schmitt trigger unit 112f shapes the waveform of the electrical signal that has been stepped down to the reference voltage Vstd by the level converter unit 112e. Further, the Schmitt trigger unit 112f inverts the logic of the latch signal PL-LAT, the gradation signal mode, and the latch signal SM-LAT from the output port 111aop of the sub-integrated board 111, and outputs the latch signal PL-LAT and the gradation signal mode. The output is output to the effect lamp driver 112g, and the latch signal SM-LAT is output to the serial / parallel converters 112h and 112i.

The level converter unit 112d, the output format is an open collector, to boost converter the voltage of the electrical signal from the first illuminations control board 112 by the downstream pull-up resistor 111 r ₁₂ of a predetermined voltage. For example, the level converter 112d boosts and converts the voltage of the 5V electric signal to 12V.

(3) Table Configuration FIG. 28 is a random number list table updated by the main control board 101. This random number list table is periodically updated at a predetermined timing. The predetermined timing is, for example, 4 msec.

  The random number list table stores various random number ranges, acquisition timings, and contents. The various random numbers include a jackpot determination random number, a probability variation determination random number, a reach determination random number, and a variation display pattern random number.

  The big hit determination random number is a random number for determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state. This determination is called jackpot determination. In addition, when it is determined that a big hit gaming state is generated in the big hit determination, the probability variation determination random number is a probability variation state after the big hit gaming state ends based on whether or not it matches a determination value set in a probability variation determination table described later. It is a random number for determining whether or not the probability variation big hit is controlled. This determination is called probability variation determination.

  Further, the reach determination random number is a random number for determining whether or not to make a loss with a reach mode when it is determined that the big hit gaming state is not generated in the big hit determination. This determination is called reach determination.

  The variable display pattern random number is a random number for determining the variable display pattern of the special symbol and the decorative symbol displayed on the special symbol display 41.

  The random numbers updated by the main control board 101 are not limited to the jackpot determination random number, the probability variation determination random number, the reach determination random number, and the variation display pattern random number, but for determining whether or not the display result of the normal symbol is a hit. There is a random number for determining the initial value of the big hit determination random number that starts counting next when the counter for updating the normal symbol determination random number and the big hit determination random number makes one round.

  FIG. 32 is a variable display pattern table selected by the main control board 101. This variable display pattern table is stored in advance in the ROM 101b of the main control board 101. The main control board 101 selects various pattern tables in steps S42, S45, and S46 of FIG. 31 with reference to this variation display pattern table.

  The main control board 101 transmits a display command to the sub-integrated board 111 based on the selected various pattern tables. The display command is data having a 2-byte structure, and is data for specifying a change time or various effects until the special symbol and the decorative symbol start changing and stop.

The “normal fluctuation” of the fluctuation number 1 is a fluctuation display pattern without a reach mode.
The variation number 2 “shortening variation” is a variation display pattern in which the variation time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is shorter than the “normal variation”. This shortened variation is a variation display pattern that is selected when the value of the reserved ball number counter is the upper limit, in the case of the probability variation state, or in the time-short state.

  “Normal reach” of variation numbers 3 and 4 is a variation display pattern that does not perform reach effects such as a super reach effect and a super reach development effect after the reach aspect is formed.

  The reach mode refers to a mode that shows one step before the jackpot display. The reach effect means an effect executed by the effect lamps 44a and 44b, the liquid crystal display 116, the sound wave device 115, and the like in the reach mode. This effect is executed by the control of the sub-integrated board 111 when the sub-integrated board 111 receives a display command from the main control board 101.

  “Wolf man reach” with variation numbers 5 and 6, “Dracula reach” with variation numbers 11 and 12, and “Franken reach” with variation numbers 17 and 18 It is a change display pattern which performs the super reach production performed by image display control.

  For example, in “Wolf Man Reach”, a production is performed in which a wolf man in the form of a human being cooks a decorative pattern with a special dish.

  “Wolf man reach development” of variation numbers 7 and 8, “Dracula reach development” of variation numbers 13 and 14, and “Franken reach development” of variation numbers 19 and 20 are executed by image display control of each character. This is a variable display pattern for performing a super reach development effect corresponding to these characters after performing a super reach effect.

  For example, in “Wolf Man Reach Development”, a performance is performed in which a wolf man transforms from a human figure to a wolf, and a wolf man in the shape of a wolf dynamically cooks a decorative pattern with his favorite dishes.

  "Wolf man reach-monster" with variable numbers 9 and 10, "Dracula reach-monster" with variable numbers 15 and 16, and "Franken reach-monster" with variable numbers 21 and 22 Unlike the super reach development effect corresponding to these characters, after performing the super reach production executed by the image display control, the character (monster) image 70 imitating a human boy is executed. This is a variable display pattern that continues with Super Reach development.

  The “spotlight notice” of the variable numbers 23 to 31 is to execute the super reach effect after performing the notice effect for notifying that the super reach development effect corresponding to each character is performed before the reach mode is formed. It is a variable display pattern which performs a super reach development effect according to the character whose image display is controlled by the notice effect.

  After the reach form is formed, the character numbers 150, 152, 154 and the shielding members 164, 166, and 168 included in the rear unit 142 are driven and controlled for the “actual reach” of the variable numbers 32 and 33. This is a variable display pattern for performing a reach effect.

  The “full rotation reach” of the variation number 34 is a variation display pattern that can be executed only when the big hit determination random number becomes a win value in the big hit determination processing. For example, in the “full rotation reach”, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols displayed in the display area 42 are synchronously displayed with the same symbol combination, and either the probability variation big hit symbol or the non-probable big hit symbol is displayed. This is a variable display pattern that produces an effect of stopping display with one jackpot symbol.

  The “super-reach branch premier” of the variation number 35 is a variation display pattern that can be executed only when the jackpot determination random number becomes a winning value in the jackpot determination process. For example, “super reach branch premier” is a variable display pattern for deriving any one of a plurality of types of super reach effects.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of variable display patterns that can be selected in accordance with the determination results of the jackpot determination process and the reach determination process (one of the jackpots, the detachment with the reach mode, or the detachment without the reach mode) are set. There are various types of variable display pattern tables (not shown).

  For example, out of the fluctuation display pattern table at the time of loss, which is selected when the deviation is not accompanied by the reach mode, all random numbers are assigned to the fluctuation number 1 in the table selected when the above-mentioned time-shortening control is not executed. All random numbers are assigned to the fluctuation number 2 in the table selected when the time-shortening control is executed among the deviation fluctuation display pattern tables.

  The CPU 101a selects a variation display pattern table according to the determination results of the jackpot determination process and the reach determination process in steps S42, S45 and S46 of the variation display pattern setting process, and one variation display to which a variation display pattern random number is assigned. The pattern is determined in step S43. Note that the variation display patterns of the variation numbers 31, 34 and 35 can be selected only when the determination result of the big hit determination is a big hit, and when the performance is performed according to these variation display patterns, the player can display the decorative symbols. It is possible to grasp that the fluctuation display of the game becomes a jackpot symbol (the jackpot is confirmed), so that the interest of the player can be improved when these fluctuation display patterns are executed. In addition, since the variation display patterns other than the variation numbers 31, 34, and 35 are performed in the same or similar production manner at the time of losing the big hit, it is difficult to recognize whether or not it is true only by looking at the production. The player can be thrilled without lowering the interest of the game. As described above, in this embodiment, after the reach mode is displayed, the basic effect as the reach effect (normal reach effect, super reach effect, super reach development effect, etc.) by the character image (character images 70 to 75 to be described later). An aspect is made feasible.

  FIG. 40 is a list of random numbers updated by the sub-integrated board 111. This list of random numbers is updated every predetermined timing (for example, 2 ms). Various random numbers include specific design random numbers, non-specific design random numbers, outlier design random numbers, advanced notice pattern random numbers, comment notice pattern random numbers, button notice pattern random numbers, intense heat notice pattern random numbers, lightning notice pattern random numbers, mini character notice pattern random numbers, There are a branch effect notice pattern random number, a branch character effect notice pattern random number, a sound determination random number, and the like.

  The specific symbol random number is a random number for determining a probability variation big hit symbol (combination of the same specific symbol (FIG. 33A)) as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the display area 42. The non-specific symbol random number is a random number for determining a non-probable big hit symbol (combination of the same non-specific symbol (FIG. 33B)) as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the display area 42.

  The off symbol random number is a random number for determining the left decorative symbol 80a, the middle decorative symbol 80b, and the right decorative symbol 80c as stop symbols of the decorative symbol in the display area 42. The advanced notice pattern random number is a random number for determining whether to execute the advanced notice and determining the advanced notice pattern.

  The comment notice pattern is a random number for determining the comment notice pattern for executing the comment notice. The button notice pattern random number is a random number for determining a button notice pattern for executing button notice.

  The intense heat notice pattern random number is a random number for determining whether or not to execute the intense heat notice and determining the intense heat notice pattern. The lightning warning pattern random number is a random number for determining whether or not to execute the lightning warning effect and for determining the lightning warning pattern.

  The mini character notice pattern random number is a random number for determining whether or not to execute the mini character notice and determining the mini character notice pattern. The branch effect notice pattern random number is a random number for determining the branch effect notice pattern for executing the super reach branch effect (branch effect notice).

  The branch character effect notice pattern random number is a random number for determining whether or not to execute the branch character effect notice and determining the branch character effect notice pattern for executing the branch character effect notice. The sound determination random number is a random number for determining the sound output mode during the fluctuation display.

  Various random numbers for determining a notice effect other than the button notice are acquired when the sub-integrated board 111 receives a variable display pattern command from the main control board 101. The button notice pattern random number is acquired when the sub-integrated board 111 inputs a predetermined number of operation signals within the effective period.

  FIG. 44 is a daytime background advance notice table selected by the sub integrated board 111 in the advance notice selection process (FIG. 43; S132). In the development background notice table for the daytime background, a total of 22 kinds of development type advance notice patterns of the advance notice pattern numbers 0 to 21 are set as the advance notice pattern.

  FIG. 45 is a night-background advanced notice table selected by the sub-integrated board 111 in the advanced notice selection process (FIG. 43; S133). Also in the night background development type advance notice table, a total of 22 types of developed type advance notice patterns of developed type notice pattern numbers 0 to 21 are set as the developed type notice pattern.

  When the advance notice pattern number is 0 among the advance notice patterns, the advance notice effect is not performed. That is, in the advanced notice table, whether or not to execute the advanced notice effect is determined based on the evolved notice pattern random number, and the evolved notice pattern of the evolved notice effect is determined.

  For example, when the advanced type notice pattern number is determined to be 1 to 21, it is decided to execute the advanced type notice effect, and the decided advanced notice pattern number is used as the developed type notice pattern of the developed type notice effect. The corresponding advance notice pattern is determined.

  A separate random number for determining whether or not to execute the advanced notice effect is provided, and based on this random number, when it is determined that the advanced notice effect is to be executed, the advanced notice pattern number is based on the evolved notice pattern random number. May be determined as any one of 1 to 21.

  Further, in the daytime background advanced notice table, the judgment value is set such that the developed notice pattern numbers 3 to 21 can be selected only when a reachable display pattern is designated as a decorative pattern. Is distributed.

  That is, when the normal variation of the variation display pattern number 1 is designated as the variation display pattern of the decorative design, the determination value is distributed so that only the advanced notice pattern numbers 1 and 2 can be selected from the daytime background advance notice table. It is done.

  Further, in the night background development type advance notice table, it is determined that the advance type advance notice pattern numbers 4 to 21 can be selected only when the reach display form is designated as the change display pattern of the decorative design. The value is distributed.

  That is, when the normal variation of the variation display pattern number 1 is designated as the variation display pattern of the decorative design, the determination value is distributed so that only the advanced type notice pattern numbers 1 to 3 can be selected from the night type developed type advance notice table. It is done.

  When a development display pattern of development type advance notice pattern numbers 1 to 21 is executed when a variable display pattern that is a reach form is designated as a display form of a decoration design, the reach of the decoration design is executed after the production is executed. A mode is displayed.

  Also, the advanced notice pattern number 19 is selected only when a variation display pattern (variation display patterns of variation numbers 4, 6, 8,..., 22, 35) that is a big hit is specified as the variation display pattern of the decorative design. Decision values are assigned as possible.

  When a variation display pattern that is a big hit is specified as a variation display pattern of a decorative design, if the development of the advanced notification pattern No. 19 is executed, the reach form of the decoration symbol is displayed after the execution. Then, after executing the reach effect based on the variable display pattern, the big hit symbol of the decorative symbol is displayed.

  In the variable display pattern instructing execution of “spotlight advance notice” (variable display patterns of change numbers 23 to 31), the determination value is set so that only the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern number 0 can be selected. Sorted. That is, in this case, the determination value is distributed so that the advanced notice is not executed.

  Also, in the variable display pattern (variable display patterns with variable numbers 32 and 33) for instructing the execution of “actual reach”, any one of the advanced warning patterns with the advanced warning pattern numbers 0, 7, and 8 is selected. The determination value is distributed as described above.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the character body 154 and the Dracula imitating a wolf man are driven by the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f and 155 in the night background development type advance notice table than the day background advance type notice table. An advanced notice pattern including an effect of causing the imitated character body 152 and the character body 150 imitating Franken to appear (developed notice pattern numbers 3, 5, 6, 9, 10, 11, 15, 16, and 17) The notification pattern is set so that the ratio of selection is high.

  By changing the operation rate of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 by changing the background image, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the operation rate of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 changes.

  In this embodiment, when the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are imitated monsters such as a wolf man, Dracula, and Franken, and the background image is displayed as the night background image 82, it is recognized that these characters generally act at night. By improving the operation rate of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 that imitate the monster (nocturnal creature) that is being used, it is possible to give an impression that the monsters start moving at night.

  In the present embodiment, the character images 71 to 73 and the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 imitate the same character, but the character image 71 is changed when the background image is changed to the night background image 82. It is possible to realistically represent a state in which the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 that actually move rather than the appearance rate of ~ 73 start to move more. Therefore, it can be recognized that the monsters start moving at night.

  In the present embodiment, since a character that is generally recognized to act at night is used, when the background display is changed to the night background image 82 without explaining the game of the gaming machine in the present invention, The user can easily recognize that the movement rate of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 is improved.

  In the present embodiment, the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 appear in front of the display area 42 (player side) so that a part of the display area 42 is covered. It is possible to grasp the driving state of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 even if attention is paid to.

  In addition, since the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 appear in front of the display area 42, it is possible to execute a stereoscopic effect (three-dimensional) with a sense of depth. In addition, an impression can be given as if the character body suddenly appeared in front of the eyes.

  In addition, since the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are imitated with dimensions larger than the dimensions of the character images 71 to 73 that are displayed and controlled in the display area 42, the driving state of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 can be further noted.

  In the present embodiment, the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are normally built in the rear unit 142 and are invisible to the player, and when the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 appear. Since it moves outside the rear unit 142 and changes to a state visible to the player, it is possible to give an impression that the character body has suddenly appeared. Therefore, a strong impression can be given to the player who is paying attention to the effect executed in the display area 42.

  Specifically, 2907 judgment values are set in the development type advance notice pattern numbers 2 to 17 in the daytime background use type advance notice table, and 1094 of these judgment values are developed type advance notice pattern numbers 3, 5 and 5. , 6, 9-11, 15-17.

  In other words, about 38% of the judgment value assigned to the advanced notice pattern for executing the advanced notice effect in the daytime background advance notice table is driven by controlling one of the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f and 155. It is assigned to the advanced notice pattern in which the corresponding character bodies 150, 152 and 154 appear.

  On the other hand, 3164 judgment values are set in the development type notice pattern numbers 2 to 17 in the night background development type notice table, and 2387 of these judgment values are developed type notice pattern numbers 3, 5, 6, 9 to 11 and 15 to 17 are allocated.

  In other words, about 75% of the judgment value assigned to the advanced notice pattern for executing the advanced notice effect in the night background advanced notice table controls driving of any of the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f and 155. It is assigned to the advanced notice pattern in which the corresponding character bodies 150, 152 and 154 appear.

  Further, in the advanced notice effect executed in the present embodiment, an effect of causing characters set in a plurality of stages to appear sequentially from a character set in a lower stage to a character set in a higher stage is executed.

  Set the monster-kun's blowout at the lowest level (Step 1), the wolf man at Level 2 (Step 2 and Step 2 '), and the Dracula at Level 3 (Step 3 and Step 3'). Franken is set in Step 4 and Step 4 ′), and Monster is set in the highest five stages (Step 5).

  In the mysterious novels in which these characters appear, the upper and lower relations (dominance rank) are set in the order of monster-kun> franken> dracula> wolf man, and the characters at each stage in the advanced notice production will correspond to this hierarchical relation. Is set.

  The character images 71 to 73 and the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 corresponding to each character are set with the jackpot expectation degree according to the vertical relationship of Monster-kun> Franken> Dracula> Wolf man. That is, as the vertical relationship of the characters that are finally displayed or appear in the advanced notice effect, the big hit expectation is set higher.

  Specifically, in the daytime background advance notice table and the night background advance notice table, the judgment value is such that the higher the vertical relationship of the characters to be finally displayed, the higher the jackpot expectation. Is allocated.

  For example, the expected degree of jackpot when the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern number 4 is executed in the developed background notice table for the daytime background is about 42%. The value of 42% can be calculated based on the total number of determination values (196) assigned to the variation display pattern when the jackpot is reached and the total number of determination values (471) allocated to all the variation display patterns. Specifically, it is calculated by a calculation formula of (196/471) × 100.

  On the other hand, the expected degree of jackpot when the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern number 7 is executed in the developed background notice table for the daytime background is about 50%. The value of 50% can be calculated in the same manner as in the case of the “big hit expectation when the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern number 4 is executed” described above, specifically, (280/556) × It is calculated by the calculation of 100.

  Therefore, if it is a player who has the knowledge about the strange novel in which these characters appear, while being able to identify a stage with a character, he can grasp | ascertain the degree of expectation of jackpot.

  In this embodiment, a player who does not have knowledge about the strange novel in which the character appears cannot recognize the hierarchical relationship of Monster-kun> Franken> Dracula> Wolf man. However, even a player who does not have knowledge may use a character that can recognize a predetermined rank.

  For example, when performing an effect of playing weightlifting, the player uses a muscular character, a medium character, and a slim character to give the player a predetermined rank (in this case, a muscular character> May be configured to be recognizable.

  Further, in this embodiment, as an advance notice effect, an advanced notice pattern that is visible to the player in order from the wolf male with the highest vertical relation among the monster guys> Franken> Dracula> wolf males in the vertical order. And an advanced notice pattern that is visible to the player in order from any character in the vertical relationship of Monster-> Franken> Dracula> Wolf Man It is done.

  In the advanced notice pattern that is visible to the player in order from the wolf man with the lowest hierarchical relationship, the higher jackpot expectation is when more characters are visible to the player. Is set.

  In each of the second to fifth stages, the character is caused to appear by any one of the image display of the character in the display area 42 and the drive control of the stepping motor capable of operating the character.

  In the present embodiment, when the advanced notice pattern numbers 2 to 17 are determined among the advanced notice patterns, the development stage of the advanced notice effect (up to which stage character is caused to appear based on the developed notice pattern random number). Is determined.

  In each stage, it is determined which of the character image display in the display area 42 and the drive control of the stepping motor capable of moving the character appear.

  It is to be noted that a development stage determination random number for determining the development stage of the development-type notice effect and a character mode determination random number for determining the appearance mode of the character in each stage are provided, and the development stage is determined based on the development stage determination random number.

  Further, at each of the determined stages, either one of the image display of the character in the display area 42 and the drive control of the stepping motor capable of operating the character may be determined based on the character mode determination random number. .

  Further, in the advanced notice table for day background and the advanced notice table for night background, the stepping motor is driven more than the big hit expectation when the character appearing at each stage is displayed on the display area 42. The judgment value is assigned so that the expected degree of jackpot when it appears by controlling becomes higher.

  For example, the expected degree of jackpot when the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern number 7 (steps 2, 3, and 4 are sequentially executed) is executed in the developed background notice table for the daytime background is about 50% (280/556 × 100). ).

  On the other hand, the expected degree of jackpot when the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern number 9 (sequentially executing steps 2, 3, 4 ′) is executed in the daytime background advance notice table is about 66% ( 94/143 × 100).

  Further, in the character images and character bodies corresponding to the same characters of the character images 71 to 73 and the character bodies 150, 152 and 154 corresponding to the respective characters, the jackpot expectation set for the character body is higher. Is set as follows.

  Furthermore, the character body corresponding to each character in the vertical relationship of Monster-kun> Franken> Dracula> Wolf Man is set to be substantially the same as the big hit expectation set in the character image corresponding to the character one above. The

  That is, when the character body is caused to appear by drive control of the stepping motor at a stage (n-1 stage) lower than the predetermined stage (n stage) in the day background developed notice table and the night background developed notice table. The determination value is assigned so that the expected degree when the character body is displayed in the display area at the predetermined stage (n stages) is substantially the same.

  For example, when the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern number 9 (steps 2, 3, and 4 'are sequentially executed) is executed in the developed background notice table for the daytime background, the big hit when the character body 150 imitating Franken appears. Expectation is about 66% (94/143 × 100).

  On the other hand, the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern number 12 (steps 2, 3, 4, and 5 are sequentially executed) is executed in the developed background notice table for the daytime background, and display control of the character image simulating Franken is performed. Later, when the display of a character image (monster) imitating a human boy is controlled, the expected degree of jackpot is about 68% (170/251 × 100), which is substantially the same.

  Accordingly, when the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 appear when the advanced notice effect is executed, the player's sense of expectation for the big hit gaming state can be enhanced.

  In the present embodiment, the expectation when the character body is caused to appear by drive control of the stepping motor at a stage (n-1 stage) lower than the predetermined stage (n stage) and the predetermined stage (n stage). Determination values are assigned so that the expected level when the character body is displayed as an image in the display area is substantially the same.

  However, the expectation when the character image display control is performed at a predetermined stage (n stage) than the expected degree when the character image display control is performed at a stage lower than the predetermined stage (n stage) (stage (n-1)). The judgment value is assigned so that the degree is closer to the expected level when the character body appears by the drive control of the stepping motor at a stage (step (n-1)) lower by one step than the predetermined step (step n). Just shake it.

  Therefore, the expectation when the character image is displayed and controlled at a predetermined stage (n stage) and the character body appears by the drive control of the stepping motor at a stage ((n-1) stage) lower than the predetermined stage (n stage). There is no limitation on the level of expectation when it is made

  FIG. 46 is a list showing an advanced notice pattern determined by the sub integrated board 111 in the advanced notice selection process (FIG. 43; S134).

  The advanced notice pattern number 1 is an evolved notice pattern that provides an effect of displaying a balloon from the monster in the display area 42 when the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  In the balloon from the monster, the comment content based on the comment notice pattern for performing the comment notice effect is displayed (however, in the case of the advanced notice pattern numbers 18, 20 and 21, based on the button notice pattern for performing the button notice effect). The comment content is displayed.)

  The advanced notice pattern number 2 displays a balloon from the monster in the display area 42 when starting the display of the decorative symbol, and performs a staged effect by displaying the wolf man after a predetermined period of time. This is an advanced notice pattern.

  The advance notice pattern No. 3 displays a balloon from the monster when starting the display of the decorative symbols, and displays a character body 154 that imitates a wolf man by driving and controlling the stepping motor 155 after a predetermined period. This is an advanced notice pattern in which staged effects are produced by appearing in front of the region 42.

  The advance notice pattern number 4 is displayed for a predetermined period after the image display of the balloon from the monster and the character image 71 imitating the wolf man are sequentially executed in the same manner as the advance notice pattern of the advance notice pattern number 2. This is an advanced notice pattern that provides staged effects by displaying a Dracula image.

  The advance notice pattern number 5 is the same as the advance notice pattern of the advance notice pattern number 2, and after the image display of the balloon from the monster and the character image 71 imitating the wolf man are sequentially executed, In this case, the stepping motor 152h and the stepping motor 153f are driven and controlled so that a character body 152 imitating a dracula appears in front of the display area 42, thereby providing a staged effect.

  The advance notice pattern number 6 is similar to the advance notice pattern of the advance notice pattern number 3 and displays the image of the balloon from the monster, and the drive control of the stepping motor 155 capable of operating the character body 154 imitating the wolf man. An advanced notice pattern that performs stepwise effects by driving the stepping motor 152h and the stepping motor 153f to drive the stepping motor 152h and imitating a dracula in front of the display area 42 after a sequential execution. It is.

  The advance notice pattern number 7 is the same as the advance notice pattern of the advance notice pattern number 4, the image display of the balloon from the monster, the image display of the character image 71 imitating the wolf man, and the character image 72 imitating the dracula. This is an advanced notice pattern that performs stepwise effects by displaying images of Franken after a predetermined period of time, after sequentially executing the image display.

  The advance notice pattern number 8 imitated the image of the character image 71 imitating a wolf man after a predetermined period of time, and imitating a dracula, when a monster-kun balloon was displayed when starting the variable display of decorative symbols. This is an advanced notice pattern that provides an effect of displaying Franken without displaying the image of the character image 72.

  The advance notice pattern number 9 is the same as the advance notice pattern of the advance notice pattern number 4, the image display of the balloon from the monster, the image display of the character image 71 imitating the wolf man, and the character image 72 imitating the dracula. After the sequential image display, the stepped motor 150h is driven and controlled in a predetermined period, and the character body 150 imitating the flanken appears in the front of the display area 42 to develop a staged advance notice pattern. It is.

  The advance notice pattern number 10 is the same as the advance notice pattern of the advance notice pattern number 5, the image display of the balloon from the monster, the image display of the character image 71 imitating the wolf man, and the character body 152 imitating the dracula. The stepping motor 152h and the stepping motor 153f that can operate the stepping motor 153f are sequentially executed, and then the stepping motor 150h is driven and controlled in a predetermined period so that the character body 150 imitating the flanken appears in front of the display area 42. This is an advanced notice pattern that provides staged effects.

  The advanced type notice pattern number 11 is the same as the advanced type notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern number 6, the image display of the balloon from the monster, the drive control of the stepping motor 155 capable of operating the character body 154 imitating the wolf man, After sequentially executing the drive control of the stepping motor 152h and the stepping motor 153f capable of operating the character body 152 imitating the Dracula, the character body 150 imitating the Franken by driving and controlling the stepping motor 150h after a predetermined period of time is displayed. 42 is an advanced notice pattern in which stage effects are produced by appearing in front of 42.

  The advance notice pattern number 12 is the same as the advance notice pattern of the advance notice pattern number 7, the image display of the balloon from the monster, the image display of the character image 71 imitating the wolf man, and the character image 72 imitating the dracula. And a character image 73 simulating Franken are sequentially displayed, and then a monster-like image is displayed in a predetermined period, and a staged effect is produced.

  The advance notice pattern number 13 is the same as the advance notice pattern of the advance notice pattern No. 8, the image display of the balloon from the monster, the image display of the character image 71 imitating the wolf man, and the character imitating the dracula. This is an advanced notice pattern in which a step-by-step presentation is performed by displaying the image of the monster after a predetermined period of time after executing the image display of the character image 73 imitating Franken without executing the image display of the image 72. .

  The advance notice pattern number 14 is a predetermined period after the image display of the balloon from the monster and the character image 71 imitating the wolf man are executed in the same manner as the advance notice pattern of the advance notice pattern number 2. It is an advanced notice pattern that provides staged effects by displaying images of monsters sometimes.

  The advance notice pattern number 15 is the same as the advance notice pattern of the advance notice pattern number 9, the image display of the balloon from the monster, the image display of the character image 71 imitating the wolf man, and the character image 72 imitating the dracula. The advance notice that performs stepwise effects by displaying the image of the monster and sequentially displaying the image of the monster during a predetermined period after sequentially executing the drive control of the stepping motor 150h capable of operating the character body 150 imitating Franken. It is a pattern.

  The advance notice pattern number 16 is the same as the advance notice pattern of the advance notice pattern number 10, the image display of the balloon from the monster, the image display of the character image 71 imitating the wolf man, and the character body 152 imitating the dracula. The control of the stepping motor 152h and the stepping motor 153f capable of operating the character and the driving control of the stepping motor 150h capable of operating the character body 150 imitating the flanken are sequentially executed, and then the monster is displayed as an image after a predetermined period. This is an advanced notice pattern that produces staged effects.

  The advanced notice pattern number 17 is similar to the evolved notice pattern of the evolved notice pattern number 11, the image display of the balloon from the monster, the drive control of the stepping motor 155 that can operate the character body 154 imitating the wolf man, When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after sequentially executing the drive control of the stepping motor 152h and the stepping motor 153f capable of operating the character body 152 imitating the Dracula and the drive control of the stepping motor 150h capable of operating the character body 150 imitating the Franken This is an advanced notice pattern that provides staged effects by displaying images of monsters.

  The advanced advance notice pattern number 18 is an advanced advance notice pattern that produces an effect of displaying an image of a balloon from the monster like the advanced advance notice pattern of the advanced advance notice pattern number 1.

  Unlike the comment contents based on the comment notice patterns displayed in the advanced notice pattern numbers 1 to 17 in the balloon from the monster, the player requests the player to operate the operation button 38 "Press the button!" When the first operation signal is input from the operation button 38, the comment content based on the button notice pattern is updated and displayed.

  Further, after the comment content “Please press the button!” Is displayed, when no operation signal is input from the operation button 38, the comment content is continuously displayed.

  The advanced notice pattern number 19 is used to display the character images 70 to 73, and the background image without performing the drive control of the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f and 155 capable of operating the character bodies 150, 152 and 154. This is an advanced notice pattern that produces an effect that changes to

  The advanced advance notice pattern number 20 is an advanced advance notice pattern that produces an effect of displaying an image of a balloon from the monster like the advanced advance notice pattern of the advanced advance notice pattern number 1.

  When the first operation signal is input from the operation button 38 after the comment content “Press the button!” Is displayed in the balloon from the monster, the player requests the operation button 38 to be operated. In addition, the comment content of “Take a hit!” Requesting further operation of the operation button 38 is updated and displayed, and when the third operation signal is input from the operation button 38, the comment content based on the button notice pattern is updated and displayed. .

  Further, after the comment contents of “Please press the button!” And “Please hit repeatedly!” Are displayed, when the third operation signal is not input from the operation button 38, the comment contents are continuously displayed.

  The advanced advance notice pattern number 21 is an advanced advance notice pattern that produces an effect of displaying a balloon from a monster like the advanced advance notice pattern of the advanced advance notice pattern number 1.

  When the first operation signal is input from the operation button 38 after the comment content “Press the button!” Is displayed in the balloon from the monster, the player requests the operation button 38 to be operated. In addition, the comment content of “Let's hit again!” That further requests operation of the operation button 38 is updated and displayed when the seventh operation signal is input from the operation button 38. .

  Further, after the comment contents of “Please press the button!” And “Please hit repeatedly!” Are displayed, when the seventh operation signal is not input from the operation button 38, the comment contents are continuously displayed.

  FIG. 47 is a comment notice table selected by the sub-integrated board 111 in the advanced notice selection process (FIG. 43; S136).

  Fifteen types of comment notice pattern numbers 1 to 15 are prepared in the comment notice table as comment notice patterns for comment notice effects. The comment notice pattern of the comment notice effect is determined by the comment notice table.

  The comment notice table is provided with a variable display pattern including an advanced notice pattern and a comment notice pattern. When a variable display pattern including these advanced notice pattern and comment notice pattern is determined, the comment notice table is displayed together with the advanced notice pattern. A comment notice pattern may be executed.

  The comment notice table is a table for determining a comment notice pattern based on the comment notice pattern random number acquired in the advanced notice selection process (FIG. 43: S137).

  In the comment notice table, comment notice pattern random numbers are distributed to 15 types of comment notice patterns of comment notice pattern numbers 1 to 15.

  “Normal variation” is a variation display pattern when a variation display pattern of variation number 1 that is shifted when the reach effect is not executed is designated. Further, “when the normal reach is off” is a change display pattern when the change display pattern of change number 3 that is lost when the normal reach effect is executed is designated.

  “When super-reach is off” is a change display pattern when the change display patterns of change numbers 5, 7, 9,... In the case of “non-probable big hit”, the fluctuation display patterns of variation numbers 4, 6, 8,..., 22, 35 are designated as a big hit when any reach effect is executed, and the big hit is set as a probable big hit. This is a variable display pattern when

  In the case of “probable big hit”, variation display patterns of variation numbers 4, 6, 8,..., 22 and 35 are designated as a big hit when any reach effect is executed, and the big hit is a probable big hit. It is a variation display pattern in the case.

  In the comment notice table, when “normal reach break”, “super reach break”, “non-probable big hit”, and “probable big hit” are specified, which will be reached at least after execution of the advanced notice effect. Only, the judgment value is distributed so that the comment notice pattern of the comment notice pattern number 13 can be selected.

  When the comment notice pattern of comment notice pattern number 13 is executed, the comment “Leach is!” Is displayed in a balloon (step 1) from the monster displayed in the advanced notice effect, and the advance notice effect is displayed. After execution, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a reach manner.

  When “non-probable big hit” or “probable big hit” is designated, the comment notice pattern of comment notice pattern number 13 is at a higher rate than when “normal reach miss” or “super reach miss” is designated. The decision values are distributed so that they are selected.

  The rate at which the comment advance notice pattern of the comment advance notice pattern number 13 is selected is, for example, “10” when the advance notice pattern of the advance notice pattern No. 1 is designated as “at the time of super-reach”. The determination value assigned to the comment notice pattern) / 198 (the total number of decision values assigned to all comment notice patterns)} × 100 = about 5%.

  On the other hand, in the case where “not probable big hit” and the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern number 1 are designated, (20/198) × 100 = about 10%.

  Thus, when the comment notice pattern of comment notice pattern number 13 is executed, the comment “Leach!” Is displayed in a balloon (step 1) from the monster. The player can recognize that the left and right decorative symbols are in the reach mode before being stopped and displayed, and can increase the expectation for the big hit gaming state.

  In addition, the judgment value is set so that the comment notice pattern of the comment notice pattern number 14 can be selected only when “non-probable big hit time” or “probable big hit time” that becomes a big hit after execution of the advanced notice effect is designated. Sorted.

  When the comment notice pattern with the comment notice pattern number 14 is executed, the comment “Big hit!” Is displayed in a balloon (step 1) from the monster displayed in the advanced notice effect. After execution, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a non-probable big hit symbol or a big hit symbol.

  In addition, the judgment value is distributed so that the comment notice pattern with the comment notice pattern number 15 can be selected only when “probable big hit” is designated after execution of the advanced notice effect.

  When the comment notice pattern of comment notice pattern number 15 is executed, the comment “Probably!” Is displayed in a balloon (step 1) from the monster displayed in the advanced notice effect, and the developed notice effect is displayed. After execution, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a probable big hit symbol.

  In addition, the comment notice patterns of the comment notice pattern numbers 4 and 6 in which the comment content of “That !? What?” Or “Maybe ...!?” Is displayed will be lost after execution of the advanced notice effect. Higher percentages when “non-probable big hit” or “probable big hit” is specified, which is a big hit, than when “normal fluctuation”, “normal reach lost” or “super reach lost” is specified. The judgment value is distributed so as to be selected.

  When the comment notice pattern with the comment notice pattern number 4 or 6 is executed, a balloon from the monster (step 1) displayed in the advanced notice effect will be displayed as "That !? What?" The comment “!?” Is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the big hit gaming state by associating the player with “probably a big hit !?” after executing the advanced notice effect.

  In addition, comment notice pattern numbers 10, 11 and 12 are displayed with the comment content “Wolf man ~. Did you cook?”, “Dracula! Get up!” Or “Franken! Is executed after the comment content based on the comment notice pattern is displayed in the balloon from the monster (step 1) when "normal fluctuation", "normal reach off" or "super reach off" is specified. In the development after step 2 of the developed advance notice pattern, the determination value is distributed so as to be selected only for the advanced notice pattern in which the character corresponding to the comment content appears.

  That is, for the advanced notice pattern that does not cause the character corresponding to the comment content based on the comment notice pattern to appear, the determination value is assigned so that the comment notice pattern is not selected.

  For example, when “out of super reach” is designated, “Dracula! Wake up !!” or “Franken!” Comes out for the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern number 2 that does not cause Dracula and Franken to appear. The comment notice pattern with the comment notice pattern number 11 or 12 in which the comment content “come!” Is displayed is not selected.

  Similarly, the comment notice pattern numbers 11 and 12 are not selected for the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern number 3 and the comment notice pattern number 12 is not selected for the evolved notice pattern number 4.

  On the other hand, when “non-probable big hit” or “probable big hit” is designated, even for an advanced notice pattern that does not cause a character corresponding to the comment content based on the comment notice pattern of comment notice pattern number 10, 11 or 12 to appear, The judgment value is distributed so that the comment notice pattern is selected.

  For example, when “non-probable big hit” is specified, “Dracula! Wake up !!” or “Franken!” Will appear for the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern number 2 that does not cause Dracula or Franken to appear. Comment notice pattern number 11 or 12 in which the comment content “come!” Is displayed may be selected.

  In this case, after the comment contents based on the comment notice pattern are displayed in the advanced notice effect, the character corresponding to the comment contents does not appear, which causes the player to feel uncomfortable with the character mismatch. By making a big hit after executing the advanced notice effect, it is possible to increase the expectation for the big hit gaming state.

  FIG. 48 is a list showing the comment contents of the comment notice pattern. In the list showing the comment contents, the comment notice pattern number and the comment contents are set in association with each other. Specifically, in the comment contents, a balloon from the monster says "N ??", "Ehehehe", "Oh!", "That? What?", "Fah ~~~ aa ”,“ Maybe…? ”,“ Oh, it smells ugly ~ ”,“ I'm suspicious about going to the clouds ~ ”,“ I wonder if someone will come ~ ”,“ Wolf man ~. There are comments such as "Is it done ??", "Dracula! Get up!", "Franken! Come out!", "Leach!", "It's a big hit!"

  FIG. 50 is an intense heat notice table selected by the sub-integrated board 111 in the intense heat notice selection process (FIG. 49; S141).

  In the intense heat notice table, seven kinds of intense heat notice pattern numbers 0 to 6 are prepared as the intense heat notice patterns of the intense heat notice effect. In addition, when the intense heat notification pattern number 0 is determined among the intense heat notification patterns, the intense heat notification effect is not performed.

  That is, in the intense heat notice table, whether or not to execute the intense heat notice effect is determined based on the intense heat notice pattern random number, and the intense heat notice pattern of the intense heat notice effect is determined.

  For example, when it is determined that the intense heat notification pattern numbers 1 to 6 are used, it is determined to execute the intense heat notification effect, and the intense heat of the intense heat notification pattern number determined as the intense heat notification pattern of the intense heat notification effect is determined. A notice pattern is determined.

  In addition, a random number for determining whether or not to execute the intense heat announcement effect is separately provided, and based on this random number, when it is determined to execute the intense heat notification effect, the intense heat announcement pattern number based on the intense heat announcement pattern random number Any one of 1 to 6 may be determined.

  When the advanced notice is not executed, the intense heat notice effect is not executed, so that the process for determining the intense heat notice pattern based on the intense heat notice pattern random number may not be executed. The case where the advanced notice is not executed is a case where the advanced notice pattern of the developed notice pattern number 0 is determined in the advanced notice selection process (FIG. 43; S134).

  In the intense heat notice table, the judgment values are assigned so that the intense heat notice pattern numbers 1 to 6 can be selected only when the variable display pattern that reaches the reach is designated as the decorative display variable display pattern. .

  When a variable display pattern that is a reach mode is designated as the decorative display variable display pattern, the effects of the advanced notice pattern numbers 1 to 18, 20, and 21 are executed as the advanced notice pattern.

  Moreover, it was determined from the balloons and characters (steps 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 of the advanced notice pattern) that are displayed as images in this advanced notice pattern and the intense heat notice patterns Nos. 1-6. When the balloon or the character (steps 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 of the intense heat warning pattern) matches, the intense heat warning pattern effect is executed and the color scheme displayed as an image in the normal advanced warning pattern Different balloons and characters are displayed.

  In addition, among the variable display patterns in the reach form as the decorative display variable display pattern, the variable display pattern that can be executed only when the big hit determination random number does not become the winning value and the reach determination random number becomes the winning value in the big hit determination processing When (variable display patterns of variation numbers 3, 5, 7,..., 21 and 32) are designated, only the intense heat notification patterns of intense heat notification pattern numbers 0 to 2 can be selected.

  When a variation display pattern (variation display patterns of variation numbers 4, 6, 8,..., 22 and 33) that can be executed only when the big hit determination random number becomes a winning value in the big hit determination processing is specified, Thermal notice pattern numbers 3 to 6 can be selected.

  In other words, if a character (Dracula, Franken or Monster) is displayed that is different from the color of the clothing displayed in the image of the normal advance notice pattern, it will be understood that the result of the variation display of the decorative symbol is a jackpot symbol. Can do.

  Further, in the variable display pattern (variable display pattern of variable numbers 23 to 31) instructing execution of “spotlight advance notice” or “full rotation reach”, only the intense heat notice pattern with the intense heat notice pattern number 0 can be selected. The determination value is distributed so that

  In the variable display pattern (variable display pattern of variable number 33) instructing execution of “actual object reach, hit”, the determination value is assigned only to the advanced notice pattern numbers 0, 7, and 8 as the advanced notice pattern. .

  In this case, since the monster character (step 5 of the advanced notice pattern) is not displayed, it is a variable display pattern that can be executed only when the jackpot determination random number becomes a winning value in the jackpot determination process. However, the determination value is not distributed so that the intense heat notice pattern of the intense heat notice pattern number 6 is selected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the development type advance notice pattern with the advance type advance notice patterns Nos. 1 to 18, 20 and 21 (the advanced type notice pattern for executing the advanced type notice effect) is selected. In the intense heat notice table, the ratio of selecting the intense heat notice patterns of the intense heat notice pattern numbers 1 to 6 (the intense heat notice pattern for executing the intense heat notice effect) is set to be low.

  For example, when the wolf man reach development effect is executed and the change display pattern of change number 8 that is a big hit is executed, the development of the advance notice pattern numbers 1 to 18, 20 and 21 in the advance notice table for day background The rate at which the type notice pattern is selected is {167 (total number of judgment values assigned to the developed type notice pattern numbers 1 to 18, 20, 21) / 233 (assigned to all developed type notice patterns). Total number of determination values)} × 100 = about 72%.

  On the other hand, the ratio at which the intense heat warning pattern numbers 1 to 6 are selected is {54 (the total number of determination values assigned to the intense heat warning pattern numbers 1 to 6). / 202 (the total number of judgment values assigned to all the intense heat notice patterns)} × 100 = about 27%.

  In this way, in order to determine whether or not to execute the intense heat notice effect, a balloon or a character (steps 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 of the advanced notice pattern) displayed as an image with the advanced notice pattern is displayed. A pre-stage for determining whether or not the balloon or character (steps 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 of the intense heat warning pattern) determined from the intense heat warning patterns Nos. 1 to 6 matches. As described above, by reducing the ratio of selecting the intense heat notification pattern of the intense heat notification pattern numbers 1 to 6 in the intense heat notification table, the probability that the intense heat notification effect is executed is reduced.

  FIG. 51 is a list showing intense heat notice patterns. In the case of executing the advanced notice pattern (developed notice pattern numbers 1 to 18, 20 and 21) in which the display area 42 includes an image display of the balloon from the monster in the display area 42, This is an intense heat warning pattern that displays the image by changing the color scheme of the balloon from rainbow to rainbow.

  The intense heat notice pattern number 2 is an advanced notice pattern (developed notice pattern numbers 2, 4, 5, 7, 9, 10, 12, 14, 15, and 15) including an effect of displaying a wolf man in the display area 42. When performing 16), it is an intense heat warning pattern that displays an image of the wolf man after transforming from a human figure to a wolf figure.

  The intense heat notice pattern number 3 is an advanced notice pattern (developed notice pattern numbers 1 to 18, 20 and 21) including an effect of displaying a balloon from a monster in the display area 42 or an effect of displaying a wolf man. ), The rainbow-colored balloon from the monster is displayed in the same manner as the intense fever notice pattern No. 1 or after the transformation as in the fever fever notice pattern No. 2 This is a hot fever notice table that displays images of wolves.

  The intense heat notice pattern number 4 is white when executing the advanced notice pattern (developed notice pattern numbers 4, 7, 9, 10, 12 and 15) including the effect of displaying the image of the Dracula in the display area 42. This is an intense heat warning pattern that displays the image of Dracula changed to the base clothing color scheme.

  Intense heat notice pattern number 5 is a white-based apparel when an advanced notice pattern (developed notice pattern number 7, 8, 12, 13) including an effect of displaying Franken in the display area 42 is displayed. This is a hot fever notice pattern that displays the image of Franken changed to the color scheme.

  The intense heat notice pattern number 4 is used for the color scheme of the clothing based on white when executing the advance notice pattern (development notice pattern numbers 12 to 17) including the effect of displaying the image of the monster in the display area 42. This is an intense heat warning pattern that displays the image of the changed monster.

  In the intense heat announcement pattern numbers 1, 2 and 4 to 5, the intense heat announcement pattern for displaying any one of steps 1 to 5 of the intense heat announcement pattern is set. On the other hand, in the intense heat announcement pattern of the intense heat announcement pattern number 3, an intense heat announcement pattern for displaying a plurality of steps (steps 1 and 2) of the intense heat announcement pattern is set.

  In the case of the intense heat advance notice pattern of the intense heat advance notice number 3, when determining whether or not to execute the intense heat advance notice effect, the ratio that matches the step executed in the advanced notice pattern increases, It is possible to execute the intense heat notice effect over a plurality of stages in the notice effect. Therefore, a plurality of image displays based on the intense heat notice pattern can be executed.

  Further, as the intense heat notice pattern, an intense heat notice pattern for displaying any one of steps 1 to 5 of the intense heat notice pattern corresponding to steps 1 to 5 of the advanced notice pattern is set.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the action of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 driven by the normal advanced notice pattern, which is the intense heat notice pattern corresponding to steps 2 ′, 3 ′, and 4 ′ of the advanced notice pattern. The intense heat warning pattern that drives one of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 is set by a different action (such as the number of movements of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 increasing or vibrating in small increments). Also good.

  Also in this case, the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 (steps 2 ′, 3 ′, and 4 ′ of the advanced notice pattern) driven by the evolved notice pattern, and the character bodies 150, 152, and It is determined whether or not the intense heat announcement effect is executed depending on whether or not 154 matches.

  Therefore, it is possible to obtain the same effect as the intense heat notification effect that displays any one of steps 1 to 5 of the intense heat notification pattern as well as to diversify and diversify the intense heat notification effect.

  FIG. 53 is a daylight background lightning notice table selected by the sub-integrated board 111 in the lightning notice selection process (FIG. 52; S152). When the background image (daytime background image 81) indicating the daytime state is displayed and controlled in the display area 42, the lightning warning pattern random number obtained in the lightning warning notice selection process (FIG. 52; S154) is displayed in the daylight background lightning notice table. Is a table for determining a lightning bolt notice pattern based on In the daylight background lightning notice table, the lightning notice pattern random number values are distributed to seven types of lightning notice patterns 0 to 6 corresponding to each of the variable display patterns.

  FIG. 54 is a night background lightning notice table selected by the sub-integrated board 111 in the lightning notice selection process (FIG. 52; S153). When the background image (night background image 82) in the night state is controlled to be displayed in the display area 42, the night background lightning notice table shows the lightning notice notice pattern random number acquired in the lightning notice notice selection process (FIG. 52; S154). It is a table for determining a lightning bolt notice pattern based on it. In the lightning bolt warning table for night background, the lightning bolt warning pattern random number value is assigned to seven types of lightning warning pattern Nos. 0-6 corresponding to each of the variable display patterns in the same manner as the lightning bolt warning table for daytime background. It is done.

  In these lightning bolt notice tables, seven types of lightning bolt notice pattern numbers 0 to 6 are prepared as lightning bolt notice patterns for lightning notice announcement. If the lightning warning pattern number 0 is selected in the lightning warning pattern, the lightning warning effect is not performed.

  That is, in the lightning bolt notice table, it is determined whether or not to execute the lightning bolt warning effect based on the lightning bolt warning pattern random number, and the lightning bolt warning pattern of the lightning bolt warning effect is determined. For example, if the lightning warning pattern numbers 1 to 6 are determined, it is determined to execute the lightning warning effect, and the lightning warning pattern number determined as the lightning warning pattern number of the lightning warning effect is determined. .

FIG. 55 is a list showing lightning bolt notice patterns.
The lightning warning pattern number 1 is a black color that controls display of a dark image (dark image 83) that darkens display contents (for example, a decorative symbol, a background image, and a character) in the display area 42 when the decorative symbol variation display is started. This is a lightning notice pattern for performing an effect (blackout gasse effect) for continuously executing the display contents before the blackout effect is performed after the out effect is performed once.

  Lightning bolt notice pattern No. 2 executes the display content before the blackout effect is performed once after the blackout effect is performed once when the decorative pattern variation display is started, and again after the predetermined period elapses. It is a lightning notice pattern that performs an effect (blackout gast effect) that performs an out effect and continuously executes the display content before the second blackout effect is performed again.

  The lightning warning pattern number 3 performs the blackout effect twice as with the lightning warning pattern number 2 and changes the background image after the second blackout effect (for example, the background image is the daytime background image 81). If so, it is a lightning notice pattern for changing to the night background image 82).

  Lightning bolt notice pattern No. 4 performs the display contents before the blackout effect is performed once after the blackout effect is performed once when the decorative display of the decorative pattern is started. During the second blackout production, the lightning flash for running lightning (lightning) on the dark image is controlled in the display area 42, and the left decorative pattern 80a is displayed on the dark image by being illuminated by the lightning. This is a lightning warning pattern that produces an effect of stopping and displaying while floating.

  Lightning warning pattern number 5 is illuminated by lightning while performing the blackout effect again after performing the lightning warning pattern number 4 and controlling the display of the second lightning flash during the execution of the blackout effect. This is a lightning warning pattern that produces an effect of forming a reach by stopping and displaying the right decorative design 80c in the dark image.

  Lightning bolt notice pattern number 6 is a lightning notice pattern that performs blackout gaze production (full rotation gaze) as if full rotation reach production is performed. In this embodiment, when the full rotation reach effect is executed, display control is performed for a special image that can be recognized that the full rotation reach effect may be executed. In the lightning warning pattern No. 6, after the display control of this special image, the blackout gasse effect which does not execute the full rotation reach effect is performed.

  In the lightning bolt warning table for the daytime background and the lightning bolt warning table for the night background, the lightning warning pattern number 4 or the lightning warning pattern number 5 is provided only when the variable display pattern that is the reach mode is designated as the decorative pattern variable display pattern. The judgment value is distributed so that the lightning bolt notice pattern can be selected.

  That is, when the normal variation of the variation display pattern number 1 is designated as the variation display pattern of the decorative design, the determination value is distributed so that only the lightning notice pattern numbers 1 to 3 can be selected.

  When a lightning bolt notice pattern Nos. 1 to 6 is performed when a variation display pattern that is a reach pattern is designated as the decorative pattern variable display pattern, the reach pattern of the decorative pattern is displayed after the performance is performed. Is displayed. Thus, based on the lightning warning pattern Nos. 4 and 5, the effect lamps 44a and 44b are controlled to be lit or blinking.

  In addition, a fluctuation display pattern (variation display pattern of fluctuation numbers 23 to 31) for instructing execution of “spotlight notice” and a fluctuation display pattern (variation display pattern of fluctuation numbers 32 and 33) for instructing execution of “object reach”. In, the judgment value is distributed so that only the lightning warning pattern of lightning warning pattern number 2 can be selected.

  Then, when the lightning warning pattern No. 2 is performed, the super reach development effect executed by each character is performed after the performance is executed, or the feature reach effect of driving the feature is performed. I will be broken.

  In the present embodiment, the sub-integrated board 111 determines a lightning notice pattern for executing a lightning notice such as a background change (lightning notice pattern number 3) or a lightning flash (lightning notice pattern numbers 4 and 5). On the other hand, the main control board 101 determines a reach effect in which the same blackout effect (lightning bolt notice pattern number 2) is incorporated.

  These reach effects are super reach development effects (variable display patterns with variable numbers 23 to 31) or accessory reach effects (variable display patterns with variable numbers 32 and 33) after spotlight notice execution. High reach production.

  In this way, the sub-integrated board 111 does not determine all the notice effects, but the main control board 101 determines a part of the notice effect that derives the reach effect with a high expectation of jackpot, thereby deriving the notice effects. Balanced.

  For example, an advanced notice effect is easily executed for a variable display pattern that is a big hit, and a lightning notice effect (blackout effect) having a lower priority than the advanced notice effect is less likely to be executed. On the other hand, when the main control board 101 determines the reach effect in which the blackout effect is incorporated, the bias of the notice effect can be suppressed.

  Further, in the variation display pattern (variation display pattern with variation number 34) instructing execution of “full rotation reach”, the determination value is distributed so that only the lightning warning pattern with lightning warning pattern number 0 can be selected.

  In the variable display pattern instructing execution of “full rotation reach”, a special image is displayed and controlled in the display area 42, and then a dark image that is an effect resembling the lightning warning pattern of lightning warning pattern number 1 is displayed for a predetermined time. Production to be performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the ratio (selection rate) at which the lightning warning patterns Nos. 4 and 5 are selected in the night background lightning warning table is higher than that of the daytime lightning warning table. The

  Specifically, if the variation display pattern of “Wolf man, hit” of variation number 6 is determined, if the lightning warning table for daytime background is selected, the selection rate of the lightning warning pattern of lightning warning pattern number 4 or 5 {(Numeric width of lightning warning pattern random number of lightning warning pattern number 4) + (Numeric width of lightning warning pattern random number of lightning warning pattern number 5) / Number of counters of lightning warning pattern random number} = 116/200.

  On the other hand, in the case of the night background lightning notice table, the selection rate of the lightning notice pattern of the lightning notice pattern number 4 or 5 is 144/200. This corresponds to the fact that it is easier to see lightning in the night background than in the daytime background.

  In the lightning bolt notice selection process (FIG. 52; S154), whether the lightning notice effect is performed by determining one of the lightning notice patterns set in the lightning notice table for daytime background or the lightning notice table for night background. Decide whether or not.

  However, for example, a random number for determining whether or not to perform the lightning warning effect may be provided, and after determining that the lightning warning effect is performed based on this random number, it may be determined as one of the lightning warning patterns for performing the lightning warning effect.

  FIG. 57 is a first mini-character notice table selected by the sub-integrated board 111 in the mini-character notice selection process (FIG. 56; S192). The first mini character notice table is displayed when the comment content of “Someone won't come” (comment notice pattern with comment notice pattern number 9) is not displayed in the balloon from the monster (step 1 of the advanced notice pattern). It is a table for determining a mini character notice pattern based on the mini character notice pattern random number acquired in the mini character notice selection process (FIG. 56; S194). In the first mini character notice table, the value of the mini character notice pattern random number is assigned to 12 kinds of mini character notice patterns of mini character notice pattern numbers 0 to 11 corresponding to each of the variable display patterns.

  FIG. 58 is a second mini character notice table selected by the sub-integrated board 111 in the mini character notice selection process (FIG. 56; S193). The second mini-character notice table is displayed when the comment content of “Someone won't come” (comment notice pattern with comment notice pattern number 9) is displayed in the balloon from the monster (step 1 of the advanced notice pattern). This is a table for determining a mini character notice pattern based on the mini character notice pattern random number acquired in the mini character notice selection process (FIG. 56; S194). In the second mini character notice table, similarly to the first mini character notice table, the values of the mini character notice pattern random numbers are assigned to the 12 kinds of mini character notice patterns 0 to 11 corresponding to each of the variable display patterns.

  In the first or second mini character notice table, 12 kinds of mini character notice pattern numbers 0 to 11 are prepared as mini character notice patterns for mini character notice effect. When the mini character notice pattern number 0 is selected from the mini character notice patterns, the mini character notice effect is not performed.

  That is, in the mini character notice table, it is determined whether or not to execute the mini character notice effect based on the mini character notice pattern random number, and the mini character notice pattern of the mini character notice effect is determined.

  For example, when the mini character notice pattern number is determined to be “1” to “11”, it is decided to execute the mini character notice effect and corresponds to the mini character notice pattern number determined as the mini character notice pattern of the mini character notice effect. Mini character notice pattern is decided.

  A random number for determining whether or not to execute the mini character notice effect is separately provided, and based on this random number, when it is determined that the mini character notice effect is executed, the mini character notice pattern number “1” to Any one of “11” may be determined.

  Further, a variable display pattern including a mini character notice pattern may be provided, and when a variable display pattern including these mini character notice patterns is determined, a mini character notice effect may be executed.

  In the first mini-character notice table and the second mini-character notice table, the ratio of the mini-character notice pattern numbers 1 to 11 is selected in the case of a big hit rather than the case where the display result is out of place (the mini-character notice effect is executed). The determination value is distributed so that the ratio is increased.

  For example, in the first mini character notice table, the probability (appearance rate) that a mini character appears as a mini character notice effect, that is, the probability that the mini character notice patterns No. 1 to 11 of the mini character notice pattern are executed is a normal reach effect (variation number) that is a big hit. 4 (variable display pattern of 4) is executed, {95 (total number of judgment values assigned to the mini character notice pattern numbers 1 to 11) / 151 (judgment value assigned to all mini character notice patterns) )} × 100 = about 63%.

  On the other hand, when the normal reach effect (variation display pattern with variation number 3) is executed, (81/151) × 100 = about 54%. Therefore, when the mini character notice effect is executed and the mini character is displayed, it is possible to improve the expectation that the display result is a big hit for the player.

  In the second mini character notice table, when the display result is out of place, the ratio of selecting the mini character notice pattern numbers 1 to 11 (the ratio at which the mini character notice effect is executed) is significantly lower than the first mini character notice table. In this way, the determination value is distributed.

  For example, when a normal reach effect (variation display pattern with variation number 3) that is out of place is executed, the probability that the mini character announcement patterns No. 1 to 11 of the mini character announcement pattern numbers are executed in the first mini character announcement table is about 54%. On the other hand, the probability that the mini character notice pattern Nos. 1 to 11 in the second mini character notice table is executed is (11/151) × 100 = about 7%.

  Since the second mini character notice table is a table used when the comment notice pattern of comment notice pattern number 9 is selected, a message from the monster-kun (step 1 of the advanced notice pattern) says "Is there anyone? "(Comment notice pattern with comment notice pattern number 9) is displayed, the proportion of appearance of mini characters based on the mini character notice pattern is set to be significantly low.

  In other words, the comment content of “Someone won't come” is displayed in the balloon from the monster, and if a mini character based on the mini character notice pattern appears, the probability of a big hit (expected expectation of big hit) is set high The expectation that the display result is a big hit for the player can be improved.

  Further, only when a variable display pattern in a reach mode is designated as the decorative display variable display pattern, the mini character notice pattern numbers 3, 5, 6, 8, 10 including the image display of the mini character image 92 imitating a trio. And 11 are assigned so that the selection values can be selected.

  When the mini character notice pattern Nos. 3, 5, 6, 8, 10, and 11 are executed when the variable display pattern that is the reach mode is designated as the decorative pattern change display pattern, at least a triple set After the mini character image 92 simulating the image is displayed, the reach pattern of the decorative symbols is displayed.

  That is, when the mini character image 92 imitating a triplet is displayed as an image, it can be understood that the decorative symbol variation display is in a reach mode.

  Further, among the variable display patterns that reach as the decorative display variable display pattern, the variable display patterns (variable numbers 4, 6, 8, and so on) that can be executed only when the big hit determination random number becomes a winning value in the big hit determination process. ..., 22 and 35) are designated, the mini character notice pattern number 11 can be selected.

  That is, when all the mini characters (Hiroshi, Hiroshi sister, trio or monster) displayed in the mini character notice are displayed, it is possible to grasp that the result of the variation display of the decorative symbol becomes a big hit symbol. .

  In the variable display pattern (variable display pattern of variable numbers 23 to 34) for instructing execution of “spotlight advance notice”, “actual object reach”, or “full rotation reach”, the mini character notice pattern number “0” is the mini character. The judgment value is distributed so that only the notice pattern can be selected.

  In addition, each of the mini character images 90 to 93 corresponding to each character is set with a big hit expectation degree in the order of Kaiko-chan> 3 person group> Hiroshi or Hiroshi sister. That is, when Kaiko-chan is displayed in the mini character notice effect, the highest hit expectation is set.

  Specifically, in the first mini-character notice table, when Kaikai-chan's mini-character is displayed, a determination value is assigned so that the expected degree of jackpot is the highest.

  For example, in the first mini character notice table, the expectation of jackpot when the mini character notice pattern of mini character notice pattern number 4 (image display of mini character image (Kai-chan) 93 imitating a human girl) is executed is 75% ( 66 (total number of determination values allocated to the variable display pattern when the big hit is obtained) / 88 (total number of determination values allocated to all the variable display patterns) × 100).

  On the other hand, when the mini character notice pattern of the mini character notice pattern number 1 or 2 (the image display of the mini character image 90 representing the Hiroshi or the mini character image 91 representing the Hiroshi sister) is executed, the big hit expectation is about 33. % (165 (the total number of determination values assigned to the variable display pattern when the jackpot is reached) / 495 (the total number of determination values assigned to all the variable display patterns) × 100).

  In addition, when the mini character notice pattern of mini character notice pattern number 3 (image display of a mini character image (Kyoko-chan) 93 imitating a human girl) is executed, the big hit expectation degree is about 67% (165 (when a big hit is reached) (Total number of determination values allocated to the variable display pattern) / 245 (total number of determination values allocated to all the variable display patterns) × 100).

  Therefore, when the Phantom-chan mini character is displayed, it is possible to improve the expectation that the display result of the variable display is a big hit.

  Also, when Hiroshi and Hiroshi sister mini characters are displayed, the big hit expectation is set lower than when the trio or Kaiko-chan mini characters are displayed, but Hiroshi mini characters and Hiroshi sister mini characters Is displayed in combination, the big hit expectation is set higher than when each of the mini characters of Hiroshi or Hiroshi's sister is displayed alone.

  Specifically, when Hiroshi or Hiroshi sister's mini character is displayed in the mini character notice table, the determination value is assigned so that the expected degree of jackpot is high.

  For example, when a mini character notice pattern of mini character notice pattern number 5 (display of mini character image 90 representing Hiroshi and mini character image 91 representing Hiroshi sister) is executed in the mini character notice table, the big hit expectation is 88%. (44 (total number of determination values allocated to the variation display pattern when the big hit is obtained) / 50 (total number of determination values allocated to all variation display patterns) × 100).

  Therefore, since the meaning (big hit expectation) suggested by the mini character differs depending on whether the mini character or Hiroshi sister's mini character is displayed alone or in combination, if the single character is displayed alone, the big hit Even if the degree of expectation is low, it does not stop paying attention to Hiroshi or Hiroshi sister's mini character.

  In the present embodiment, the sub-integrated board 111 determines a mini character notice pattern in the mini character notice selection process (FIG. 56; S194), and outputs information corresponding to the result of the mini character notice selection process as a sub information output process (FIG. 39; S110). Is transmitted to the second electrical decoration control board 113. And the 2nd electrical decoration control board 113 performs a mini character notice as a back effect in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116.

FIG. 59 is a list showing mini character notice patterns.
The mini character notice pattern number 1 is a mini character that performs an effect of displaying a mini character image 90 representing Hiroshi on the back of the variable display area of the right decorative symbol 80c of the decorative symbols when the decorative symbol variable display is started. It is a notice pattern.

  The mini character notice pattern number 2 performs an effect of displaying the mini character image 91 representing the Hiroshi sister on the back of the variable display area of the left decorative symbol 80a of the decorative symbols when the decorative symbol variable display is started. It is a mini character notice pattern.

  The mini character notice pattern number 3 is a mini character image 92 imitating a wolf man, Dracula and Franken on the back of the variable display area of the right decorative pattern 80c among the decorative patterns when the decorative display of the decorative pattern is started. This is a mini character notice pattern that produces an effect of displaying an image.

  The mini character notice pattern number 4 is an image of a mini character image (Kyoko-chan) 93 imitating a human girl on the back of the variable display area of the left decorative pattern 80a among the decorative patterns when the decorative pattern variable display is started. This is a mini character notice pattern that produces an effect to be displayed.

  The mini character notice pattern No. 5 displays a mini character image 90 representing a Hiroshi image on the back of the variation display area of the right decoration pattern 80c among the decoration symbols when the variation display of the decoration symbol is started. Of these, a mini character notice pattern that produces an effect of displaying a mini character image 91 representing Hiroshi on the back of the variable display area of the left decorative pattern 80a.

  The mini character notice pattern number 6 displays a mini character image 90 representing Hiroshi on the back of the variation display area of the right decoration symbol 80c among the ornament symbols when the variation display of the ornament symbol is started, and displays a triplet. This is a mini character notice pattern that produces an effect of displaying a simulated mini character image 92.

  The mini character notice pattern number 7 displays a mini character image 90 representing a Hiroshi image on the back of the variation display area of the right decoration pattern 80c among the decoration symbols when the variation display of the decoration symbol is started. Of these, a mini character notice pattern that produces an effect of displaying a mini character image (Kyoko-chan) 93 imitating a human girl on the back of the variable display area of the left decorative pattern 80a.

  The mini character notice pattern number 8 displays a mini character image 91 representing the Hiroshi sister on the back of the variable display area of the left decorative symbol 80a among the decorative symbols when the decorative symbol variable display is started. Among these, a mini character notice pattern that produces an effect of displaying a mini character image 92 simulating a trio on the back of the variable display area of the right decorative design 80c.

  The mini character notice pattern number 9 displays an image of a mini character image 91 representing the Hiroshi sister on the back of the fluctuation display area of the left decorative symbol 80a among the decorative symbols when the decorative symbol variation display is started. This is a mini character notice pattern that produces an effect of displaying a mini character image 91 representing the image.

  The mini character notice pattern number 10 displays a mini character image 92 imitating a trio on the back of the variable display area of the right decorative pattern 80c among the decorative patterns when starting the decorative display of the decorative pattern, and also displays the decorative pattern. Among them, a mini character notice pattern that produces an effect of displaying a mini character image (Kyoko-chan) 93 imitating a human girl on the back of the variable display area of the left decorative pattern 80a.

  The mini character notice pattern number 11 is a mini character image 90 representing a Hiroshi and a mini character image imitating a triplet on the back of the variation display area of the right decoration symbol 80c among the ornament symbols when the variation display of the ornament symbol is started. 92, and a mini character image 91 representing a Hiroshi sister and a mini character image (Kyoko-chan) 93 imitating a human girl on the back of the variable display area of the left decorative pattern 80a of the decorative patterns. This is a mini character notice pattern that produces an effect of displaying all the mini characters as images.

  FIG. 61 is a list of branch effect notice patterns determined by the sub integrated board 111 in the branch effect notice selection process (FIG. 60; S207).

  In the branch effect notice table, 24 types of branch effect notice pattern numbers “0” to “23” are prepared as the first kind branch effect notice patterns. In addition, a total of 12 types of branch effect notice pattern numbers “0” to “11” are prepared as the second kind branch effect notice patterns. In addition, a total of 12 types of branch effect notice pattern numbers “0” to “11” are prepared as third kind branch effect notice patterns.

  Since the super reach production or the super reach development production is executed based on the fluctuation display pattern of the variation numbers “5” to “22” or “35”, the branch production in the process of shifting from the normal reach production to the super reach production. It has already been decided that the advance notice will be executed.

  That is, in the branch effect notice table, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the branch effect notice is executed, and only the branch effect notice pattern of the branch effect notice is determined. Note that a variable display pattern including a branch effect notice pattern may be provided, and when the variable display pattern including these branch effect notice patterns is determined, the branch effect notice may be executed.

  In the branch effect notice table, a total of 24 kinds of branch effect notice pattern numbers “0” to “23” corresponding to each of the change display patterns of the change numbers “5” to “22” for executing the super reach effect. Random effect notice pattern random numbers are assigned to the effect notice pattern.

  In addition, a total of 12 types of branch effect notice pattern numbers “0” to “11” corresponding to the change display pattern of the change number “35” for executing the super reach extension effect of the monster-kun reach development effect or the full rotation reach effect. A branch effect notice pattern random number is distributed to the branch effect notice pattern.

  On the other hand, in the variation display patterns of the variation numbers “1” to “4” or “23” to “34”, there is no process of shifting from the normal reach production to the super reach production.

  In the branch effect notice table, branch effect notice pattern numbers “0”, “10”, “20” are specified only when the change display patterns of the change numbers “5” to “10” for executing at least the wolf man reach effect are designated. The determination value is distributed so that the first type branch effect notice pattern of “21” can be selected.

  When the variation display patterns of the variation numbers “5” to “10” are designated, the branch effect advance notice pattern number “0”, “10”, “20” or “21” is executed. Then, after the character image imitating the wolf man is displayed on the portrait 90 at the third branch effect notice of the branch effect, the wolf man reach effect is displayed in which the character image imitating the wolf man is displayed.

  Also, branching advance notice pattern numbers “1” to “3”, “11” to “13”, only when the change display patterns of change numbers “11” to “16” for executing the dramatic reach effect are designated. The determination value is distributed so that the first type branch effect notice pattern of “22” or “23” can be selected.

  When the variation display patterns of the variation numbers “11” to “16” are designated, the first of the branch effect notice pattern numbers “1” to “3”, “11” to “13”, “22” or “23” When the seed branch effect notice pattern is executed, a character image imitating Dracula is displayed on the portrait 90 in the third effect notice notice of the branch effect, and then a Dracula reach effect that displays a character image imitating Dracula is displayed. Executed.

  Also, branching advance notice pattern numbers “4” to “9” and “14” to “19” are specified only when the change display patterns of change numbers “17” to “22” for executing the Franken reach effect are specified. The determination value is distributed so that the first-type branch effect notice pattern can be selected.

  When the variation display patterns of the variation numbers “17” to “22” are designated, the branch effect announcement pattern numbers “4” to “9” or “14” to “19” are executed. Then, after the character image imitating Franken is displayed on the portrait 90 in the third branch effect notice of the branch effects, Franken Reach effect displaying the character image imitating Franken is executed.

  Also, the branch type notice pattern numbers “0” to “11” of the second type branch are only provided when the variable display pattern of the variable number “35” for executing the super reach branch premier effect is designated and it is a non-probable big hit. The determination value is distributed so that the production notice pattern can be selected.

  When the variation display pattern of the variation number “35” is designated and the branch effect announcement pattern numbers “0” to “11” of the branch effect announcement pattern numbers “0” to “11” are executed when the probability change is big hit, the branch effect is executed. Among them, a character image imitating a human boy (Monster-kun) is displayed on the portrait 90 at the third branch effect notice.

  After that, the monster-kun reach development effect that displays the character image (monster) that imitates a human boy without executing the super-reach effect is executed. Specific symbol combination) is displayed.

  Also, the third type branch effect of branch effect notice pattern numbers “0” to “11” is provided only when the change display pattern of the change number “35” for executing the super reach branch premier effect is designated and the probability change is a big hit. The judgment value is distributed so that the notice pattern can be selected.

  When the variation display pattern of the variation number “35” is designated and the branch effect announcement pattern numbers “0” to “11” of the branch effect announcement pattern numbers “0” to “11” are executed when the probability variation is a big hit, the branch effect is displayed. Among them, the character image (Kyoko-chan) imitating a human girl is displayed on the portrait 90 at the third branch effect notice.

  After that, the full rotation reach effect is executed without executing the super reach effect, and the probability variation big hit symbol (a combination of specific symbols) is displayed in the full rotation reach effect.

  In the present embodiment, based on the variation display pattern and the gaming state flag (here, the probability variation state flag) determined on the main control board 101, the sub-integrated board 111 has the second type branch effect notice pattern or the third type branch. Which of the performance notice patterns is to be used is determined.

  However, by including the game state information in the variable display pattern, the sub integrated board 111 may determine the branch effect notice pattern based on the variable display pattern including the game state information.

  For example, in the variation display pattern of variation number “35”, a variation display pattern that displays a probable variation jackpot and a variation display pattern that displays a non-probability variation jackpot after executing the super reach branch premier effect may be set in the variation display pattern table.

  In this case, there is no need to distinguish between the second-type branch effect notice pattern and the third-type branch effect notice pattern, and a single kind of branch effect notice pattern can be obtained. Further, in the branch effect notice table, different determination values can be assigned to each of the variable display patterns including the game state information.

  Also, in the case of the super reach production, no outlier symbol is derived, and when the jackpot symbol is derived in the super reach production, or after the super reach production, the variation numbers “6” to “10”, “ Only when the variable display patterns of “12” to “16” and “18” to “22” are designated, the branch effect notice pattern numbers “10” to “19” of the first kind branch effect notice pattern can be selected. The determination value is distributed so that

  When the variation display patterns of the variation numbers “6”, “12”, and “18” are designated, the branch effect announcement pattern numbers “10” to “19” of the first type branch effect announcement pattern are executed. The jackpot symbol is displayed in the super reach production after the production is executed.

  In addition, when the variation display patterns “7” to “10”, “13” to “16”, and “19” to “22” are designated, the numbers of the branch effect notice pattern numbers “10” to “19” are displayed. When the one-type branch effect notice pattern is executed, the super reach development effect is executed via the super reach effect after the branch effect is executed.

  Also, in the first to third branching effect notices executed in this embodiment, as in the advanced notice effect, the character whose upper and lower relations are in accordance with the upper and lower relations of Monster-kun> Franken> Dracula> Wolf man An effect that causes the player to appear sequentially is executed. Unlike the advanced notice effect, characters having the same vertical relationship can appear over multiple (two or three) branch effect notices.

  The first to third branch effect notices are branch effect notice pattern numbers “0” to “19”, and branch effect notice pattern numbers “0” to “11”. This is a notice based on the second kind branch effect notice pattern and the third kind branch effect notice pattern whose branch effect notice pattern numbers are “0” to “11”.

  Also, in the super reach effect and the super reach development effect after the third branch effect notice is executed, the expectation degree of jackpot is set higher as the character's vertical relationship rises.

  The super reach development effect that is determined to be executed when the background color of the portrait 90 displayed in the branch effect notice is red is set to have a higher degree of jackpot expectation than the super reach effect.

  Therefore, the super reach effect and the super reach development effect can be specified by the character displayed in the third branch effect notice and the background color of the portrait 90 displayed in the first to third branch effect notices. It is also possible to grasp the degree of jackpot expectation.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as the branch effect notice, the second or third branch effect notice that is displayed toward the lower character in the vertical relation of the monster-kun> franken> dracula> wolf man is included. The effect notice pattern is provided in the first kind branch effect notice pattern of the branch effect notice pattern numbers “20” to “23”.

  Specifically, the variation display pattern of variation numbers “6”, “8”, “10”, “12”, “14”, or “16” from which the jackpot symbol is derived in the super reach production or the super reach development production is displayed. Only when designated, the determination value is distributed so that the branch effect notice pattern numbers “20” to “23” of the branch effect notice pattern can be selected.

  The first of the branch effect notice pattern numbers “20” to “23” when the variation display pattern “6”, “8”, “10”, “12”, “14” or “16” is designated. When the seed branching effect notice pattern is executed, the second or third branching effect is displayed toward the lower character in the vertical relationship.

  Then, the jackpot symbol is displayed in the super reach effect or the super reach development effect after executing the branch effect. As a result, attention is paid to the character displayed in the first to third branch effect notices, and the player's sense of expectation for the big hit gaming state can be gradually increased.

  In the branch effect notice table, the ratio of selecting the branch effect notice pattern whose background color is red is set lower than the ratio of selecting the branch effect notice pattern whose background color of the portrait 90 is blue. The

  The branch effect notice pattern in which the background color of the portrait 90 is blue is the first kind branch effect notice pattern of the branch effect notice pattern numbers “0” to “9” and the branch effect notice pattern numbers “0” to “5”. It is a type 3 branch effect notice pattern of type 2 branch effect notice pattern and branch effect notice pattern numbers “0” to “5”.

  The branch effect notice pattern in which the background color of the portrait 90 is red is the first kind branch effect notice pattern of the branch effect notice pattern numbers “10” to “19” and the branch effect notice pattern numbers “6” to “11”. This is the second type branch effect notice pattern and the branch effect notice pattern numbers “6” to “11”.

  For example, when the wolf man reach development effect is executed and the variation display pattern with the variation number “8” that is a big hit is performed, the first type branch effect announcement pattern with the branch effect announcement pattern number “0” is selected. The ratio is {57 (judgment value assigned to the first kind branch effect notice pattern of branch effect notice pattern number 0) / 73 (total number of decision values assigned to all first kind branch effect notice patterns)} X100 = about 78%.

  On the other hand, the ratio at which the first type branch effect notice pattern of the branch effect notice pattern number “10” is selected is {12 (determination assigned to the first kind branch effect notice pattern of the branch effect notice pattern number 10). Value) / 73 (the total number of determination values assigned to all first-type branch effect announcement patterns)} × 100 = about 16%.

  In addition, in the branch effect notice table, the branch including the branch effect notice that is displayed toward the lower character than the rate at which the branch effect notice pattern is displayed that is displayed sequentially toward the upper character. It is set so that the ratio at which the effect notice pattern is selected is significantly reduced.

  The branch effect notice pattern that is sequentially displayed toward the upper character in the vertical relationship is the first kind branch effect notice pattern of the branch effect notice pattern numbers “0” to “19”.

  The branch effect notice pattern including the branch effect notice displayed for the character whose vertical relationship is lower is the first kind branch effect notice pattern of the branch effect notice pattern numbers 20-23.

  For example, when the wolf man reach development effect is executed and the change display pattern with the change number “8” which is a big hit is executed, the branch effect advance notice pattern number “0” or “10” of the first type branch effect advance notice pattern is executed. Is selected as {69 (determination value assigned to the first kind branch effect notice pattern of branch effect notice pattern numbers 0, 10) / 73 (assigned to all first kind branch effect notice patterns). Total number of determination values)} × 100 = about 95%.

  On the other hand, the proportion of the branch effect notice pattern number “20” or “21” of the first kind branch effect notice pattern selected is {4 (branch effect notice pattern numbers 20 and 21 of the first kind branch effect notice pattern. (Determination value assigned to) / 73 (total number of decision values assigned to all first-type branch effect notice patterns)} × 100 = about 5%.

  In this way, all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the derivation of the big hit symbol by greatly reducing the ratio of selecting the branch effect notice pattern including the branch effect notice pattern that is displayed toward the character whose upper and lower relations are lower. In the case where the previously recognized ratio is executed while the ratio of the previously recognized effect is executed, it is possible to improve the level of bliss for the fact that the derivation of the big hit symbol is recognized before all the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 62 shows first to third type branch effect notice patterns selected by the sub integrated board 111 in the branch effect notice selection process (FIG. 60; S203 to S206).

  In the branch effect notice pattern, a combination of the background color of the portrait 90 displayed in the display area 42 and the branch effect for three times from the first to the third time (character displayed in the portrait 90) is set.

  “Oo” in the figure means that a character image imitating a wolf man is displayed on the portrait 90. “Dora” means that a character image imitating Dracula is displayed on the portrait 90. “Hula” means that a character image simulating Franken is displayed on the portrait 90.

  “Monster” means that a character image (monster) imitating a human boy is displayed on the portrait 90. Further, “monster” means that a character image (monster child) imitating a human girl is displayed on the portrait 90.

  Blue and red are prepared as background colors of the portrait 90. If the blue background color is a normal color (a background color that does not suggest anything) and a red background color is displayed, the super-reach development will not lead to a breaching pattern, and the super-reach will develop after the super-reach production. It is determined that the production will be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 62A, the branch effect notice pattern number 0, 10, 20 or 21 is a first kind branch effect notice pattern that displays a character image imitating a wolf man in the third branch effect notice. It is.

  Branch effect notice pattern numbers 1 to 11, 11 to 13, 22 or 23 are first kind branch effect notice patterns for displaying a character image imitating Dracula in the third branch effect notice. The branch effect notice pattern numbers 4 to 9 or 14 to 19 are first type branch effect notice patterns that display a character image simulating Franken in the third branch effect notice.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 62 (B), the branch effect notice pattern numbers 0 to 11 are the second kind effect notices for displaying a character image (monster) that imitates a human boy in the third effect notice of branch effects. It is a pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (C), the branch effect notice pattern numbers 0 to 11 are the third kind of effect that displays a character image (Kyoko-chan) imitating a human girl in the third branch effect notice. It is a notice pattern.

  In the branching effect presentation notice table, three types of branching effect presentation pattern numbers “0” to “2” are prepared as branching effect presentation notice patterns for branching effect presentation. In addition, when the branching instrument notice pattern number is determined to be “0” in the branching effect presentation notice pattern, the branching effect notice is not performed.

  That is, in the branching effect presentation notice table, it is determined whether or not to perform the branching effect presentation notice based on the random number of the branching effect presentation notice pattern, and the branching effect presentation notice pattern of the branching effect presentation notice is determined. Is done.

  For example, when the branching effect presentation notice pattern number “1” or “2” is determined, it is decided to execute the branching accessory notice and the branching effect presentation notice pattern of the branching effect presentation notice. The branching effect directing notice pattern of the branching effect directing notice pattern number is determined.

  In addition, a random number for determining whether or not to execute the branching effect presentation notice is provided separately, and when it is determined that the branching effect presentation notice is to be executed based on this random number, the branching action based on the branching effect presentation notice pattern random number is determined. You may make it determine in any one of the product effect notice pattern number "1" or "2".

  In addition, when a variable display pattern including a branch effect announcement notice pattern is provided together with a branch effect announcement pattern, and a variable display pattern including these branch effect announcement pattern and branch effect presentation notice pattern is determined, a part of the branch effect notice is determined. As such, a branch accessory effect notice may be executed.

  FIG. 63 is a branch effect presentation notice table selected by the sub integrated board 111 in the branch presentation notice selection process (FIG. 60; S208).

  The branching effect presentation notice table is a table for determining a branching effect presentation notice pattern based on the branching action presentation notice pattern random number acquired in the branch effect notice selection process (FIG. 60; S209).

  In the branching effect presentation notice table, the branching effect presentation pattern numbers “0” to “2” correspond to the variable display patterns “5” to “22” or “35” for executing the branch presentation notice. The branching effect directing pattern random numbers are distributed among the three types of branching effect directing notice patterns.

  When the variation display pattern with the variation number “35” is executed, the monster or monster character will be displayed in the display area 42 as the third branch effect announcement, but the same character as this character Since the character body imitating the character is not provided, the branching effect effect notice pattern random number is distributed to the branching effect effect notice pattern of the branching effect effect pattern number “2” in the change display pattern of the change number “35”. Not.

  In the branching effect presentation notice table, a variable display with a high jackpot expectation is set, compared to a case where a variable display pattern with a low jackpot expectation is set (a variable display pattern in which a super reach effect is executed). When the pattern (variable display pattern in which the monster-kun reach development effect is executed as the super reach development effect) is executed, the ratio that the branching effect effect notice pattern for causing the character body 150, 152, or 154 to appear is selected Is set higher.

  For example, when the wolf man reach effect is executed and the change display pattern of change number 6 which is a big hit is executed, the branch accessory effect notice pattern number “1” or “2” is selected. Ratio is {16 (the total number of judgment values assigned to the branching effect presentation notice patterns of the branching effect presentation notice patterns Nos. 1 and 2) / 98 (assigned to all branching effect presentation notice patterns) Total number of determination values)} × 100 = about 16%.

  On the other hand, when the monster man reach development effect is executed after the wolf man reach effect is executed, and the change display pattern of the change number 10 which is a big hit is executed, the branch effect notice pattern number “1” or “ The ratio at which the branch effect notice pattern of “2” is selected is {23 (the total number of judgment values assigned to the branch effect effect notice pattern Nos. 1 and 2) / 98 (all branch roles). The total number of judgment values assigned to the object effect notice pattern)} × 100 = about 23%.

  Or, when the variation display pattern from which the jackpot symbol is derived is executed rather than the case in which the variation display pattern from which the deviation symbol is derived is executed, the branching effect presentation notice for causing the character body 150, 152, or 154 to appear. It is set so that the rate at which the pattern is selected is high.

  For example, when the wolf man reach development effect is executed and the change display pattern of the change number “7” which is out of place is executed, the branch feature effect advance notice of the branch character effect notice pattern number “1” or “2” is executed. The ratio at which the pattern is selected is (14/98) × 100 = about 14%.

  On the other hand, when the wolf man reach development effect is executed and the change display pattern of change number “8”, which is a big hit, is executed, the branch effect notice pattern of branch effect notice pattern number “1” or “2” is executed. The ratio at which is selected is (20/98) × 100 = about 20%.

  Also, out-of-order symbols are derived in the order of the branching agent effect notice pattern number “0”, the branching effect effect notice pattern number “1”, or the branching effect effect notice pattern number “2”. It is set so that the rate at which the variable display pattern from which the big hit symbol is derived with respect to the variable display pattern is executed is high.

  For example, the big hit expectation degree when the branch accessory effect notice pattern number “0” is executed is about 49% (allocated to the variable display pattern when the big hit is among the change numbers 5 to 22). The total number of judgment values = 692) / the total number of judgment values assigned to the fluctuation display patterns of the fluctuation numbers 5 to 22 = 1425 × 100). The expectation of jackpot when executed is about 53% (138/258 × 100).

  On the other hand, the big hit expectation degree when the branching effect presentation notice pattern of the branching effect presentation notice pattern number “2” is executed is about 68% (43/63 × 100).

  In this way, when the branch character effect notice pattern with the branch character effect notice pattern number “1” is executed and the character body 150, 152, or 154 moves in a rattling manner, the character object 150, 152, or 154 does not move. However, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the big hit gaming state.

  Further, the branch object effect notice pattern of the branch effect effect notice pattern number “2” is executed, and a character body 150 imitating the same character as the character displayed in the display area 42 as the third branch effect notice. When 152 or 154 appears, it is possible to further increase the player's sense of expectation for the big hit gaming state rather than the character body 150, 152 or 154 moving with a rattle.

  FIG. 64 is a list showing branching effect presentation notice patterns determined by the sub integrated board 111 in the branch presentation notice selection process (FIG. 60; S209).

  When a predetermined character is displayed as an image in the display area 42 as the third branch effect notice, the branching effect effect notice pattern number 1 controls the driving of the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, or 155 to display all characters. This is a branching effect presentation notice pattern for producing the bodies 150, 152 and 154 to appear in front of the display area 42.

  Here, the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 are driven and controlled so that a part of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 can be visually recognized and the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 operate small and violently. The

  A branch character effect notice pattern number “2” has a predetermined character image displayed in the display area 42 as the third branch effect notice, and character bodies 150 and 152 imitating the same character as the image displayed character. Alternatively, reference numeral 154 is a branching effect presentation notice pattern in which the driving control is performed by the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, or 155 and the presentation appears in front of the display area 42.

  Here, the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 are driven to the appearance position where the entire shape of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 can be visually recognized, like the movement of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 according to the advanced notice pattern. Be controlled.

  Note that in the branching effect presentation notice pattern with the branching effect presentation notice number “1”, all the character bodies 150, 152 and 154 are moved in front of the appearance position. The stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f and 155 are driven and controlled so that only the character bodies 150, 152 and 154 imitating the same character as the character displayed in the display area 42 move in front of the appearance position. It may be.

  In addition, in the branching effect presentation notice pattern of the branching effect presentation notice pattern number “2”, character bodies 150, 152, and 154 imitating the same character as the character displayed in the display area 42 as the third branching effect notice. However, the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 may be driven and controlled so that all the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are moved to the appearance position.

  Further, the branching effect presentation notice is an effect that causes the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 to appear only in the third branch presentation notice, but is also displayed in the display area 42 in the first and second branch presentation notices. It may be an effect of causing the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 to appear in accordance with the existing character.

  FIG. 66 is a sound determination table set by the sub-integrated board 111 in the sound control process (FIG. 65). The sound determination table includes a probability variation big hit determination table, a non-probability variable big hit determination table, a reach deviation determination table, and a loss determination table.

  In the probability variation big hit determination table, a determination value is assigned so that the sound output mode in the previous variation display is continued at a high rate. If the probability change jackpot is changed at a high rate from the normal sound to the special sound, the player's expectation for the probability change jackpot is reduced when the normal sound is output.

  Therefore, even if the sound output mode in the previous fluctuation display is a normal sound and the next fluctuation display is a probable big hit, the normal sound is output at a high rate and the normal sound is output. Does not reduce expectation.

  In addition, when the sound output mode in the previous variation display is a special sound, the sound output mode is changed at a higher rate than when the sound output mode in the previous variation display is a normal sound. After switching to, after reducing the expectation for the probable jackpot, it becomes possible to further improve the player's interest by becoming a probable jackpot.

  In the probability variation big hit determination table, when the sound output mode in the previous variation display is a special sound, the sound output mode is changed at a higher rate than when the sound output mode in the previous variation display is a normal sound.

  Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern to start the next fluctuation display becomes a non-probable big hit, even if it is changed to a normal sound, the player does not know whether it is a probable big hit or a non-probable big hit. Even when the special sound is changed from the special sound at the start, the expectation for the probable big hit is not lowered so much.

  In the non-probable big hit determination table, determination values are assigned so that the sound output mode is a normal sound. Next, when the variation pattern for starting the variation display becomes a non-probable variation big hit, the normal sound is changed so that when the normal sound is outputted, the probability variation big hit is not controlled.

  Furthermore, the control is performed so that the probability variation big hit always occurs when a special sound is output. With this configuration, when a special sound is output, the player's sense of expectation for the probable big hit can be enhanced.

  In the reach determination table and the determination table at the time of loss, a determination value is assigned so that the sound output mode in the previous variation display is continued at a high rate. The probability of being determined to be a big hit is 1/490, and most of the variation display patterns from the main control board 101 are out of reach and out of variation patterns.

  Therefore, when the next fluctuation display is out of reach or out of reach, the sound output mode is not changed frequently by continuing the sound output mode at a high rate, so that the player is confused by changing the sound output mode frequently. Can be prevented.

  70 to 72 are first to third button notice tables selected by the sub integrated board 111 in the button notice selection process (FIG. 69; S262).

  In these first to third button notice tables, a total of 14 button notice patterns having button notice pattern numbers “1” to “14” are prepared as button notice patterns for button notice effects.

  Here, it is already determined to execute the button notice effect on the balloon from the monster based on the evolved notice pattern whose evolution notice pattern number is “18”, “20” or “21”.

  That is, in the button notice table, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the button notice effect is executed, and only the button notice pattern of the button notice effect is determined. When a variable display pattern including an advanced notice pattern and a button notice pattern is provided, and a variable display pattern including these advanced notice pattern and button notice pattern is determined, the button notice pattern is executed together with the evolved notice pattern. It is good.

  The first button notice table is for determining a button notice pattern based on the button notice pattern random number acquired in the button notice process (FIG. 69; S264) when the advanced notice pattern number is determined to be “18”. It is a table.

  In the first button notice table, button notice pattern random numbers are distributed to 14 types of button notice patterns having button notice pattern numbers “1” to “14” corresponding to each of the variable display patterns.

  The second button notice table is for determining a button notice pattern based on the button notice pattern random number acquired in the button notice process (FIG. 69; S264) when the advanced notice pattern number is determined to be “20”. It is a table.

  In the second button notice table, button notice pattern random numbers are distributed to a total of ten kinds of button notice patterns having button notice pattern numbers “5” to “14” corresponding to each of the variable display patterns. That is, the button notice pattern random numbers are not assigned to the button notice patterns having the button notice pattern numbers “1” to “4”.

  The third button notice table is for determining a button notice pattern based on the button notice pattern random number acquired in the button notice process (FIG. 69; S264) when the advanced notice pattern number is determined to be “21”. It is a table.

  In the third button notice table, button notice patterns are provided for a total of nine kinds of button notice patterns having button notice pattern numbers “5” to “7” or “9” to “14” corresponding to each of the variable display patterns. Random numbers are distributed. That is, the button notice pattern random numbers are not assigned to the button notice patterns having the button notice pattern numbers “1” to “4” or “8”.

  In the first button notice table, it is determined that the button notice pattern numbers “5” to “15” can be selected only when the variable display pattern that reaches the reach is designated as the decorative display variable display pattern. The value is distributed.

  In addition, in the second button notice table and the third button notice table, the button notice pattern numbers “1” to “15” are selected only when the variable display pattern that becomes the reach mode is specified as the decorative display variable display pattern. The judgment value is distributed so as to be possible.

  When the button notice pattern number provided in the first button notice table is determined as “5” to “15” and the comment content based on the button notice pattern is displayed when the first operation signal is input, After executing the notice effect (development notice effect), the reach form of the decorative symbol is always displayed.

  In addition, the button notice pattern number provided in the second button notice table or the third button notice table is determined as “1” to “15”, and the button notice pattern is displayed when the third or seventh operation signal is input. When the content of the comment is displayed, the reach form of the decorative symbol is always displayed after the button notice effect (developed notice effect) is executed.

That is, when the player is requested to repeatedly hit the operation button 38, the reach form of the decorative symbol is always displayed after the button notice effect is executed.

  Also, in the first to third button notice tables, the button notice pattern number “12” or “14” can be selected only when a variation display pattern that is a big hit is designated as the variation display pattern of the decorative symbol. Judgment values are assigned to.

  When the button notice pattern number is determined to be “14” and the comment content based on the button notice table is displayed when the operation signal is input a predetermined number of times, the monster displayed in the advanced notice effect is displayed. Is displayed in the balloon (Step 1), and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a non-probable big hit symbol or a big hit symbol after the button notice effect (developed notice effect) is executed.

  Further, in the first to third button notice tables, the fluctuation display pattern of “spotlight notice”, “actual object reach” or “full rotation reach”, the fluctuation display pattern whose fluctuation number in the second button notice table is “3”, For variable display patterns with a variable number “3”, “5”, “11” or “17” in the third button notification table, an advanced notification pattern (an advanced notification pattern number corresponding to the button notification table) is used. Is any one of “18”, “20”, and “21”) is not selected in the daytime background advance notice table or the night background advance notice table. Therefore, the judgment value is not distributed to all the button notice patterns.

  Further, in the second button notice table, the determination value is not assigned to the button notice patterns having the button notice pattern numbers “1” to “4”. Here, the comment content updated and displayed with the button notice pattern number “1” to “4” is the same as the comment content displayed with the comment notice pattern number “1”, “2”, “4”, or “6”. When the comment content is displayed, the player feels that useful information cannot be obtained even though the operation button 38 is operated three times, and the operation button 38 is used in subsequent games. It will not be operated.

  For this reason, since the player rewards the effort of operating the operation button 38 three times, the judgment value is assigned only to the button notice patterns having the button notice pattern numbers “5” to “14”. Further, more judgment values than the first button notice table are assigned to the button notice pattern with the button notice pattern number “12” or “14” for updating and displaying “expected degree to crazy!” Or “big hit!”.

  Further, in the third button notice table, the determination value is not assigned to the button notice pattern number “8” in addition to the button notice pattern numbers “1” to “4”. In this case as well, since the player rewards the effort of operating the operation button 38 seven times, the third button notice table is set so as not to cause the appearance of information that reduces the expectation that is a big hit like “expected degree 10 key”. Composed.

  Furthermore, the button notice pattern number “12” or “14” for updating and displaying “expected degree kai-kaikai” and “big hit!” Is more than the first button notice table and the second button notice table. The judgment value is distributed.

  The button notice patterns having the button notice pattern numbers “5” to “7” are displayed after the character body 150, 152, or 154 is driven and controlled based on the button notice pattern by operating the operation button 38 a predetermined number of times. Many determination values are assigned to a variable display pattern for executing a reach effect that causes a character corresponding to 150, 152, or 154 to appear.

  For example, when a variation display pattern with a variation number “5” to “10” for executing a wolf man reach production is designated, a button with a button notice pattern number “5” for driving and controlling the character body 154 imitating a wolf man is designated. The notice pattern is more easily selected than the button notice pattern whose button notice pattern number is “6” or “7”.

  On the other hand, when the button notice pattern number is “5” to “7”, the determination value is assigned to a variable display pattern that executes a reach effect that does not cause a character corresponding to the character body 150, 152, or 154 to appear.

  For example, when a variation display pattern with a variation number of “5” to “10” for executing a wolf man reach effect is designated, a button notice pattern for driving and controlling the character body 152 imitating Dracula or the character body 150 imitating Franken The button notice pattern with the number “6” or “7” is hardly selected.

  In this case, after any one of the character bodies 150, 152, or 154 based on the button notice pattern is driven and controlled in the button notice effect, it is different from the reach effect in which the character corresponding to the character object 150, 152, or 154 appears. Reach production is executed.

  This causes the player to feel uncomfortable with the mismatch of characters, but by making a big hit after executing the button notice effect, the expectation for the big hit gaming state can be enhanced.

  Also, buttons for updating and displaying the comment contents of “expected degree 10 chi”, “expected degree 30 chi”, “expected degree 50 chi” or “expected degree 80 chi” are the buttons with the notice pattern numbers “8” to “11”. As for the notice pattern, as the button notice pattern number expressing a numerical value having a higher “expected degree”, a larger number of determination values are assigned to the variable display pattern having the higher expected degree of jackpot.

  For example, when the button display pattern with the button notification pattern number “11” is selected, when the variable display pattern with the variable number “6” is designated {(the button notification pattern with the button notification pattern number “11”) (5) / (total number of determination values assigned to all button notice patterns = 198)} × 100 = about 2.5%.

  On the other hand, when the variation display pattern with the variation number “10” is designated, (10/198) × 100 = about 5%.

  As described above, when the button notice pattern having the button notice pattern numbers “8” to “11” is executed, the comment “expectation” is displayed when the operation button 38 is operated a predetermined number of times, and the player It can be used as a measure of the level of expectation of jackpot. In addition, when a comment with a high “expected degree” is displayed, the player can increase the expectation for the big hit gaming state.

  In this embodiment, only when a specific advanced notice (developed notice pattern) is executed, a notice effect such as a comment notice, button notice, intense heat notice or lightning notice is executed, and a specific branch effect notice ( The branch effect presentation notice is executed only when the branch effect notice pattern) is executed.

  On the other hand, a notice effect such as a mini character notice and a sound output change is executed irrespective of these advanced notice or branch effect notice.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a notice effect such as an advanced notice, comment notice, button notice, intense heat notice, lightning notice, branch effect notice or branch effect effect is performed on the variation display pattern of the big hit rather than the outage. easy.

  However, in the notice effect such as the mini character notice or the sound output change, it is configured to be easily executed even for the variation display pattern of the deviation. As described above, in the present embodiment, the ROM 111b of the sub-integrated board 111 stores the variable display pattern and the advanced notice pattern (the development notice pattern number is “18”, “20”, or “21”. A first button notice table, a second button notice table, and a third button notice table as built-in production determination tables provided according to the mold notice pattern).

  FIG. 73 is a list showing button notice patterns determined by the sub integrated board 111 in the button notice process (FIG. 69; S263).

  Button notice patterns with button notice pattern numbers “1” to “4” are displayed in the balloon from the monster-kun, “N ??”, “Ehehehe”, “Huh? What?” ..! ”Is a button notice pattern for performing an effect of updating and displaying any comment content.

  These comment contents are the same as the comment contents displayed by any one of the comment notice pattern with the comment notice pattern number “1”, “2”, “4”, or “6”. Note that the comment content based on the button advance notice pattern is often more useful information to the player (such as a comment content capable of recognizing the jackpot expectation) than the comment content based on the comment advance notice pattern. Thereby, the operation of the operation button 38 can be promoted during the execution of the button notice effect.

  The button notice patterns with the button notice pattern numbers “5” to “7” are button notice patterns that perform an effect of updating and displaying the comment content “!!” on the balloon from the monster.

  The button notice pattern with the button notice pattern number “5” is a button notice pattern that produces an effect of causing the character body 154 imitating a wolf man to appear in front of the display area 42 by drivingly controlling the stepping motor 155.

  The button notice pattern with the button notice pattern number “6” is a button notice pattern that produces an effect of causing the character body 152 imitating a dracula to appear in front of the display area 42 by driving and controlling the stepping motor 153f.

  The button notice pattern with the button notice pattern number “7” is a button notice pattern for performing an effect of driving the stepping motor 150h or 152h to make the character body 150 imitating franken appear in front of the display area 42.

  Button notice patterns with the button notice pattern numbers “8” to “12” are “Expected 10 Kai”, “Expected 30 Kai”, “Expected 50 Kai”, “Expected 80 Kai” ”Or“ Expectation K-Ikaikai ”is a button notice pattern for performing an effect of updating and displaying each comment content.

  The “expectation” is the expectation of jackpot. For example, an expression with a 10% expectation of jackpot is expressed as “expectation 10 Kai” by monster-like wind. In addition, “expected degree kai-kaikai” cannot grasp what percentage of the big hit expectation degree, but in this embodiment, the big hit expectation degree is set to 100%.

  In addition, “expectation” shows an expectation that is different from the actual jackpot expectation. However, by making it easier to select an expression with a higher “expectation” for a variable display pattern with a higher jackpot expectation, It can be used as a measure of expectation level. However, the “expected degree” may display the actual expected degree of jackpot.

  The button notice pattern with the button notice pattern number “13” or “14” is a button notice pattern that performs an effect of updating and displaying the comment contents “Reach!” Or “Big hit!” On the balloon from the monster. It is. These comment contents are the same as the comment contents displayed in the comment notice pattern whose comment notice pattern number is “14” or “15”.

  It is also possible to prepare a button notice pattern that performs an effect of updating and displaying the comment content of “It's probable!” In the balloon from Monster. This comment content is the same as the comment content displayed in the comment notice pattern whose comment notice pattern number is “15”.

  In the present embodiment, the determination value is assigned to the button notice pattern corresponding to the variation display pattern determined on the main control board 101, and the variation display pattern does not include information on whether or not the probability variation big hit. For this reason, it is not possible to select the button notice pattern “probably change!” Corresponding to the variable display pattern.

  However, for example, a variation display pattern that displays a probable variation jackpot and a variation display pattern that displays a non-probability variation jackpot are set in the variation display pattern table, and the judgment value is assigned to the button notice pattern corresponding to these variation display patterns and When the variable display pattern for displaying the big hit is determined, the button notice table may be configured so that the button notice pattern “probable change!” Can be selected.

  In addition, the button notice table may be configured so that the determination value is assigned to the button notice pattern corresponding to the change display pattern and the game state flag (probability change state flag).

  FIG. 75 is a stepping motor scheduler table held in the ROM 111 b of the sub integrated substrate 111.

  The plurality of patterns are composed of a plurality of data in which the driving pulse width, rotation direction, and driving time of the stepping motors 150h, 153f, 152h, or 155 are set as one set. A plurality of data arrays are composed of time-series data strings of data 0, data 1, data 2,..., Data n.

  For example, in the data 0 of the pattern 38, the driving pulse width 4 ms, the rotation direction CW (Clock Wise) and the driving time 40 ms of the stepping motors 150h, 153f, 152h or 155 are set. Data 0 of this pattern 38 is set as the address of the stepping motor scheduler in the 16 ms stepping motor scheduler activation process (FIG. 74; S304).

  Note that data 0 of each pattern corresponds to the start of driving of the stepping motors 150h, 153f, 152h, or 155. Therefore, the first 10 steps, that is, 40 ms (= 4 ms × 10 steps) are slowed up so as not to step out.

(4) Outline of Various Effects FIG. 34 is a conceptual diagram showing the flow of processing of the notice effect and the reach effect. This process is a series of processes performed between the start of the decorative symbol change in the display area 42 and the stop of all the decorative symbols.

  The notice effect and the reach effect are executed by driving and controlling the character or mini character image stored in the ROM 113b mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113.

  The notice effect is an effect for suggesting to the player that there is a possibility of a big hit gaming state. The notice effect is set so that the degree of expectation for the big hit gaming state varies depending on the type of the notice effect to be executed. The jackpot expectation degree is a ratio at which the notice effect is executed when the jackpot is reached / the ratio at which the notice effect is executed when the jackpot is reached or lost.

  Generally, when a big hit gaming state is set, the control is performed so that the proportion of the notice effect is increased. Therefore, the player's expectation can be enhanced by executing the notice effect. In addition, it is possible to grasp the jackpot expectation degree by the type of the notice effect. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation can be further enhanced by executing a notice effect with a high degree of expectation of jackpot.

  In addition, the notice effect of the present embodiment is executed from the time when the decorative symbol variation display is started until the right decorative symbol 80c is stopped and displayed. Thus, the player's expectation can be increased until a reach mode is formed in which the right decorative design 80c is stopped at the same design as the left decorative design 80a.

  Further, when the reach mode is formed, a further expectation can be given. Further, even when the right decorative design 80c is the same as the left decorative design 80a and does not stop, it is possible to increase the player's expectation until the notice effect ends. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the boredom in the idle time until all the symbols of the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  The characters include, for example, a character A (wolf man), a character B (Dracula), a character C (Franken), a character D (Monster-kun), and a character E (Kaiko-chan).

  The mini characters include a mini character A (Hiroshi), a mini character B (Hiroshi elder sister), a mini character C (a trio combining wolf man, Dracula and Franken), and a mini character D (Kai-chan).

  The character image includes, for example, a character image (monster) 70 imitating a human boy, a character image 71 imitating a wolf man, a character image 72 imitating Dracula, a character image 73 imitating Franken, and a human girl. Character image (kaiko-chan) 74 is obtained.

  The mini character image includes, for example, a mini character image 90 representing Hiroshi, a mini character image 91 representing Hiroshi sister, a three character mini character image 92 imitating a wolf man, Dracula and Franken, and a human girl. There are a simulated mini character image (Kyoko-chan) 93, a member imitating the character body 154 (wolf man), a character body 152 (member imitating Dracula), and a character body 150 (member imitating Franken).

  The notice effect is performed by any one or a combination of mini character notice, intense heat notice, advanced notice, comment notice, button notice, blackout effect, lightning flash notice, background change notice and spotlight notice.

  The mini character notice is an effect of causing one of the mini characters A to D to appear on the back of the variable display area of the left decorative design 80a and the right decorative design 80c of the display area 42.

  The intense heat notice is executed as a part of the advanced notice, and any of the characters A to D displayed in the advanced notice is displayed in the normal advance notice. This is an effect that appears in a different color scheme based on white.

  Note that when a wolf man appears with this intense heat notice, the character of the wolf man after the transformation from a human figure to a wolf figure does not appear, instead of changing the color scheme of clothing. In this way, when the intense heat warning is executed as a part of the advanced notice, more attention is paid to the advanced notice where the intense heat notice may be executed than when the advanced notice is executed. be able to.

  Further, the character based on the intense heat notice is controlled so as to appear when the image display of the character determined by the intense heat notice corresponds to the image display of the character determined by the advanced notice. Therefore, even if it is determined to execute the intense heat advance notice, if there is no character corresponding to the image display of the character determined by the advanced advance notice, the character due to the intense heat advance notice is not displayed.

  For example, even when it is determined to display an image of Franken whose clothing color has been changed as a notice of intense heat, if it is determined to drive the character body 150 imitating Franken to appear, or When it is determined to end the advance notice in advance of Franken, Franken whose clothing color scheme has been changed is not displayed as an image.

  The advanced notice is an effect of causing a plurality of types of characters to appear in order so as to be visible in sequence by either one of the image display control of the characters A to D or the drive control of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154. . For example, in the advance notice, characters A to D or character bodies 150, 152, and 154 appear in the order of wolf man → Dracula → franken → monster.

  When a character is displayed by image display control, the character body is not displayed by drive control. Conversely, when a character body is displayed by drive control, the character is not displayed by image display control. For example, when a wolf man is displayed as an image, the character body 154 imitating the wolf man is not displayed by drive control.

  The comment notice is an effect executed as a part or all of the advanced notice, and is an effect of displaying a comment from the character so that the player can recognize it.

  The button notice is an effect executed as an advanced notice, and is an effect of updating and displaying a comment from the character when the operation button 38 is pressed within the valid period. Note that, unlike the button notice, the button notice does not display a plurality of types of characters sequentially by image display control or drive control after the button notice is executed.

  The blackout effect is an effect in which a dark image that darkens the display area 42 is displayed on the display area 42 for a predetermined time. When the blackout effect is not performed, the accessory reach effect may be performed after a predetermined time has elapsed.

  The accessory reach effect is an effect that is not performed when the super reach branch effect is passed, and is an effect that drives and controls the character bodies 150, 152, 154 and the shielding members 164, 166, and 168. This accessory reach production may also be performed when an advanced notice is executed.

  The lightning flash warning is an effect of running a lightning bolt (lightning) on a dark image and causing a stop display of a decorative symbol to emerge due to lightning.

  The background change notice is an effect of changing the background image displayed in the display area 42. The background image includes, for example, a daytime background image 81 and a night background image 82. In the background change notice, for example, an effect of changing the background image from day to night is performed.

  Spotlight notice is a spot on a character (Kyoko-chan) that is displayed only when one of the four types of characters (Wolf Man, Dracula, Franken, and Monster) corresponding to Super Reach development or when a big hit is confirmed It is a directing effect. When the spotlight notice is performed, the normal reach production, the super reach branch production, and the super reach production are not performed, and the super reach development production is performed.

  After these notice effects are executed or when no notice effects are executed, a normal reach effect is performed. When the super reach production is performed after the normal reach production, the super reach branch production is performed first.

  The super reach branching effect is a character image of a wolf man, a character image of Dracula, a character image of Franken, and a character image of a monster in the first and second branching effects from the first to the third branching effects. Alternatively, one of the character images of Phantom-chan is displayed as a portrait 90. Then, in the third branch effect, the effect is a transition to the super reach effect according to the finally displayed character image.

  For example, when the finally displayed character image is a monster, a monster-kun reach development effect is performed. Further, when the finally displayed character image is Phantom-chan, a full rotation reach effect is performed.

  When a super reach branch effect is executed, a branch accessory effect advance notice may be performed as a branch effect. The branch effect presentation notice is an effect that causes the same character body 150, 152 or 154 as the displayed character to appear by drive control when the third branch effect is displayed as an image as part of the branch effect. is there.

  As described above, the branch effect presentation notice is executed as a part of the branch effect notice, so that the player can be more focused on the branch effect notice rather than simply displaying the character image. In addition, it is possible to prevent a player's interest from decreasing.

  Super reach production is performed by wolf man reach production, Dracula reach production and Franken reach production.

  The wolf man reach effect is an effect executed when the character image finally displayed in the super reach branch effect is a wolf man. The Dracula reach effect is an effect that is executed when the character image finally displayed in the super reach branch effect is Dracula. The Franken Reach effect is an effect executed when the character image finally displayed in the Super Reach branch effect is Franken.

  When the character image finally displayed in the super reach branching effect is monster-kun, the monster-kun reach development effect is performed. In addition, when the character image finally displayed in the super reach branching effect is Phantom-chan, a full rotation reach effect is performed. In the super reach branching effect, when the background color of the portrait 90 is red, the big hit symbol is derived in the super reach effect or the process shifts to the super reach development effect.

  In addition, if it is decided to execute the super reach development effect continuously executed from the super reach effect, the wolf man reach development effect, the dramatic reach advance effect, or the franken is continued from the effect executed by the super reach effect. Any one of the reach development effects is performed.

  In the super reach development effect, an image is displayed in the super reach effect and the same character as the character is displayed. In addition, in the super reach development effect, in addition to the effect that the same character as the super reach effect is displayed as an image, there is a case where a monster-kun reach development effect that is an effect executed by the image display control of the monster 70 is performed.

  As a special basic effect mode, a super reach development effect using the character image 74 of Phantom-chan may be performed. In this case, the variation display pattern table is configured so that the variation display pattern can be selected only when the determination result is a big hit.

  The full rotation reach effect is an effect that is not performed in the case of the normal reach effect and the super reach branch effect, and is synchronized so that the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are the same. It is an effect that displays in a variable manner and stops with a big hit symbol. Since the full rotation reach effect is a big hit decision, it is a reach effect performed only when the big hit determination random number becomes a win value in the big hit determination process.

  In addition, when the above-mentioned reach production is executed, the big hit expectation is normal reach production, wolf man reach production, Dracula reach production, Franken Reach production, wolf man reach development production, Dracular reach development production, Franken Reach development production, monster It is set so as to increase in the order of Kunchi Reach Development Production, Reach Production Reach, and Full-Rotation Reach Production. When a reach effect with a high degree of jackpot expectation is executed, the probability that the stop symbol becomes a jackpot symbol as a result of the reach effect increases.

(5) Various Processes (5-1) Main Control Board Process FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the start winning process executed by the main control board 101. This start winning process is executed in cooperation with the CPU 101a of the main control board 101 and the game control program stored in the ROM 101b. The start winning process is periodically executed at a predetermined timing. The predetermined timing is, for example, 4 msec.

  First, the main control board 101 determines whether or not the game ball has won a start winning opening 45 or an electric start winning opening 46 (S1).

  Specifically, the main control board 101 determines whether or not a detection signal from the start port sensor 55 has been received. If it has been received, the main control board 101 determines that it has won, and if it has not received, it has won. Judge that it is not.

  When the main control board 101 obtains a negative result in this determination (S1; NO), it waits until the next processing timing. The next processing timing is 4 msec later.

  On the other hand, when the main control board 101 obtains a positive result in the determination of step S1 (S1; YES), it acquires various random numbers, and the value of the reserved ball number counter temporarily stored in the RAM 101c is previously set. It is determined whether it is less than 4 which is a predetermined upper limit value (S2). The various random numbers are, for example, jackpot determination random numbers, probability variation determination random numbers, reach determination random numbers, and variation display pattern random numbers.

  If the main control board 101 obtains a negative result in this determination (S1; NO), it discards the acquired random number and waits until the next processing timing. The next processing timing is 4 msec later. In step S2, the main control board 101 may first determine whether or not the retained ball number counter is less than the upper limit value 4, and may acquire a random number only when it is less than the upper limit value 4. In this case, the process of discarding the random number can be omitted.

  On the other hand, when the main control board 101 obtains a positive result in the determination at step S2 (S2; YES), the main control board 101 executes a hold storage storing process (S3) and ends the start winning process.

  In the reserved storage storing process, the main control board 101 corresponds to the process of adding 1 to the reserved ball number counter, the process of changing the number of lighting indications of the special figure storage lamp 54, and the acquired random number to the count value of the reserved ball number counter. To store the data in the RAM 101c.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing special symbol processing executed by the main control board 101. This special symbol process is executed in cooperation with the CPU 101a of the main control board 101 and the game control program stored in the ROM 101b. The start winning process is periodically executed at a predetermined timing. The predetermined timing is, for example, 4 msec.

  First, the main control board 101 determines whether or not the reserved ball number counter is 0 (S11). If the main control board 101 obtains a positive result in this determination (S11; YES), the jackpot determination random number is not stored in the RAM 101c, and the condition for variably displaying the special symbol and the decorative symbol is not satisfied. And the process proceeds to step S15.

  On the other hand, when the main control board 101 obtains a negative result in the determination of step S11 (S11; NO), the big hit determination random number is stored in the RAM 101c, and the condition for variably displaying the special symbol and the decorative symbol is set. Judge that it is true. Then, the main control board 101 determines whether or not the variable display can be started (S12).

  When determining whether or not the variable display can be started, for example, the main control board 101 determines that the variable display can be started when it is not the big hit gaming state. Further, the main control board 101 determines that the variable display is possible when the special symbol and the decorative symbol are not in a variable display.

  If the main control board 101 obtains a negative result in the determination of step S12 (S12; NO), it determines that the condition for variably displaying the special symbol and the decorative symbol is not satisfied, and proceeds to step S15. .

  On the other hand, when the main control board 101 obtains a positive result in the determination in step S12 (S12; YES), it determines that the special symbol and the decorative symbol are in a state where the variable display can be started. In this case, the main control board 101 executes a pending storage migration process (S13).

  In the hold memory transfer process, the main control board 101 subtracts 1 from the hold ball number counter, shifts various random numbers stored in the RAM 101c, and determines the jackpot associated with 0 of the hold memory counter after the shift. Various random numbers such as a random number, a probable variation determination random number, a variation display pattern random number, and a reach determination random number are read.

  The RAM 101c has a storage area for starting winning memory, in which various random numbers are stored in association with each of the reserved ball number counters n (n = 1 to 4).

  Next, the main control board 101 executes special symbol variation processing (S14). In this special symbol variation processing, the main control board 101 performs jackpot determination processing and variation display pattern setting processing, which will be described later. Further, the main control board 101 starts the variation control of the special symbol and the decorative symbol based on the variation display pattern determined by the variation display pattern setting processing, and performs a process of setting the variation time in the variation timer.

  Next, the main control board 101 executes special symbol variation processing (S15). In this special symbol variation processing, the main control board 101 monitors the variation time set in the variation timer while the variation display of the special symbol is started by the special symbol display 41, and the variation set in the variation timer. When time passes, the process which stops the change display of a specific symbol and a decoration symbol is performed.

  Next, the main control board 101 executes information output processing (S16). In this information output process, the main control board 101 performs a process of outputting to the special symbol display 41 a drive signal related to the special symbol variation display determined by the special symbol variation process (S14) and the special symbol variation process (S15). Do. Further, the main control board 101 performs a process of transmitting various information and commands relating to the decorative symbol variation display to the sub-integrated board 111.

  Next, the main control board 101 executes a big hit game process (S17). In this jackpot game process, the main control board 101 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON, and when it is in the ON state, starts the control of the jackpot game state. The jackpot flag is set to a value of 1 when ON in the RAM 101c and set to a value of 0 when OFF.

  In the control of the big hit gaming state, the main control board 101 outputs a drive signal to the solenoid 63 and performs a process of controlling the opening / closing plate 62 to be moved forward and the entrance of the big winning opening 60 to be opened. Further, the main control board 101 performs processing for setting the opening time of the special winning opening 60 in the special winning opening release timer. The time set in the opening timer of the special winning opening 60 is, for example, 30 seconds.

  In the control of the big hit gaming state, the main control board 101 monitors the opening time set in the big prize opening timer, and when the opening time set in the big winning opening timer has elapsed or before the opening time has passed, When a number of game balls have won the big prize opening 60, the output of the drive vibration to the solenoid 63 is stopped, the opening / closing plate 62 is raised, and the process of controlling the entrance of the big prize opening 60 is performed. The predetermined number of game balls when the entrance of the special winning opening 60 is closed before the opening time elapses is, for example, ten.

  In the control of the big hit gaming state, the main control board 101 determines whether or not all the rounds have been completed. If not, the main winning board 60 is opened again after a predetermined time has elapsed. A process of controlling to repeat the open / close cycle has been performed. The round setting is, for example, 15 rounds. Moreover, the setting of the predetermined time which passes after closing the entrance of the big prize opening 60 before opening the big prize opening 60 again is 2 seconds, for example.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the big hit determination process executed by the main control board 101. This jackpot determination process is a flowchart showing a detailed process of the special symbol variation process in the special symbol process. This jackpot determination process is executed in cooperation with the CPU 101a of the main control board 101 and the game control program stored in the ROM 101b. The start winning process is periodically executed at a predetermined timing. The predetermined timing is, for example, 4 msec.

  First, the main control board 101 determines whether or not the probability variation state flag is ON (S31). The probability variation state flag is set to a value of 1 when ON in the RAM 101c and set to a value of 0 when OFF.

  When the main control board 101 obtains a positive result in this determination (S31; YES), the main control board 101 selects a probability change big hit determination table (S32). On the other hand, when the main control board 101 obtains a negative result in this determination (S31; NO), the main control board 101 selects a non-probable change time big hit determination table (S33).

  In the probability change big hit determination table, 1640 hit values out of a total of 65536 big hit determination random numbers from 0 to 65535 are set, and the big hit probability is set to about 1/40. On the other hand, in the non-probable change big hit determination table, 164 hit values out of a total of 65536 big hit determination random numbers from 0 to 65535 are set, and the big hit probability is set to approximately 1/400.

  Next, the main control board 101 determines the hit value set by the probability change jackpot determination table selected in step S32 or the non-probability change jackpot determination table selected in step S33, and the jackpot determination random number read in the hold storage transition process in step S13. To determine whether or not the read jackpot random number matches the winning value (S34).

  If the main control board 101 obtains a negative result in this determination (S34; NO), the main control board 101 ends this jackpot determination processing and waits until the next processing timing. The next processing timing is 4 msec later.

  In contrast, when the main control board 101 obtains a positive result in the determination of step S34 (S34; YES), it sets the big hit flag to ON (S35). Then, the main control board 101 determines whether or not the probability variation jackpot is based on the probability variation determination table in which the probability variation jackpot value is set (S36).

  Specifically, the main control board 101 compares the probability variation jackpot value set by the probability variation determination table with the probability variation determination random number read in the hold storage transition processing in step S13, and the read probability variation determination random number is the probability variation big hit. It is determined whether or not it matches the value. In the probability variation determination table, six probability variation jackpot values out of a total of nine probability variation determination random numbers from 0 to 8 are set, and the probability variation entry rate is set to approximately two thirds.

  When the main control board 101 obtains a positive result in the determination at step S36 (S36; YES), it sets the probability variation state flag to ON (S37), and ends this big hit determination process. On the other hand, when the main control board 101 obtains a negative result in the determination of step S36 (S36; NO), it sets the probability variation state flag to OFF (S38), and ends this big hit determination process.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a variable display pattern setting process executed by the main control board 101. This variation display pattern setting process is a flowchart showing a detailed process of the special symbol variation process in the special symbol process. This variable display pattern setting process is executed in cooperation with the CPU 101a of the main control board 101 and the game control program stored in the ROM 101b. The start winning process is periodically executed at a predetermined timing. The predetermined timing is, for example, 4 msec.

  First, the main control board 101 determines whether or not it is a big hit based on the big hit flag (S41). When the main control board 101 obtains an affirmative result in this determination (S41; YES), the main control board 101 selects the big hit hour fluctuation display pattern table in which only the rows marked with ○ in the fluctuation display pattern table are extracted ( S42).

  Next, the main control board 101 determines a variation display pattern based on the variation display pattern random number (S43). Specifically, the main control board 101 displays a fluctuation display in which the winning value set by the big hit hour fluctuation display pattern table selected in step S42 coincides with the fluctuation display pattern random number read in the hold storage transition process in step S13. Determine the pattern.

  On the other hand, when the main control board 101 obtains a negative result in the determination at step S41 (S41; NO), it determines whether the reach determination random number is a reach value (S44). Specifically, the main control board 101 determines whether or not the reach value set in the reach determination table matches the reach determination random number read in the hold storage transition process in step S13. In the reach determination table, two reach values out of a total of 25 reach determination random numbers from 0 to 24 are set, and the reach probability is set to about 1/12.

  If the main control board 101 obtains an affirmative result in this determination (S44; YES), only the lines excluding the fluctuation numbers 1 and 2 are the rows in the fluctuation display pattern table that are marked with “x”. The reach variation display pattern table from which is extracted is selected (S45).

  Then, the main control board 101 determines a variation display pattern in which the reach value set by the selected variation display pattern table at the time of reach matches the variation display pattern random number read in the hold storage transition processing in step S13 (S43). .

  On the other hand, when the main control board 101 obtains a negative result in the determination of step S44 (S44; NO), the main control board 101 is a row in which a winning mark in the variable display pattern table is marked with a variable number 1 and The variation display pattern table at the time of losing which extracted only the second row is selected (S46). When the main control board 101 is not executing the time reduction control, the main control board 101 selects the table of the fluctuation number 1 row from the deviation fluctuation display pattern table, and when the time reduction control is being executed, the deviation fluctuation display pattern is selected. The table of the row of the fluctuation number 2 is selected from the table.

  Then, the main control board 101 determines a variation display pattern in which the outlier value set by the selected outlier variation display pattern table matches the variation display pattern random number read in the hold storage transition processing in step S13 (S43). .

  When determining the variable display pattern in step S43, the main control board 101 determines a variable display pattern including an effect time that substantially matches the variable symbol change time. When the main control board 101 determines the variable display pattern in step S43, a super reach effect, a super reach development effect, or the like is performed.

  The main control board 101 also performs processing for setting the variation time of the special symbol in the variation timer provided in the RAM 101c in step S43. The main control board 101 starts this fluctuation timer when it sends a fluctuation pattern command to the sub-integrated board 111 in the information output process of step S16.

  The main control board 101 outputs a drive signal to the special symbol display 41 when the variation timer times out in the special symbol variation processing of step S15, and controls to stop the special symbol variation display. Then, the main control board 101 outputs a display command for instructing to stop the decorative symbol variation display to the sub-integrated board 111.

  The sub-integrated board 111 that has input a display command for instructing to stop the variation display of decorative symbols from the main control board 101 transmits the input display command to the second electrical control board 113. When the second electrical decoration control board 113 receives a display command, the CPU 113a performs control to stop and display the decorative symbols.

  Next, the main control board 101 sets a variation display pattern command indicating the variation display pattern determined in step S43 (S47).

  Next, the main control board 101 determines whether or not the probability variation state flag is ON (S48). When the main control board 101 obtains a negative result in this determination (S48; NO), it ends this variation display pattern setting process.

  On the other hand, when the main control board 101 obtains a positive result in the determination in step S48 (S48; YES), it sets a probability variation jackpot command indicating that it is a probability variation jackpot (S49), and performs this variation display pattern processing. finish.

  The main control board 101 outputs the variable display pattern command set in step S47 and the probability change jackpot command set in step S49 to the sub-integrated board 111 by the information output process in step S16. At this time, the main control board 101 outputs a drive signal to the special symbol display 41 to display the special symbols in a variable manner.

  In addition, the sub-integrated board 111 that has received the variable display pattern from the main control board 101 executes a symbol setting process in step S102 and a notice selection process in step S103, which will be described later, based on the input variable display pattern command. In addition, the sub-integrated board 111 outputs the variable display pattern command and information indicating the processing results of steps S102 and S103 to the second electrical decoration control board 113.

  The information indicating the change display pattern command and the processing results of steps S102 and S103 include information on the type of the notice effect, the type of the change display pattern, and the stop symbol. CPU113a of the 2nd electrical decoration control board 113 will perform control which carries out the variable display of a decoration symbol, if these information is input.

(5-2) Processing of Sub-Integrated Board FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing reset processing executed by the sub-integrated board 111. This reset process is executed in cooperation with the CPU 111a of the sub-integrated board 111 and various programs stored in the ROM 111b. The reset process is periodically executed at a predetermined timing.

  First, the sub-integrated board 111 performs a process for initializing the CPU 111a of the sub-integrated board 111 and an initial setting for setting a wait timer after reset (step S240). When this initial setting process is being performed, interrupts of other processes are prohibited, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process.

  Next, the sub integrated substrate 111 determines whether or not the value of the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “0” (step S242).

  The 16 ms elapsed flag T is a flag for measuring 16 ms in timer interrupt processing processed every 2 ms. The 16 ms elapsed flag T is set to “1” when 16 ms has elapsed, and is set to “0” when 16 ms has not elapsed.

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in the determination at step S242 (S242; NO), it waits until the value of the 16 ms elapsed flag T becomes “1”.

  In contrast, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in the determination at step S242 (S242; YES), it sets the value of the 16 ms elapsed flag T to “0” (S244) and the value of the 16 ms processing flag P. Is set to "1" (S246).

  The 16 ms processing flag P is a flag that is set to “1” when starting 16 ms steady processing and set to “0” when ending.

  Next, the sub-integrated substrate 111 performs a steady process of 16 ms (S248). In the 16 ms steady process, a command analysis process for analyzing a command from the main control board 101, an effect control process for controlling various effect settings and state transitions based on the command from the main control board 101, and a stepping motor 150h , 153f, 152h and 155, the 16ms stepping motor scheduler activation process for setting the scheduler, the serial output process for transmitting the lighting data to the effect lamps 44a, 44b and the decoration lamp 49, and the steady process of 16ms are performed. Watchdog timer processing to monitor whether or not

  Next, when the 16 ms steady process ends, the sub-integrated board 111 sets the value of the 16 ms processing flag P to “0” (S250). Then, the sub-integrated substrate 111 returns to step S242 again, and repeats the above-described steps S244 to S250 every time 16 ms when the value of the 16 ms elapsed flag T becomes “1”.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the sub-integrated board 111. This timer interrupt process is executed in cooperation with the CPU 111a of the sub-integrated board 111 and various programs stored in the ROM 111b. The timer interrupt process is periodically executed at a predetermined timing.

  First, the sub-integrated board 111 performs 2 ms timer interrupt processing (S260). In this 2 ms timer interruption process, a history creation process for creating original position detection histories of the character body (Franken) 150, the character body (Dracula) 152, the shielding member (Dracula) 166, and the character body (Wolf man) 154, A 2 ms stepping motor scheduler activation process for driving the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f and 155 is performed.

  Next, the sub-integrated board 111 adds “1” to the value of the 2 ms update counter UC (S262). The 2 ms update counter UC is a counter that counts the number of times that timer interrupt processing has been performed. When the value of the 2 ms update counter UC is “1”, this corresponds to a time of 2 ms.

  Next, the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether or not the value of the 2 ms update counter UC is “8” (S264). That is, the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether 16 ms has elapsed.

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S264; NO), it ends this timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in this determination (S264; YES), it sets the value of the 16 ms elapsed flag T to “1” (S266).

  Next, the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether or not the value of the 16 ms processing flag P is “0” (S268). That is, the sub-integrated substrate 111 determines whether or not the steady process in step S248 of the reset process is being performed.

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S268; NO), since the steady process is being performed, the timer interrupt process is terminated. On the other hand, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in this determination (S268; YES), since the steady process is not performed, the timer interrupt process is performed after the work area is backed up (S270). Exit.

  The work area backup is a process of copying information processed in the 16 ms steady process of step S248 of the reset process to a copy area provided on the work area.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing command reception interrupt processing executed by the sub-integrated board 111. This command reception interrupt process is executed in cooperation with the CPU 111a of the sub-integrated board 111 and various programs stored in the ROM 111b. The command reception interrupt process is periodically executed at a predetermined timing.

  First, the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether or not the values of both the WR signal and the SEL signal are “1” (S280). The WR signal is a signal that starts receiving a command from the main control board 101. The SEL signal is a signal for selecting various boards from the main control board 101.

  A command from the main control board 101 is composed of 4 nibbles per packet. One nibble is 4 bits, and 2 nibbles are 8 bits (1 byte). The extraction of 1 nibble data is performed while the value of the WR signal rises from “0” to “1” (up edge), and falls from “1” to “0” (down edge) after a predetermined time elapses. . The time for which the rising is held is, for example, 20 to 50 microseconds (μs). Therefore, a total of four times of data extraction is performed with a command of one packet and four nibbles.

  When transmitting a command transmitted from the main control board 101 to the sub integrated board 111, the SEL signal, the WR signal, and the data (4 bits) are held constant for a predetermined time from the up edge to the down edge of the WR signal. However, if the signal is disturbed due to the influence of noise, the sub-integrated board 111 may not receive the command normally.

  Therefore, when the sub-integrated substrate 111 receives a SEL signal, a WR signal, and data (4 bits) as a noise countermeasure (first time), after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, after 1 μs), the SEL signal, the WR signal, and the data ( 4 bits). The sub-integrated board 111 determines whether the SEL signal, WR signal, and data (4 bits) received for the first time match the SEL signal, WR signal, and data (4 bits) received after a predetermined time has elapsed. Judging.

  If they match, the sub-integrated substrate 111 determines whether or not both the WR signal and the SEL signal are 1 in step S280. On the other hand, if they do not match, the sub-integrated board 111 receives the SEL signal, the WR signal, and the data (4 bits) again after a predetermined time, and receives the SEL signal, the WR signal, and the data (first received) The process is repeated until it matches 4 bits).

  Returning to step S280, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S280; NO), it ends this command reception interrupt process. On the other hand, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in this determination (S280; YES), it performs command reception processing (S282).

  In the command reception process, the sub integrated board 111 performs a process of storing the received 1 nibble command (one of the four divided commands) in a ring buffer provided in the RAM 111c of the sub integrated board 111.

  The ring buffer is a buffer in which the end and the top of the buffer are connected in a ring shape. In the ring buffer, data is sequentially stored from the top of the buffer, and when the data is stored up to the end of the buffer, the data is returned to the top and stored.

  Further, in the command receiving process, the sub integrated board 111 stores the value in the ring buffer, and then adds the value of the buffer write counter by “1”. This buffer write counter is incremented by “1” every time a command reception process is performed. That is, when a command of 1 packet (4 nibbles) is received, the value of the buffer write counter is set to “4”.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing command reception end interrupt processing executed by the sub-integrated board 111. This command reception end interrupt process is executed in cooperation with the CPU 111a of the sub-integrated board 111 and various programs stored in the ROM 111b.

  First, the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether or not the values of both the WR signal and the SEL signal are “0” (S290). When the command output to the sub-integrated board 111 is completed, the main control board 101 sets the value of the WR signal to “0” and then sets the value of the SEL signal to “0” (down edge).

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S290; NO), it ends this command reception end interrupt process. On the other hand, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in this determination (S290; YES), it performs a command reception end process (S292).

  In the command reception end process, the sub integrated substrate 111 performs a process of setting the value of the buffer write counter added in the command reception interrupt process to “0”. If the command can be received normally, the value of the buffer write counter is “4” because one packet and four nibbles are normally received. If one packet cannot be received, the value of the buffer write counter is less than “4”. In this case, the sub integrated substrate 111 performs processing for discarding the received command.

  As described above, the sub-integrated board 111 receives the SEL signal again after a predetermined time (for example, after 1 μs) when the SEL signal is received (first time) as a noise countermeasure as described above. Then, the sub-integrated substrate 111 determines whether or not the SEL signal received for the first time matches the SEL signal received after a predetermined time has elapsed.

  If the sub-integrated boards match, it is determined in step S290 whether the values of the WR signal and the SEL signal are both “0”. On the other hand, if they do not match, the sub-integrated board 111 receives the SEL signal again after a predetermined time, and repeats the process until it matches the SEL signal received for the first time.

  The priorities of the various processes in the sub-integrated board 111 described above are set in the order of command reception interrupt processing, command reception end interrupt processing, timer interrupt processing, and 16 ms steady processing.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an effect control process executed by the sub-integrated board 111. This effect control process is executed in cooperation with the CPU 111a of the sub-integrated board 111 and the effect control program stored in the ROM 111b. This effect control process is executed by a steady process of 16 ms executed in step S248 of the reset process. That is, this effect control process is periodically executed every 2 ms.

  First, when the sub-integrated board 111 receives a display signal including a display command from the main control board 101, the sub-integrated board 111 executes the command reception process in step S282 of the command reception interrupt process, and stores the received display signal in the RAM 111c. In addition, a reception flag indicating that the display signal has been received is set.

  Then, the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether a display signal from the main control board 101 has been received based on the reception flag (S101).

  If the sub-integrated substrate 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S101; NO), it proceeds to step S107. On the other hand, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in this determination (S101; YES), the symbol setting process (S102), the notice selection process (S103), the sound control process (S104), and the lamp control process (S105). ), Symbol variation setting processing (S106), button input processing (S107), symbol variation control processing (S108), jackpot display processing (S109), and sub information output processing (S110) are sequentially executed.

  The sub-integrated board 111 performs the advanced notice selection process, the intense heat notice selection process, the lightning notice selection process, the mini character notice selection process, and the branch effect notice selection process. The sub-integrated board 111 performs a notice selection process for determining whether or not to perform a notice effect based on the notice pattern determined by the notice selection process (S103).

  Next, when executing the notice effect, the sub integrated substrate 111 determines the type of the notice effect to be executed. When the sub-integrated board 111 decides to execute the advanced notice pattern requiring the operation of the operation button 38 by the advanced notice selection process, the sub input board 111 sets the button input waiting time corresponding to the evolved notice pattern to the button input waiting timer. Set and start button input wait timer.

  Next, the sub-integrated board 111 performs a sound control process for selecting the control data of the sound wave device 115 at the timing when the variable display pattern command is received from the main control board 101 (S104). The fluctuation display pattern command is a display command for instructing a fluctuation display pattern.

  Next, the sub-integrated board 111, based on the change display pattern designated by the change display pattern command from the main control board 101 and the notice effect selected in the notice selection process in step s103, the effect lamps 44a and 44b and the decoration lamp 49. Lamp control processing for selecting the control data is performed (S105).

  Next, the sub-integrated board 111 determines the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and the stepping motors 150h, 152h, and 153f based on the change display pattern specified by the change display pattern command received from the main control board 101 and the notice effect selected in the notice selection process in step S103. The control data of 155 is selected, the variation time corresponding to the variation display pattern specified by the variation display pattern command is set in the variation timer, and the symbol variation setting process for starting the variation time timer is performed (S106).

  Next, the sub-integrated board 111 monitors whether or not the button input waiting timer set in the advanced notice selection process of the notice selection process in step S103 has timed out, and the operation signal from the operation button 38 a predetermined number of times before the time out. Is input, button input processing for determining whether to execute the button notice pattern is performed (S107).

  Next, the sub-integrated board 111 executes various processes based on the control data selected in the sound control process in step S104, the lamp control process in step S105, and the symbol fluctuation setting process in step S106, and monitors the set fluctuation timer. The symbol variation control process is performed (S108).

  Specifically, the sub-integrated board 111 outputs drive signals to the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, 155, the effect lamps 44a, 44b, the decoration lamp 49, and the sound wave device 115 at a predetermined timing based on the control data. Monitors whether the set variable timer has timed out.

  The sub-integrated board 111 also includes stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, 155, effect lamps 44a, 44b, which are executed when a display command is received from the main control board 101 for instructing stop of the decorative symbol variation display. The drive control of the decoration lamp 49 and the sound wave device 115 is stopped, and a display command for instructing to stop the decoration symbol variation display is transmitted to the second electrical decoration control board 113.

  The second electrical control board 113 that has received a command to stop the decorative display of the decorative symbol from the sub-integrated board 111 is designated when the sub-integrated board 111 starts the variable display based on the received command. The decorative pattern is stopped and displayed with the selected pattern. The symbol specified when starting the variable display is a stop symbol determined in the symbol setting process (S102) and instructed when starting the variable display.

  In the symbol variation control process, the sub-integrated board 111 also performs the effect control of the notice effect based on the notice effect pattern determined in the notice selection process in step S103.

  Next, when the sub-integrated board 111 receives a command for instructing the start of the big hit gaming state from the main control board 101, the sub integrated board 111 performs a big hit display process for displaying a display indicating the big hit in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 ( S109).

  Further, the sub-integrated board 111 displays the number of rounds and the jackpot symbol in the display area 42 in the jackpot game state in the jackpot display process (S109). Further, when the sub-integrated board 111 receives a command indicating that the game ball has won the grand prize opening 60 from the main control board 101, the sub integrated board 111 won the big prize opening 60 based on the number of detections from the count sensor 64. Display control to display the count number.

  Further, the sub-integrated board 111 determines any one of the character bodies 150, 152, or 154 at the start of the big hit gaming state in the big hit display process (S109). The sub-integrated board 111 controls the drive of the effect lamps 44a and 44b, the decoration lamp 49, and the sound wave device 115 while displaying the number of rounds, and the determined character body with the stepping motors 150h, 152h, and 153f. And 155 perform the drive control.

  Next, the sub-integrated board 111 is determined in the decorative symbol stop symbol determined in the symbol setting process in step S102, the decorative symbol variation display determined in the symbol variation setting process in step S106, and the notice selection process in step S103. Sub-information output processing for transmitting various information related to the display of the notice effect to the first electrical control board 112, the second electrical control board 113, and the waveform control board 114 is performed (S110).

  In the sub-information output process, the sub-integrated board 111 sends a drive signal to the first electrical control board 112 and the waveform control based on the change display pattern from the main control board 101 and the control data selected in the notice selection process (S103). Transmit to the substrate 114. The sub-integrated board 111 performs operation control of the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155, lighting or blinking control of the effect lamps 44a and 44b and the decoration lamp 49, and sound control of the sound wave device 115.

  In the sub-information output process, the sub-integrated board 111 is decorated in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 by transmitting information such as the variable display pattern, the type of notice effect, and the stop pattern to the second electrical control board 113. Starts variable display of symbols.

  Note that the decorative symbol stop symbol is not determined in the symbol setting process (S102), but based on information on whether or not to use the variable display pattern and the probability variation jackpot (specified by the probability variation jackpot command received from the main control board 101). The second lighting control board 113 may be determined.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 executes the process according to the variation display pattern, and the information corresponding to the result of the process is output as the second electrical decoration in the sub-information output process (S110). The display is transmitted to the control board 113, and the CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 controls the display of the variable symbols 80a to 80c on the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116.

  Further, it is a function of the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111, and is determined in the branch effect presentation warning pattern random number and the branch effect presentation notice table in the branch effect notice selection process (FIG. 60: S208 and S209). (In this embodiment, based on whether or not the decision value distributed to the branch role effect preview pattern numbers 1 and 2 matches the branch role effect preview pattern random number) Determine the pattern.

  Then, the sub integrated board 111 outputs the drive signals of the drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 to the first electrical decoration control board 112 in the sub information output process (S110) by using the determined branching effect presentation notice pattern. When a drive signal is input to the illumination control board 112 a predetermined number of times, a drive signal is output to the drive motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 to execute a branch effect presentation notice that is executed together with the branch effect notice.

  When the CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 receives the information of the variable display pattern, the type of the notice effect, and the stop symbol from the sub-integrated board 111, the CPU 113a is executed in the display area 42 corresponding to these information. Process data in which a process of effect display control is selected, and display of decorative symbols and characters is controlled based on the contents described in the process data.

  The process data is stored in the ROM 113b mounted on the second illumination control board 113, and the CPU 113a reads the process data corresponding to the information received from the sub-integrated board 111 from the ROM 113b, and executes processing based on the process data. . The stop symbol information is stored in the RAM 113c, and when the display command instructing the stop display of the decorative symbol change transmitted from the main control board 101 via the sub-integrated board 111 is received, it is stored in the RAM 113c. The control which stops the decoration symbol with the stop symbol which is being executed is executed.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a symbol setting process executed by the sub-integrated board 111. This symbol setting process is a process in the effect control process (S102), and is executed at the timing when the effect control process (S102) is executed. The effect control process is executed by a steady process of 16 ms executed in the reset process (FIG. 35; S248).

  First, the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether or not the display signal from the main control board 101 is a variable display pattern command (S111).

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S111; NO), it ends this symbol setting process. On the other hand, if the sub integrated substrate 111 obtains a positive result in this determination (S111; YES), it is determined whether or not the variation display pattern specified by the received variation display pattern command is a variation display pattern that is a big hit. Judgment is made (S112).

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S112; NO), the left decorative symbol 80a, the middle decorative symbol 80b, and the right decorative symbol 80c are different from each other as the decorative symbol stop symbol in the display area 42. After selecting (S118), the symbol setting process is terminated.

  In contrast, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in the determination in step S112 (S112; YES), it determines whether or not it is a probable big hit based on whether or not a probable big hit command has been received ( S113).

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S113; NO), the left decorative symbol 80a, the middle decorative symbol 80b, and the right decorative symbol 80c become the same symbol as the decorative symbol stop symbol in the display area 42. This non-specific symbol is selected (S117), and this symbol setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in the determination of step S113 (S113; YES), it determines that it is a probable big hit and determines whether or not to perform a re-lottery effect (S114).

  If the sub-integrated substrate 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S114; NO), it proceeds to step S115. In contrast, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in this determination (S144; YES), a non-specific symbol in which the left decorative symbol 80a, the middle decorative symbol 80b, and the right decorative symbol 80c are the same as the temporary stop symbol is displayed. Select (S115).

  Next, the sub-integrated board 111 selects a specific symbol in which the left decorative symbol 80a, the middle decorative symbol 80b, and the right decorative symbol 80c are the same as the decorative symbol stop symbol in the display area 42 (S116), and performs this symbol setting process. finish.

  The re-drawing effect means that after the special symbol variation display on the special symbol display device 41 and the decorative symbol variation display on the display area 42 are started, only the decorative symbol variation display on the display area 42 is temporarily stopped. This is an effect in which the variable display of the decorative symbol in the display area 42 is stopped when the variable symbol is displayed again and the special symbol display on the special symbol indicator 41 is stopped.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a notice selection process executed by the sub-integrated board 111. This notice selection process is a process in the effect control process (FIG. 39; S103), and is executed at the timing when the effect control process is executed. The effect control process is executed by a steady process of 16 ms executed in the reset process (FIG. 35; S248).

  First, the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether or not the display signal from the main control board 101 is a variable display pattern (S211).

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S211; NO), it ends this notice selection process. On the other hand, if the sub integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in this determination (S211; YES), the advanced notice selection process (S212), the intense heat notice selection process (S213), the lightning notice selection process (S214), The mini character notice selection process (S215) and the branch effect notice selection process (S216) are sequentially executed (S212 to S216).

  Next, the sub-integrated board 111 executes these various notice selection processes (S212 to S216), selects various notice patterns, determines whether to perform the notice effect based on the selected various notice patterns, In the case of executing the notice effect, which notice effect is to be executed is determined in the processes after step S217 (S217 to S225).

  The sub-integrated board 111 selects the comment notice pattern only when the comment notice effect is executed as a part of the evolved notice effect in the advanced effect notice selection process (S212). Therefore, the sub-integrated board 111 does not determine whether to execute the comment notice effect based on the comment notice pattern, but when the comment notice pattern is selected, the processing after step S217 is performed based on this comment notice pattern. Run with.

  The sub integrated board 111 also selects the branch effect notice pattern only when the branch effect notice is executed in the branch effect notice selection process (S216). Therefore, the sub integrated substrate 111 does not determine whether to execute the branch effect notice pattern based on the branch effect notice pattern, but when the branch effect notice pattern is selected, based on the branch effect notice pattern, step S217 is performed. Execute in subsequent processing.

  Then, the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether or not to execute the mini character notice effect or the branch effect notice for the mini character notice effect and the branch effect notice regardless of whether other notice effects are executed or not. In this case, it is determined which mini character notice effect or branch effect notice is to be executed (S226 to S231).

  Returning to step S217, the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether or not the advanced notice pattern number of the advanced notice pattern determined in the advanced notice selection process (FIG. 43; S134) is “0” (S217). .

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S217; NO), it sets the advanced notice pattern determined in the advanced notice selection process (FIG. 43; S134) (S218).

  The sub integrated board 111 transmits the advanced notice pattern set here to the second electrical decoration control board 113 in the sub information output process (S110). And the 2nd electrical decoration control board 113 will start an advanced notice effect, if an advanced notice pattern is received.

  In addition, the sub integrated board 111 transmits the advanced notice pattern to the second lighting control board 113 in the sub information output process (S110), and at the same time, the evolved notice pattern causing the character body 150, 152, or 154 to appear. The drive signal is output to the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f or 155 at the start timing of the step (1), and the character body 150, 152 or 154 appears.

  Next, the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether or not the advance notice pattern numbers of the advance notice pattern determined in the advance notice selection process (FIG. 43; S134) are “1” to “17” (S219). .

  If the sub-integrated substrate 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S219; NO), it proceeds to step S221. On the other hand, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in this determination (S219; YES), it sets the comment notice pattern determined in the advanced notice selection process (FIG. 43; S137) (S220).

  The sub integrated board 111 transmits the comment notice pattern set here together with the advanced notice pattern set in step 218 to the second electrical decoration control board 113 in the sub information output process (S110).

  When the second electrical control board 113 receives the comment notice pattern, the comment notice notice effect is given at a predetermined timing of the advanced notice effect (the start timing of step 1 of the evolved notice pattern that displays the balloon from the monster). Control to start.

  In addition, the sub integrated board 111 transmits the advanced notice pattern to the second electrical decoration control board 113 in the sub information output process (S110), and outputs a drive signal to the sound wave device 115 according to the comment notice pattern, thereby providing the comment notice. The comment content based on the pattern is output as voice.

  In the case of the advanced notice pattern number “18”, “20”, or “21”, the button notice pattern for displaying the comment “Press the button!” In the balloon from the monster is already set in step S139. .

  In this case, the sub integrated board 111 transmits to the second electrical decoration control board 113 in the sub information output process (S110) together with the advanced notice pattern set in step S218.

  Upon receiving the button notice pattern, the second electrical control board 113 receives the button notice effect at a predetermined timing of the advanced notice effect (start timing of Step 1 of the evolved notice pattern that displays the balloon from the monster). Control to start.

  Further, the sub integrated board 111 transmits the advanced notice pattern to the second electrical decoration control board 113 in the sub information output process (S110), and outputs a drive signal to the sound wave device 115 in accordance with the button notice pattern, thereby providing the button notice. The comment content based on the pattern ("Press the button!") Is output as a voice.

  In the present embodiment, the sub-integrated board 111 displays the comment contents set in the comment notice pattern of the comment notice pattern numbers “1” to “15” or the button notice pattern of the button notice pattern numbers “1” to “14”. Sound is output as sound information.

  In this way, the sub integrated board 111 determines the comment notice pattern or the button notice pattern by executing the advanced notice selection process (FIG. 43) or the button notice selection process (FIG. 69; S246, S250 and S253). The comment notice pattern or the button notice pattern is transmitted to the second electrical decoration control board 113 and the waveform control board 114 in the sub information output process (S110).

  The second electrical decoration control board 113 controls the display of the comment content in the balloon 78 from the monster in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116. Further, the waveform control board 114 outputs a drive signal to the sound wave device 115 based on the comment notice pattern or the button notice pattern stored in the ROM 114b and outputs a sound.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of modes are modes that appeal to the player's sense of hearing (sound output) and vision (image display), but are not limited to these senses of hearing and vision as long as they appeal to the human senses.

  In the present embodiment, the sub-integrated board 111 executes the advanced notice selection process (FIG. 43) to develop the advanced notice of the advanced notice pattern numbers “1” to “18”, “20”, or “21”. The pattern is determined, and the determined advanced notice pattern is transmitted to the second electrical decoration control board 113 in the sub information output process (S110).

  The second electrical decoration control board 113 controls the display of the balloon 78 from the monster who displays the comment content in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116.

  Returning to step S221, the sub-integrated board 111 then determines whether or not the intense heat notice pattern number of the intense heat notice pattern determined in the intense heat notice selection process (FIG. 49; S142) is “0” (S221). ).

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S221; NO), the balloon or character (steps 1 to 5 of the advanced notice pattern) displayed with the advanced notice pattern and the intense heat notice pattern number are displayed. It is determined whether or not the balloons and characters (steps 1 to 5 of the intense heat notice pattern) determined based on the intense heat notice patterns “1” to “6” match (S222).

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S222; NO), it proceeds to step S226. On the other hand, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in this determination (S222; YES), it sets the intense heat notice pattern determined in the intense heat notice selection process (FIG. 49; S142) (S223).

  The sub integrated board 111 transmits the intense heat notice pattern set in step S223 to the second electrical decoration control board 113 in the sub information output process (S110) together with the advanced notice pattern set in step S218.

  When the second electrical decoration control board 113 receives the intense heat warning pattern, at a predetermined timing of the advanced warning effect that has already been started (the start timing of the step of the advanced warning pattern that causes a matching balloon or character to appear). , Control to start the intense heat notice effect.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, sub integrated substrate 111 determines whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied in step S222. In other words, the sub-integrated board 111 has a predetermined advance notice pattern selected from a plurality of types of balloons and character image display of a monster-kun balloon, a wolf man, Dracula, Franken, and a monster-kun as predetermined matching conditions. It is determined whether or not the balloon or character for image display executed in step 1 matches the balloon or character for image display executed in accordance with the selected intense heat warning pattern.

  Then, when the sub-integrated board 111 is determined to be the advanced notice pattern having the advanced notice pattern numbers “1” to “21”, the sub integrated board 111 is determined to be the intense heat notice pattern having the intense heat notice pattern numbers “1” to “6”. If this is the case and if the step of the advanced notice pattern and the intense heat notice pattern match in step S222, the evolved notice pattern determined in step S218 is set.

  Then, the sub integrated board 111 sets the intense heat warning pattern in step S223, and transmits it to the second electrical decoration control board 113 in the sub information output process (S110).

  The second electrical decoration control board 113 executes the advanced notice effect in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 and controls display of the intense heat notice effect in a part or all of the evolved notice effect.

  In the present embodiment, the sub-integrated board 111 has a balloon or character (steps 1 to 5 of the advanced notice pattern) displayed as an image of the advanced notice pattern in step S222 and the intense heat notice pattern numbers 1 to 6. By determining whether or not the balloon or character (steps 1 to 5 of the intense heat notification pattern) determined from the heat notification pattern matches, it is determined whether or not to execute the intense heat notification effect.

  If the intense heat warning pattern number determined in step S142 is the intense heat warning pattern number “3”, a plurality of steps (steps 1 and 2) are set, which matches the step executed in the advanced warning pattern. The ratio is high.

  In this case, the sub-integrated board 111 executes the intense heat notice effect only in the matching step among the balloons and characters (steps 1 to 5 of the evolved notice pattern) displayed as images by the evolved notice pattern.

  For example, if an advanced notice pattern with the advanced notice pattern number “8” and an intense notice pattern with the intense heat notice pattern number “3” are determined, the evolved notice pattern includes the intense notice pattern. Step 1 is present (the balloon from the monster matches), but step 2 is not present (the character of the wolf man does not match), so only Step 1 of the intense heat warning pattern is executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the rate at which the intense heat announcement effect is executed is set higher in the case of a big hit than in the case where the display result is out of sync.

  For example, the probability that a wolf man with a different figure will appear as an intense heat announcement effect (appearance rate), that is, the probability that an intense heat announcement pattern with an intense heat announcement pattern number of “2” will be executed, will be executed by the wolf man reach development effect In addition, when the variation display pattern of variation number “8” that is a big hit is executed, the intense heat announcement pattern number “2” is executed when the advanced type announcement pattern numbers 2, 4 This is when the 5, 7, 9, 10, 12, 14, 15, and 16 advanced notice patterns are executed.

  Therefore, {(the total number of judgment values assigned to the development type advance notice patterns Nos. 2, 4, 5, 7, 9, 10, 12, 14, 15 and 16 in the day type background use type advance notice table) = 90) / (total number of judgment values assigned to all development type advance notice patterns = 233)} × {(total number of judgment values assigned to the intense heat notice pattern No. 2 14) / ( The total number of judgment values assigned to all the advanced notice patterns = 202)} × 100 = about 2.7%.

  Further, when the wolf man reach development effect is executed and the change display pattern of the change number “7” which is out of place is executed, (104/233) × (2/202) × 100 = about 0.44%. is there.

  Therefore, if a balloon or character that is different from a balloon or character that is displayed as an image in a normal advanced notice effect (an advanced notice effect that does not execute the intense notice effect) appears, the player will be The expectation that the display result is a big hit can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the 1-byte execution area in the RAM 111c of the sub-integrated board 111, the intense heat warning pattern random number is updated within a numerical range of “0” to “201”. In the 1-byte execution area, the upper limit of the numerical range of random numbers that can be updated is 256 (0 to 255), and the determination is simply made that the intense heat announcement pattern random number is assigned to the intense heat announcement pattern for executing the intense heat announcement effect. When the intense heat notification effect is executed when the value matches the value, the lower limit of the probability that the intense heat notification effect is executed is 1/256 × 100 even if the upper numerical value range is used as the intense heat notification pattern random number. = About 0.39%.

  On the other hand, when the intense heat advance notice effect is executed only when the specific advanced notice effect is executed, when the evolved pattern random number is updated in the execution area of 1 byte (the advanced notice pattern random number is 0). Even if a 1-byte execution area is used because it is updated in the numerical range of ˜232, the lower limit of the probability that the intense heat announcement effect is executed is (1/256) × (1/256 ) × 100 = about 0.0015% can be set, and the probability that the intense heat notice effect is executed can be sufficiently reduced.

  Specifically, the probability of the appearance of a monster with a different color scheme of clothing (appearance rate), that is, the probability that the intense heat warning pattern number “6” will be executed as a hot heat warning effect is the wolf man. When the reach development effect is executed and the change display pattern of the change number “8” which is a big hit is executed, (26/233) × (2/202) × 100 = about 0.11%.

  Therefore, the pre-eminent pre-warning notice that is rarely executed while saving the RAM usage area by executing the pre-heat notice effect only when a specific advanced notice effect is executed. Production can be realized.

  In addition, when the intense heat notification effect is executed when the random number of the intense heat notification pattern coincides with the determination value assigned to the intense heat notification pattern for executing the intense heat notification effect, the intense heat notification effect is regularly executed. Since the intense heat warning pattern random number is updated every predetermined time, the timing at which the intense heat warning pattern random number matches the determination value, that is, the timing at which the intense heat warning effect can be executed becomes regular. .

  However, the intense heat advance notice effect is executed only when a specific advanced notice effect is executed. That is, only when the balloon or character displayed as an image in the advanced notice effect matches the balloon or character determined from the intense notice pattern, the intense notice effect is executed as part of the advanced notice effect.

  As a result, the intense heat announcement effect is accidentally executed, and the appearance of speech balloons or characters having different colors is contingent, so that the game does not become monotonous and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Also, instead of setting an intense heat warning pattern (a hot heat warning pattern that causes a balloon or character with a different color scheme to appear) to be executed as a part of the advanced warning effect, it is an advanced type. When the configuration is set so as to be included in the notice pattern, it is necessary to prepare a new evolved notice pattern for each of the evolved notice patterns that can execute the intense heat notice pattern.

  The amount of data to be stored in the ROM 111b of the sub-integrated board 111, which is the storage area for the advanced notice pattern, becomes enormous. However, an intense heat notice pattern is set separately from the evolved notice pattern, and a specific developed notice effect is produced. By executing the intensely hot notice effect only when is executed, it is possible to reduce the data amount of all the notice patterns to be stored in the ROM 111b.

  In addition, an advanced notice pattern in which the advanced notice effect is executed and an intense heat notice pattern in which the intense heat notice effect is executed independently of the advanced notice effect may be set. In this case, even if it is determined that the intense heat advance notice effect is executed, the advanced notice effect is not always executed.

  If the configuration is such that the intense heat warning effect is preferentially executed, the warning effect itself will be changed, and the derivation balance of the advanced warning effect may be impaired, but the specific advanced warning effect is executed. The derivation balance of the advanced notice effect is impaired by setting the intense heat notice pattern in which the intense heat notice effect is executed only when it is performed and causing the intense heat notice effect to be executed as part of the advanced notice effect. There is nothing.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the probability (appearance rate) that a character different from the image displayed in the advanced notice effect as an intense notice effect will appear according to the vertical relationship of monster-kun> franken> dracula> wolf man. Are set differently. That is, as the character's vertical relationship rises, the appearance rate of the character displayed as an intense heat announcement effect is set to be lower.

  For example, when the wolf man reach development effect is executed when the background image is the daytime background image 81 and the change display pattern of the change number “8”, which is a big hit, is executed, the appearance is different as the intense heat notice effect. The appearance rate of the wolf man (probability of executing the intense heat warning pattern Nos. 2 and 3) is (90/233) × (42/202) × 100 = about 8.0%.

  On the other hand, the appearance rate of Dracula with different color schemes of clothes (probability of executing the intense heat warning pattern of the intense heat warning pattern number 4) is (66/233) × (2/202) × 100 = approx. 28%.

  Also, the appearance rate of Franken with different color scheme of clothes (probability of executing the intense heat warning pattern No. 5) is (43/233) × (2/202) × 100 = about 0.18%. Become.

  The appearance rate of monsters with different color schemes (probability of executing the intense heat warning pattern No. 6) is (26/233) × (2/202) × 100 = about 0.11% It becomes.

  The ratio (2/202) for determining each of the intense heat announcement patterns from the intense heat announcement pattern numbers “4” to “6” to each of the intense heat announcement patterns is the same, but as the character's vertical relationship increases. As a result, the rate of determination as an advanced notice pattern in which the corresponding intense heat notice pattern is to be executed is reduced, so that the appearance rate of characters displayed as an intense heat notice effect is lowered.

  Therefore, as the character's vertical relationship rises, the character displayed as an intense heat notice effect rarely appears, and the blissfulness when the character whose character's vertical relationship is high appears Can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the daytime background development notice table and the night background development notice table, the jackpot expectation when the character appearing at each stage is displayed on the display area 42 is displayed. In addition, the determination value is assigned such that the expected degree of jackpot when it appears by controlling the driving of the stepping motor is higher.

  For this reason, when the variable display pattern is determined to be a big hit, the rate of appearance of the character is increased by controlling the driving of the stepping motor as compared with the case where the variable display pattern is determined to be out of sync. Balloons and characters (images 1 to 5 of the advanced notice pattern) displayed by the notice pattern and balloons or characters determined from the intense notice patterns of the intense notice pattern numbers 1 to 6 (step 1 of the intense notice pattern) The rate at which ~ 5) matches is reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the character body corresponding to the night background development type advance notice table by driving and controlling the stepping motor among the advanced type notice patterns that execute the advanced notice effect than the day background developed notice table. The judgment value is assigned so that the ratio of the advanced notice pattern that causes the occurrence of the is increased.

  For this reason, when the background image displayed in the display area 42 is the night background image 82, the ratio of causing the character to appear by displaying the image in the display area 42 is lower than when the background image 81 is the daytime background image 81. A balloon or character (steps 1 to 5 of the advanced notice pattern) displayed as an image by the evolved notice pattern and a balloon or character determined from the intense notice pattern of the intense notice pattern numbers 1 to 4 (precise notice) The rate at which pattern steps 1 to 5) match is reduced.

  Thus, when the background image displayed in the display area 42 is the night background image 82, it is expected to be a big hit by increasing the rate of appearance of the corresponding character body by driving and controlling the stepping motor. When the background image is the daytime background image 81 while the feeling is improved, a big hit is made by increasing the proportion by causing the balloons and characters determined from the intense heat warning pattern numbers “1” to “6” to appear. The expectation that becomes can be improved.

  In addition, when the display pattern is determined to be a big hit, or when the background image is the night background image 82, balloons and characters that are image-displayed as an intense heat announcement effect rarely appear. The bliss when a character appears can be improved.

  Returning to step S217, the sub integrated board 111 determines that the advance notice pattern number of the advance notice pattern determined in the advance notice selection process (FIG. 43; S134) is “0”, and the lightning notice selection process (FIG. 52). It is determined whether or not the lightning notice pattern number of the lightning notice pattern determined in S154) is “0” (S224).

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in this determination (S224; YES), the process proceeds to step S226. On the other hand, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S224; NO), it sets the lightning notice pattern determined in the lightning notice selection process (FIG. 52; S154) (S225).

  The sub integrated board 111 transmits the lightning bolt notice pattern set in step S225 to the second electrical decoration control board 113 in the sub information output process (S110). When the second electrical light control board 113 receives the lightning warning pattern, it performs control to start the lightning warning effect.

  The sub integrated board 111 transmits a lightning warning pattern to the second electrical control board 113 in the sub information output process (S110), and at a predetermined timing (lightning warning notice pattern of lightning warning pattern number “4” or “5”). On the basis of the lightning bolt), a drive signal is output to the effect lamps 44a and 44b, and the effect lamps 44a and 44b are turned on and blinked.

  Next, the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether or not the mini character notice pattern number of the mini character notice pattern determined in the mini character notice selection process (FIG. 56; S194) is “0” (S226).

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in this determination (S226; YES), the process proceeds to step S228. On the other hand, if the sub integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S226; NO), it sets the mini character notice pattern determined in the mini character notice selection process (FIG. 56; S194) (S227).

  The sub integrated board 111 transmits the mini character notice pattern set in step S227 to the second electrical decoration control board 113 in the sub information output process (S110). When receiving the mini character notice pattern, the second electrical decoration control board 113 performs control to start the mini character notice effect.

  Next, the sub integrated substrate 111 determines whether or not the variation number of the variation display pattern command from the main control substrate 101 is “5” to “22” or “35” (S228).

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S228; NO), it ends this notice selection processing. On the other hand, if the sub integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in this determination (S228; YES), it sets the branch effect notice pattern determined in the branch effect notice selection process (FIG. 60; S207) (S229).

  The sub integrated board 111 transmits the branch effect notice pattern set in step S229 to the second electrical decoration control board 113 in the sub information output process (S110). When receiving the branch effect notice pattern, the second electrical decoration control board 113 is controlled to start the branch effect notice.

  Next, the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether or not the branching agent effect notice pattern number of the branching effect effect notice pattern determined in the branch effect notice selection process (FIG. 60; S209) is “0” (S230). .

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in this determination (S230; YES), it ends this notice selection process. On the other hand, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S230; NO), it sets the branch accessory effect notice pattern determined in the branch effect notice selection process (FIG. 60; S209) (S231). ), This notice selection process is terminated.

  Further, the sub integrated board 111 transmits the branch accessory effect notice pattern set in step S231 to the first electrical control board 112 in the sub information output process (S110). In addition, the sub-integrated board 111 is used as a stepping motor at a predetermined timing (the start timing of the third branching effect announcement for causing the character body to appear based on the branching agent effect notice pattern No. 1 or 2). A drive signal is output and a character body appears.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, before the reach form is displayed as the effect form based on the basic effect form, the notice effect (developed notice, comment notice) by the character images 70 to 75, the mini character images 90 to 93, and the like is displayed. Button notice, intense heat notice, lightning notice, mini character notice, etc.).

  In the present embodiment, a series of effects (notice effect and reach effect) from the start of variable display of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c to the stop display can be executed as a combined effect.

  In the present embodiment, display control of character images 70 to 75 and mini character images 90 to 93 can be performed as effect images.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a dependent effect mode that depends on the reach effect (basic effect mode), for example, an advance notice, a comment notice, a button notice, and intense heat, as a notice effect that can lead to a specific reach effect after execution of the notice effect. A notice, a lightning notice, a branch effect notice and a branch role effect, and a specific reach effect that cannot be derived after execution of the notice effect (hard to guide). Can be executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the dependent effect modes are developed by controlling simultaneously with the single effect modes such as the advanced notice, the lightning notice and the branch effect notice, which are not controlled simultaneously, and the single effect aspect. It is composed of built-in effects such as comment notices, button notices, intense heat notices, and branch effect notices that are executed as part of branch effect notices.

  Further, the dependent effect mode is a criterion for determining whether or not another notice effect is to be executed, that is, whether or not the advanced type notice effect as the priority effect mode having a high priority and whether or not the advanced notice is executed. It is comprised from the production | presentation aspect as a non-priority production | generation aspect with a low priority by which it is determined whether an execution aspect is performed based.

  When the advanced notice is executed, the comment notice (built-in effect mode), button notice (built-in effect mode), and intense heat notice (built-in effect mode) executed as a part of the advanced notice are non-priority effects. In the case where the advance notice is not executed, the lightning notice (single effect form) is a non-priority effect form.

  Moreover, in this Embodiment, it has a balloon from a monster-kun, a wolf man, Dracula, Franken, and a monster as a some production | presentation aspect in a priority production | presentation aspect. On the other hand, as a non-priority production mode, a single comment sentence (for example, a comment trailer or a button trailer), a wolf man, Dracula, Franken, or a monster-kun (for example, a spotlight trailer in an intense heat trailer or a lightning trailer) ), And fewer effect modes than the effect modes in the priority effect mode are displayed.

  Further, the sub integrated board 111 executes the advanced notice selection process (FIG. 43) and transmits information corresponding to the result of the notice selection process to the second electrical decoration control board 113 in the sub information output process (S110). The second electrical control board 113 has a development-type notice effect (multi-stage effect) in the order of balloon from the monster → wolf man → dracula → franken → monster monster as a predetermined order in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116. ) Display control.

  Also, in this embodiment, as one of the effects in the multi-stage effect, the monster man, Dracula, Franken, and the image of the monster are controlled as a subsequent effect in response to the balloon from the monster in the advanced notice effect. The comment notice or button notice executed as a part or all of the advanced notice effect is executed as a built-in effect incorporated in the balloon of the monster in the advanced notice effect.

  The sub integrated board 111 executes the advanced notice selection process (FIG. 43) or the button notice selection process (FIG. 69; S246, S250, or S253) to determine the comment notice pattern or the button notice pattern. Then, the sub integrated board 111 transmits the comment notice pattern or the button notice pattern to the second electrical decoration control board 113 in the sub information output process (S110).

  The second electrical decoration control board 113 controls the display of the comment content in the balloon 78 from the monster in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116. In the built-in production mode, display control of the comment content set in the comment notice pattern or the button notice pattern as a comment sentence (for example, the comment contents of “?” If the comment notice pattern number is “1”) is performed. To make the contents visible to the player.

  In addition, the sub-integrated board 111 executes the intense heat notice selection process (FIG. 49) and transmits information corresponding to the result of the notice selection process to the second electrical decoration control board 113 in the sub-information output process (S110).

  The second electrical decoration control board 113 performs display control of the intense heat warning effect as an embedded effect executed as part or all of the advanced warning effect in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116. That is, in the notice selection process, the development pattern, the intense heat notice, the lightning notice and the branch effect notice are determined corresponding to each of the specific production patterns in the production pattern determined in advance by the design setting process, and the specific production pattern is determined. A mini character notice will be selected.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an advanced notice selection process executed by the sub-integrated board 111. This advanced notice selection process is a process in the notice selection process (FIG. 42; S212), and is executed at the timing when the notice selection process is executed. The notice selection process is executed at the timing when the effect control process (FIG. 39; S103) is executed, and the effect control process is executed by a 16 ms steady process executed in the reset process (FIG. 35; S248).

  First, the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether or not the daytime background flag is ON (S131).

  The daytime background flag is a flag that is turned on when the background image in the display area 42 is the daytime background image 81, and is turned off when the background image in the display area 42 is the night background image 82. This is a flag for switching the ON / OFF state of the daytime background flag by the advance notice selection process (S214).

  When the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in the determination of step S131 (S131; YES), it selects the daytime background advanced notice table (FIG. 44) (S132). On the other hand, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in the determination at step S131 (S131; NO), it selects the night-background advanced notice table (FIG. 45) (S133).

  Next, the sub-integrated board 111 acquires the developed advance notice pattern random number and, based on the obtained evolved advance notice pattern random number, obtains one evolved advance notice pattern from the evolved advance notice pattern set in each evolved advance notice table. Determination is made (step S134).

  Next, the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether or not the determined advance notice pattern number is 1 to 17 (S135).

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in this determination, it selects the comment notice table (S136). The sub integrated board 111 acquires a comment notice pattern random number from the selected comment notice table, determines a comment notice pattern (S137), and ends this advanced notice selection process.

  In contrast, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in the determination of step S135 (S135; NO), it determines whether the determined advanced notice pattern number is any one of 18, 20, or 21. (S138).

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S138; NO), it ends this advanced notice selection process. On the other hand, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in this determination (S138; YES), it sets a button notice pattern “Press the button!” (S139).

  Next, the sub-integrated board 111 starts a button input waiting timer (S140), and ends this advanced notice selection processing.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the intense heat notice selection process executed by the sub-integrated board 111. This intense heat notice selection process is a process in the notice selection process (FIG. 42; S213), and is executed at the timing when the notice selection process is executed. The notice selection process is a process in the effect control process (FIG. 39; S103), and the effect control process is executed by a steady process of 16 ms executed in the reset process (FIG. 35; S248).

  First, the sub-integrated board 111 selects the intense heat notice table (FIG. 50) (S141). Next, the sub-integrated board 111 acquires the intense heat notification pattern random number from the selected intense heat notification pattern, and based on the acquired intense heat notification pattern random number, one sub-heated notification pattern is set from the intense heat notification pattern. The intense heat notice pattern is determined (S142), and this intense heat notice selection process is terminated.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing lightning bolt notice selection processing executed by the sub-integrated board 111. This lightning bolt notice selection process is a process in the notice selection process (FIG. 42; S214), and is executed at the timing when the notice selection process is executed. The notice selection process is a process in the effect control process (FIG. 39; S103), and the effect control process is executed by a steady process of 16 ms executed in the reset process (FIG. 35; S248).

  First, the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether or not the daytime background flag is in an ON state (S151).

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in this determination (S151; YES), it selects the daylight background lightning notice table (FIG. 53) (S152). On the other hand, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S151; NO), it selects the night background lightning notice table (FIG. 54) (S153).

  Next, the sub-integrated board 111 acquires a lightning warning pattern random number from the selected lightning warning pattern, and based on the acquired lightning warning pattern random number, one lightning warning pattern is selected from the lightning warning patterns set in each lightning warning table. Is determined (S154).

  Next, the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether the determined lightning warning pattern is a background change of the lightning warning pattern number 3 (S155).

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S155; NO), it ends this lightning notice selection process. In contrast, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in this determination (S155; YES), it switches the ON / OFF state of the daytime background flag (S156) and ends this lightning notice selection process.

  In step S156, the sub integrated substrate 111 is switched to the OFF state if it is in the ON state, and is set to the ON state if it is in the OFF state. The sub integrated substrate 111 stores the ON / OFF state of the daytime background flag in the RAM 113c.

  Further, the sub-integrated board 111 sets a value of “0” as the OFF state of the daytime background flag and sets a value of “1” as the ON state of the daytime background flag. When the sub-integrated board 111 switches the ON / OFF of the daytime background flag in the lightning bolt notice selection process (S156), the second illumination control board 113 displays the daytime background image in the display area 42 based on an instruction from the sub-integrated board 111. 81 or the night background image 82 is controlled to be displayed.

  When the development type advance notice pattern No. 0 is determined as the advanced type advance notice pattern and the lightning notice pattern Nos. 1 to 6 are decided, the notice selection process (FIG. 42; S225) is used. The lightning warning pattern is set, and the set lightning warning pattern is transmitted to the second electrical control board 113 in the sub information output process (FIG. 39; S110). The second electrical decoration control board 113 controls the display of the lightning warning effect in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a mini character notice selection process executed by the sub-integrated board 111. This mini character notice selection process is a process in the notice selection process (FIG. 42; S215), and is executed at the timing when the notice selection process is executed. The notice selection process is a process in the effect control process (FIG. 39; S103), and the effect control process is executed by a steady process of 16 ms executed in the reset process (FIG. 35; S248).

  First, the sub integrated board 111 determines whether or not the comment notice pattern number is “9” (S191). For the comment notice pattern, the comment notice pattern number is determined to be any one of “1” to “15” in the advanced notice selection process (FIG. 43; S137).

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in this determination (S191; YES), it selects the first mini character notice table (FIG. 57) (S192). In contrast, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S191; NO), it selects the second mini character notice table (FIG. 58) (S193).

  Next, the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a mini character notice pattern random number from the selected first or second mini character notice table, and determines one mini character notice pattern based on the obtained mini character notice pattern random number (S194). The mini character notice selection process is terminated.

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a branch effect notice selection process executed by the sub-integrated board 111. This branch effect notice selection process is a process in the notice selection process (FIG. 42; S216), and is executed at the timing when the notice selection process is executed. The notice selection process is a process in the effect control process (FIG. 39; S103), and the effect control process is executed by a steady process of 16 ms executed in the reset process (FIG. 35; S248).

  First, the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether or not the change display pattern command from the main control board 101 is a change number “5” to “22” or “35” (S201).

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S201; NO), it ends this branch effect notice selection processing. On the other hand, if the sub integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in this determination (S201; YES), it is determined whether or not the change display pattern commands from the main control board 101 are the change numbers “5” to “22”. Judgment is made (S202).

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in this determination (S202; YES), it selects the branch effect notice table (FIG. 61) using the first kind branch effect notice pattern (FIG. 62A) (S203). ).

  On the other hand, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S202; NO), the sub-integrated board 111 determines that the change display pattern is a big hit with the change number “35”, and receives the probability change big hit command. It is determined whether or not (S204).

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in this determination (S204; YES), it selects the branch effect notice table (FIG. 61) using the second type branch effect notice pattern (FIG. 62B) (S205). ).

  In contrast, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S204; NO), the branch effect notice table (FIG. 61) using the third type branch effect notice pattern (FIG. 62C) is displayed. Select (S206).

  Next, the sub-integrated board 111 acquires a random number from the branch effect notice table using the first to third kinds of branch effect notice pattern selected in steps S203 to S206, and branches based on the obtained branch effect notice pattern random number. One branch effect notice pattern is determined from the branch effect notice pattern set in the effect notice table (S207).

  Next, the sub-integrated board 111 selects the branching effect presentation notice table (S208). Then, the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a branching effect presentation notice pattern random number from the selected branching effect presentation notice table, and determines a branching effect presentation notice pattern based on the acquired branching effect presentation notice pattern random number. (S209), this branch effect notice selection process is terminated.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing a sound control process executed by the sub-integrated board 111. This sound control process is a process in the effect control process (FIG. 39; S104), and is executed at the timing when the effect control process is executed. The effect control process is executed by a steady process of 16 ms executed in the reset process (FIG. 35; S248).

First, the sub-integrated board 111 performs a sound change determination process (S161).
In the sound change determination process, the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether or not to change the sound output mode output by the sound wave device 115 based on the sound determination table (FIG. 66).

  Next, the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether or not the special sound output flag is set (S162). The special sound output flag is set when it is determined that the sound output mode is changed to the special sound in the sound change determination process (S161), and the sound output mode output from the sound wave device 115 is a special sound. It is a flag to show.

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in this determination (S162; YES), it outputs a signal instructing the sound control data of the special sound to the waveform control board 114 (S163).

  On the other hand, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S162; NO), it determines whether or not the daytime background flag is ON (S164). The background image is changed when the background change notice is executed in the blackout effect, and in step S164, the state of the day / background flag that is turned ON or OFF by the background change notice is determined.

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in the determination of step S164 (S164; NO), it outputs a signal instructing the sound control data of the night background normal sound to the waveform control board 114 (S165). The process ends.

  On the other hand, when the sub integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in the determination at step S164 (S164; YES), the sub integrated board 111 outputs a signal indicating sound control data of the daytime background normal sound to the waveform control board 114 (S166). This sound control process is terminated.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the sound change determination process executed by the sub-integrated board 111. This sound change determination process is a process in the sound control process (FIG. 65; S161), and is executed at the timing when the sound control process is executed. The sound control process is a process in the effect control process (FIG. 39; S104), and the effect control process is executed by a 16 ms steady process executed in the reset process (FIG. 35; S248).

  First, the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether or not the special sound output flag is set (S171).

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in this determination (S172; YES), it sets a selection table for special sound output (S172). On the other hand, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S172; NO), it sets the normal sound output selection table (S173).

  Next, the sub-integrated board 111 reads the sound determination random number stored in the RAM 111b (S174). The sound determination random number is extracted from a counter that updates the sound determination random number when a variable display pattern command is received from the main control board 101, and is stored in the RAM 111b corresponding to the variable display pattern command. That is, the sound determination random number read in step S174 is stored in the RAM 111b corresponding to the variation pattern for starting the variation display next.

  Next, the sub-integrated board 111 selects a different sound determination table based on the type of the variation pattern for starting the next variation display and the sound output mode in the previous variation display (S175 to S181).

  That is, it is determined whether or not the sub-integrated board 11 is a big hit (S175), and if it is a big hit, it is determined whether or not it is a probable big hit (S176). Then, the sub-integrated board 111 selects the probability variation big hit specific table in the case of the probability variation big hit (S178), and selects the non-probability big hit specific table in the case of the normal big hit instead of the probability variation big hit (S177).

  If the sub-integrated board 111 is not a big hit, it is determined whether or not to reach (S179). If the reach is to be reached, a reach time determination table is selected (S180). Is selected (S181).

  After selecting the sound determination table in steps S171 to S181, the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether or not it is a special sound based on the sound determination random number read in step S174 and the selected sound determination table (S182). ).

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in this determination (S182; YES), it determines whether or not the special ON output flag is set (S183).

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in this determination (S183; YES), it ends this sound change determination process. In contrast, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S183; NO), it sets a special sound output flag (S184), and ends this sound change determination process.

  Returning to step S182, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S182; NO), it determines whether or not the special sound output flag is set (S185).

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S185; NO), it ends this sound change determination process. In contrast, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in this determination (S185; YES), it resets the special sound output flag (S186) and ends this sound change determination process.

  With the above processing, it is possible to change the normal sound corresponding to the background image, and the player can more clearly grasp the change of the background image.

  Further, the normal sound of the daytime background or the normal sound of the night background is output from the sound wave device 115 according to the type of the background image, and the sound output mode is changed when it is determined to change the sound output mode in the sound change determination process (FIG. 67). Change to a special sound.

  Therefore, when a special sound is output, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the big hit gaming state by inferring that the player is in some state (particularly, the player is likely to win big hits).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the sound change determination process (FIG. 67) of the sound control process is executed by the sub-integrated board 111, and information corresponding to the result of the sound control process is output as the sub information output process (FIG. 39; S110). Is transmitted to the waveform control board 114.

  The waveform control board 114 outputs a driving signal to the sound wave device 115 based on the special sound data stored in the mounted ROM 114b, and outputs a normal sound of day background, normal sound of night background, or special sound as a sound output effect. Let The change in sound output does not depend on the effect form of the reach effect, but is determined by the sound output form, whether or not the jackpot is determined to be a promiscuous jackpot as a result of the jackpot determination process, and the like.

  In the present embodiment, the sound output mode to be output from the sound wave device 115 is determined by the sub-integrated substrate 111, and the drive signal is output to the sound wave device 115 according to the sound output mode. The ROM 1114b of the waveform control board 114 stores a plurality of types of sound output data. The ROM 111b of the sub-integrated board 111 stores a sound wave for each of the plurality of types of sound output data stored in the ROM 1114b of the waveform control board 114. A signal instructing driving of the device 115 is provided in a one-to-one correspondence.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the variation of the decorative symbols 80a to 80b is started while the reach form is formed and the reach effect is started after the variation display of the decorative symbols 80a to 80b is started in the display region 42 or in the display region 42. A predetermined sound output is executed while the display is stopped and displayed without forming the reach mode after the display is started.

  Further, in the present embodiment, control is performed so that the sound output mode to be output differs according to the background image. The ROM 114b of the waveform control board 114 stores day background normal sound data indicating the day background normal sound corresponding to the day background image 81 and night background normal sound data indicating the night background normal sound corresponding to the night background image 82. Yes. Therefore, the player can more clearly grasp the change of the background image.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, control is performed so as to output a special sound different from these normal sounds (day background normal sound, night background normal sound). The ROM 114b of the waveform control board 114 also stores special sound data indicating special sounds. If the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed with a special sound being output, the probability variation jackpot symbol is controlled to be stopped and displayed, and when the special sound is output, the player's sense of expectation for the probability jackpot is increased. Is.

  In this embodiment, no special sound is provided for each background image. That is, when outputting a special sound, the same special sound is output regardless of the type of background image.

  With this configuration, it is easy for the player to recognize that a special sound is being output, so that a sense of expectation for the probable big hit can be increased when the special sound is output. In addition, you may comprise so that a special sound may differ for every background image. In this case, since the combination of the displayed background image and the output sound output mode is increased, it is possible to diversify the effects to be executed.

  In the present embodiment, the change of the background image and the change of the sound output mode (normal sound) are synchronized, and the output of the special sound different from the normal sound is executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, the player's expectation can be synergistically increased by the background image and the sound output mode.

  For example, in the state in which the display of the night background image 82 is controlled, the player's sense of expectation for the big hit can be enhanced as compared with the case where the normal daytime background image 81 is displayed. Further, in the state where the special sound is output regardless of the type of the background image, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the probable big hit than when the normal sound is output.

  Further, when the night background image 82 is controlled to be displayed and the special sound is output, both the player's expectation for the big hit and the expectation for the probability variation big hit can be enhanced.

  Further, the player's expectation can be increased step by step depending on the type of background image and the sound output mode. For example, (the state in which the daytime background image 81 is displayed and the normal sound is output) <(the state in which the daytime background image 81 is displayed and the special sound is output) ≦ (the night background image 82 is displayed. Controlled and normal sound is output) <(state in which night background image 82 is displayed and special sound is output) In order of player's big hit and probable big hit Can be increased.

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing button input processing executed by the sub-integrated board 111. This button input process is a process in the effect control process (FIG. 39; S107), and is executed at the timing when the effect control process is executed. The effect control process is executed by a steady process of 16 ms executed in the reset process (FIG. 35; S248).

  First, the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether or not the button input waiting timer started in the advanced notice selection process (FIG. 43; S140) has timed out (S241). That is, after the sub-integrated board 111 displays the comment “Press the button!” In the balloon from the monster, it determines whether or not the button input waiting time corresponding to the advanced notice pattern has elapsed.

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S241; NO), it determines whether or not an operation signal from the operation button 38 has been received (S242).

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S241; NO), it ends this button input process. In contrast, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in this determination (S241; YES), after adding the button input number counter by “+1” (S243), the button input number counter is “1”. Whether or not (S244).

  The button input number counter is a counter that is provided in the RAM 111c of the sub-integrated board 111 and stores the number of times an operation signal is input from the operation button 38.

  If the sub-integrated substrate 111 obtains a negative result in the determination at step S244 (S244; NO), the sub-integrated substrate 111 proceeds to step S248. On the other hand, when the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in the determination at step S244 (S244; YES), the advanced notice pattern number of the evolved notice pattern determined by the evolved notice selection process (FIG. 43; S134). Is determined to be “18” (S245).

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in this determination (S245; YES), it executes a button notice selection process (FIG. 69) (S246) and ends this button input process. On the other hand, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S245; NO), it sets a button notice pattern for displaying a comment “Let's hit repeatedly!” On the balloon from the monster (S247). This button input process is terminated.

  The sub-integrated board 111 transmits the button notice pattern of “Let repeatedly!” Set in step S247 to the second illumination control board 113 in the sub-information output process (FIG. 39; S110), and responds to the button notice pattern. The drive signal is output to the sound wave device 115, and the comment content ("Let's hit repeatedly!") Based on the button notice pattern is output as a voice.

  Here, when the advanced notice pattern number is not “18”, the sub-integrated board 111 has a button only when the evolved notice pattern number “18”, “20”, or “21” is selected. An input waiting timer is set (S241; YES). Therefore, the sub-integrated board 111 has received the advanced notice pattern whose evolution notice pattern number is “20” or “21”, and requests the operation button 38 to be operated three times or seven times.

  That is, the sub-integrated board 111 displays the comment “Please press the button!” In the balloon from the monster, and then receives the operation from the operation button 38 and displays the comment “Please hit it continuously!” The player is informed that the operation of the button 38 is necessary.

  Returning to step S244, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S244; NO), it determines whether or not the button input number counter is “3” (S248).

  If the sub-integrated substrate 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S248; NO), it proceeds to step S251. On the other hand, when the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in this determination (S248; YES), it determines whether or not the advanced notice pattern number is “20” (S249).

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S249; NO), it ends this button input process. In contrast, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in this determination (S249; YES), it executes a button notice selection process (FIG. 69) (S250), and ends this button input process.

  Returning to step S248, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S248; NO), it determines whether or not the button input number counter is “7” (S251).

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S251; NO), it ends this button input process. On the other hand, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in this determination (S251; YES), it determines whether or not the advanced notice pattern number is “21” (S252).

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S252; NO), this button input process is terminated. In contrast, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in this determination (S252; YES), it executes button notice selection processing (FIG. 69) (S253) and ends this button input processing.

  FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a button notice selection process executed by the sub-integrated board 111. This button notice selection process is a process in the button input process (FIG. 68; S246, S250, or S253), and is executed at the timing when the button input process is executed. The button input process is a process in the effect control process (FIG. 39; S107), and the effect control process is executed by a 16 ms steady process executed in the reset process (FIG. 35; S248).

  First, the sub-integrated board 111 acquires a button notice pattern random number (S261). Then, the sub-integrated board 111 selects any one of the first button notice table, the second button notice table, and the third button notice table (S262).

  The sub-integrated board 111 selects the first button notice table (FIG. 70) when the advanced notice pattern number is “18”, and selects the second button notice table (FIG. 70) when the evolved notice pattern number is “20”. 71) is selected, and when the advanced notice table number is “21”, the third button notice table (FIG. 72) is selected.

  Next, the sub-integrated board 111 determines one button notice pattern from the button notice pattern set in the button notice table selected in step S262 based on the button notice pattern random number obtained in step S261 (S263).

  In the present embodiment, when the sub integrated board 111 executes the button notice effect based on the developed notice pattern having the developed notice pattern number “18”, “20”, or “21”, the button notice is displayed in step S263. Based on the pattern random number and the determination value set in the first to third button notice tables, one of the button notice patterns having the button notice pattern numbers “1” to “14” is determined.

  Specifically, the sub-integrated board 111 has a button input number counter of a predetermined value (1 if the advanced notice pattern number is 18, 3 if the evolved notice pattern number is 20, and if the evolved notice pattern number is 21. 7), a button notice selection process (FIG. 69) is executed in the button input process (FIG. 68; S246, S250, or S253).

  The sub-integrated board 111 acquires the button warning pattern random number in the button warning selection process (FIG. 69; S261), and uses the acquired button warning pattern random number to set the button warning pattern numbers “1” to “14” in step S263. Determine one of the button notice patterns.

  Next, the sub integrated substrate 111 sets the button notice pattern determined in step S263 (S264), and ends this button notice selection process.

  The sub integrated board 111 transmits the button notice pattern set in step S264 to the second electrical decoration control board 113 in the sub information output process (S110), and outputs a drive signal to the sound wave device 115 according to the button notice pattern. The comment content based on the button notice pattern is output as voice.

  That is, when the advanced notice pattern number is “18”, the comment “Please press the button!” Displayed in the balloon from the monster-kun is operated by operating the operation button 38 once, so that the first comment notice table is displayed. The comment content based on the comment notice pattern selected from is updated and displayed.

  If the advance notice pattern number is “20” or “21”, the comment “Press the button!” Or “Let's hit it!” Appears on the balloon from the monster, and the operation button 38 is operated three or seven times. By doing so, the comment contents based on the comment notice pattern selected from the second comment notice pattern or the third comment notice pattern are updated and displayed.

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing 16 ms stepping motor scheduler activation processing executed by the sub-integrated board 111. This 16 ms stepping motor scheduler activation process is executed by a 16 ms steady process executed in the reset process (FIG. 35; S248).

  First, the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether or not the value of the operation prohibition time of the stepping motor is “0” (S300).

  This stepping motor operation inhibition time is a time set at the time of power-on or reset, and is set to 5.1 s, for example. Within this time, the sub-integrated board 111 detects whether the character body 150 (Franken), the character body 152 (Dracula), the shielding member 166 (Dracula), and the character body 154 (Wolf man) are in their original positions. To do.

  When the sub-integrated substrate 111 is not in the original position, the stepping motor 150h, 153f, 152h or 155 is driven and controlled based on the power-on (reset) stepping motor scheduler to return to the original position (power-on). (Reset) stepping motor initialization process).

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in the determination at step S300 (S300; NO), it ends this 16 ms stepping motor scheduler activation process.

  In contrast, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in the determination in step S300 (S300; YES), it determines that the power-on (reset) stepping motor initialization process has been completed, and character body 150 ( It is determined whether the character body 152 (Dracula), the shielding member 166 (Dracula), and the character body 154 (Wolf man) are in their original positions (S302).

  For example, in the determination of step S302, the sub-integrated board 111 performs character body (Franken) abnormality determination processing, character body (Dracula) abnormality determination processing, shielding member (Dracula) abnormality determination processing, and character body (wolf man) abnormality determination processing. Do it.

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in the determination of step S302 (S302; YES), the stepping motor scheduler corresponding to the fluctuation number of the fluctuation display pattern based on the fluctuation display pattern command from the main control board 101 (FIG. 75) is set (S304).

  This stepping motor scheduler is for operating the character body 150 (Franken), the character body 152 (Dracula), the shielding member 166 (Dracula), and the character body 154 (Wolf man) by the stepping motors 150h, 153f, 152h or 155, respectively. It consists of multiple patterns.

  The plurality of patterns are composed of a plurality of data in which the driving pulse width, rotation direction, and driving time of the stepping motors 150h, 153f, 152h, or 155 are set as one set. This data arrangement is stored in advance in the ROM 111b of the sub-integrated board 111 as a time series data string of data 0, data 1, data 2,..., Data n.

  Next, the sub-integrated board 111 sets the value of the stepping motor operation flag F to “1” (S306), and ends the 16 ms stepping motor scheduler activation process.

  The stepping motor operation flag F is a flag indicating that the address of the stepping motor scheduler has been set. When the address of the stepping motor scheduler is set, the pattern is set and the address is set to “1”. If no pattern is set, the address is set to “0”.

  Returning to step S302, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S302; NO), the character body 150 (Franken), the character body 152 (Dracula), the shielding member 166 (Dracula), the character body 154 ( Since at least one of the wolves is not in the original position, the original position return process is performed (S308), and then the 16 ms stepping motor scheduler activation process is terminated.

  This original position return process is a process for returning the character body 150 (Franken), the character body 152 (Dracula), the shielding member 166 (Dracula), and the character body 154 (Wolf man) to their original positions.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a 2 ms stepping motor scheduler activation process executed by the sub-integrated board 111. The 2 ms stepping motor scheduler activation process is executed by a 16 ms steady process executed in the reset process (FIG. 35; S248).

  First, the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether the power is turned on or reset (S310).

  When the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in this determination (S310; YES), it performs stepping motor scheduler pattern setting processing (S312), sets the stepping motor operation inhibition time to 5.1 s (S314), The 2 ms stepping motor scheduler activation process is terminated.

  The sub-integrated board 111 subtracts the stepping motor operation prohibition time set in step S314 by an internal timer to set the value to “0”.

  On the other hand, the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether or not the value of the stepping motor operation inhibition time is “0” (S316).

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S316; NO), it ends the 2 ms stepping motor scheduler activation process. On the other hand, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in this determination (S316; YES), it performs stepping motor scheduler pattern setting processing (S318), and ends this 2 ms stepping motor scheduler activation processing.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing a stepping motor scheduler pattern setting process executed by the sub-integrated board 111.

  First, the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether or not the value of the stepping motor operation flag F is “1” (S320). That is, the sub integrated substrate 111 determines whether the address of the stepping motor scheduler is set.

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S320; NO), it ends this stepping motor scheduler pattern setting process.

  In contrast, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in this determination (S320; YES), it determines that the address of the stepping motor scheduler is set, and sets the value of the stepping motor operation flag F to “0”. (S324).

  Next, the sub-integrated board 111 sets a stepping motor scheduler pattern (S324) and ends this stepping motor scheduler pattern setting process.

  For the setting of the stepping motor scheduler pattern, the stepping motor scheduler address set in the 16 ms stepping motor scheduler activation process (FIG. 74; S304) is set as the stepping motor scheduler pattern. For example, data 0 (FIG. 75) of pattern 38 is set as the stepping motor scheduler pattern.

  In step S322, the value of the stepping motor operation flag F is set to “0” because the setting of the stepping motor scheduler pattern in step S324 is performed only once.

  The actual progress of the stepping motor scheduler pattern is performed by the 2 ms stepping motor scheduler operation processing (FIG. 78). Next time, the value of the stepping motor operation flag F is “1”, that is, the address of the stepping motor scheduler is newly set. Until this routine is executed, the address of the stepping motor scheduler set in the stepping motor scheduler pattern in step S324. Is stored in the RAM 111 c of the sub-integrated substrate 111.

  FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing a 2 ms stepping motor scheduler operation process executed by the sub-integrated board 111.

  First, the sub integrated substrate 111 determines whether or not the driving time has ended by determining whether or not the elapsed time set in the stepping motor scheduler pattern has elapsed (S330).

  Specifically, the sub-integrated board 111 subtracts the elapsed time 40 ms set in the data 0 (FIG. 75) of the turn 38 by the 2 ms timer batch subtraction process, and then determines whether or not the value becomes “0”. To do.

  When the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S330; NO), it ends this 2 ms stepping motor scheduler operation process. On the other hand, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in this determination (S330; YES), it advances the stepping motor scheduler pattern by one (S332), and ends this 2 ms stepping motor scheduler operation processing.

  For example, the sub-integrated board 111 proceeds from data 0 (FIG. 75) of the pattern 38 to data 1 and ends this 2 ms stepping motor scheduler operation processing.

FIG. 79 is a conceptual diagram showing allocation of first excitation data and second excitation data.
The sub-integrated board 111 performs excitation data creation processing for creating ON / OFF data of excitation signals of the stepping motors 150h, 153f, 152h, or 155.

  Based on the stepping motor scheduler pattern (FIG. 78; S332), the sub-integrated board 111 includes first excitation data (FIG. 79A) as the ON / OFF data of the excitation signals of the stepping motors 150h and 153f, and the stepping motor 152h. The second excitation data (FIG. 79 (b)) is generated as ON / OFF data of the excitation signal 155 and 155.

  The first excitation data and the second excitation data are each 1-byte (8 bits) information, and ON / OFF data of the excitation signal of the driving stepping motor is assigned to the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits, respectively.

  SM1-4, SM1-3, SM1-2, and SM1-1 are assigned to the upper 4 bits D7, D6, D5, and D4 of the first excitation data as excitation signals of the stepping motor 150h, respectively. On the other hand, SM2-4, SM2-3, SM2-2, and SM2-1 are assigned to the lower 4 bits D3, D2, D1, and D0 of the first excitation data as excitation signals of the stepping motor 153f, respectively.

  SM3-4, SM3-3, SM3-2, and SM3-1 are allocated to the upper 4 bits D7 ', D6', D5 ', and D4' of the second excitation data as excitation signals of the stepping motor 152h, respectively. On the other hand, SM4-4, SM4-3, SM4-2, and SM4-1 are assigned to the lower 4 bits D3 ′, D2 ′, D1 ′, and D0 ′ of the second excitation data as excitation signals of the stepping motor 155, respectively. .

  MSB (Most Significant Bit) indicates the most significant bit, which is D7 in the first excitation data in FIG. 79A and D7 ′ in the second excitation data in FIG. 79B. LSB (Least Significant Bit) indicates the least significant bit, which is D0 in the first excitation data in FIG. 79A and D0 ′ in the second excitation data in FIG. 79B.

  FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing an abnormal excitation data clear process executed by the sub-integrated board 111.

  First, the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether the character body 150 (Franken), the character body 152 (Dracula), the shielding member 166 (Dracula), and the character body 154 (Wolf man) are in a normal state (S340).

  For example, the sub-integrated board 111 includes a character body abnormality flag F-MS1 (Franken), a character body abnormality flag F-MS2 (Dracula), and a shielding member abnormality flag F- which are set in the character body abnormality determination process and the shielding member abnormality determination process. Based on the values of MS3 (Dracula) and character body abnormality flag F-MS4 (Wolf man), a determination is made by comparing the normal state value “0” and the abnormal state value “1”.

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in the determination at step S340 (S340; NO), the abnormal excitation data clear process ends. On the other hand, when the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in the determination at step S340 (S340; YES), it clears the first excitation data and the second excitation data (S342), and this abnormal excitation data clear process Exit.

  Specifically, the sub-integrated board 111 determines that the character body abnormality flag F-MS1 (Franken), the character body abnormality flag F-MS2 (Dracula), the shielding member abnormality flag F-MS3 (Dracula), and the like in Step S340. When the values of the character body abnormality flag F-MS4 (wolf man) are all “0” and are in a normal state (S340; YES), the abnormal excitation data clear process is terminated.

  In contrast, the sub-integrated board 111 determines that the character body abnormality flag F-MS1 (Franken), the character body abnormality flag F-MS2 (Dracula), the shielding member abnormality flag F-MS3 (Dracula) or the character is determined in Step S340. When at least one value of the body abnormality flag F-MS4 (wolf man) is “1” and at least one is in an abnormal state, the first excitation data (D0 to D7) shown in FIG. The value of the second excitation data (D0 ′ to D7 ′) shown in FIG. 79 (b) is set to “0” (S342), and the abnormal excitation data clear process is terminated.

  Since the values of the first excitation data and the second excitation data are set to “0” in step S342, the stepping motors 150h, 153f, 152h, and 155 do not rotate. Therefore, the character body 150 (Franken), the character body 152 (Dracula), the shielding member 166 (Dracula), and the character body 154 (Wolf man) do not operate.

  Specifically, when the values of the upper 4 bits D7, D6, D5, and D4 of the first excitation data are set to “0”, each phase coil (φ1 to φ4) of the stepping motor 150 by the drive circuit unit 112j. On the other hand, switching of the excitation current is stopped and the stepping motor 150 does not rotate. Therefore, the character body 150 (Franken) does not operate.

  In addition, the lower 4 bits D3, D2, D1, and D0 of the first excitation data and the upper 4 bits D7 ′, D6 ′, D5 ′, and D4 ′ of the second excitation data are set to “0”. Switching of excitation current to each phase coil (φ1 to φ4) of the stepping motor 153f by the drive circuit unit 112k and each phase coil (φ1 to φ4) of the stepping motor 152h by the drive circuit unit 112m is stopped, and stepping is performed. The motors 153f and 152h do not rotate. Therefore, the character body 152 (Dracula) and the shielding member 166 (Dracula) do not operate.

  Further, when the values of the lower 4 bits D3 ′, D2 ′, D1 ′ and D0 ′ of the second excitation data are set to “0”, each phase coil (φ1 to φ4) of the stepping motor 155 by the drive circuit unit 112n. On the other hand, switching of the excitation current is stopped and the stepping motor 155 does not rotate. Therefore, the character body 154 (wolf man) does not move.

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing excitation data transmission processing executed by the sub-integrated board 111.

  First, the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether or not the value of the transmission permission bit Te is “1” (S360). The transmission permission bit Te has a transmission permission state that permits transmission to the outside and a transmission prohibition state that prohibits transmission to the outside. In the transmission permission state, the value is set to “1”, and transmission is prohibited. In the state, the value is set to “0”.

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S360; NO), it ends this excitation data transmission process. In contrast, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in this determination (S360; YES), it determines whether or not both the value of the transmission buffer empty flag Tb and the value of the transmission register empty flag Tr are “1”. Judgment is made (S362).

  The transmission buffer empty flag Tb is a flag indicating whether or not there is transmission data in the transmission buffer register 111asb. When there is no transmission data in the transmission buffer register 111asb, the value is set to “1”. When there is transmission data in the transmission buffer register 111asb, the value is set to “0”.

  The transmission register empty flag Tr is a flag indicating whether or not there is transmission data being transmitted in the transmission register 111asr. If there is no transmission data being transmitted in the transmission register 111asr, the value is set to “1” as transmission completion. If there is transmission data being transmitted in the transmission register 111asr, the value is set to “0” as transmission in progress.

  When the transmission data of the transmission buffer register 111asb is transferred to the transmission register 111asr, the value of the transmission buffer empty flag Tb rises from “0” to “1” (up edge), and there is no transmission data of the transmission buffer register 111asb. It becomes. At this time, the value of the transmission register empty flag Tr falls from “1” to “0” (down edge), and transmission is in progress.

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in the determination at step S362 (S362; NO), the excitation data transmission process ends. On the other hand, when the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in the determination at step S362 (S362; YES), there is no transmission data in the transmission buffer register 111asb, and there is no transmission data being transmitted in the transmission register 111asr. Therefore, the second excitation data is set in the transmission buffer register 111asb (S364).

  Next, the sub-integrated board 111 transfers the second excitation data of the transmission buffer register 111asb to the transmission register 111asr (S366).

  Next, the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether or not the value of the transmission buffer empty flag Tb is “1” (S368). Specifically, the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether or not the transmission buffer empty flag Tb has risen and all the second excitation data in the transmission buffer register 111asb has been transferred to the transmission register 111asr.

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S368; NO), it waits until the value of the transmission buffer empty flag Tb becomes “1”.

  In contrast, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in this determination (S368; YES), it determines that all the second excitation data of the transmission buffer register 111asb has been transferred to the transmission register 111asr, and the first excitation data Is set in the transmission buffer register 111asb (S370).

  At this time, the sub-integrated board 111 synchronizes the second excitation data transferred to the transmission register 111asr with the transfer clock SM-CLK from the transmission control unit 111asc to the first lighting control board 112 via the level converter 111e. Send.

  Next, the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether or not the value of the transmission register empty flag Tr is “1” (S372). Specifically, the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether or not the transmission register empty flag Tr has risen and the transmission of the second excitation data in the transmission register 111asr has been completed.

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S372; NO), it waits until the value of the transmission register empty flag Tr becomes “1”.

  In contrast, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in this determination (S372; YES), it determines that the transmission of the second excitation data in the transmission register 111asr has been completed, and the first excitation data in the transmission buffer register 111asb. Is transferred to the transmission register 111asr (S374).

  Next, the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether or not the value of the transmission buffer empty flag Tb is “1” (S376).

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in this determination (S376; NO), it waits until the value of the transmission buffer empty flag Tb becomes “1”.

  In contrast, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in this determination (S376; YES), it determines that all the first excitation data in the transmission buffer register 111asb has been transferred to the transmission register 111asr, and transmits this excitation data. The process ends.

  Thereafter, the sub-integrated board 111 transmits the first excitation data to the first electrical decoration control board 112 via the level converter 111e in synchronization with the transfer clock SM-CLK from the transmission control unit 111asc.

  The sub-integrated board 111 transmits the first excitation data and the second excitation data to the first electrical control board 112 in the excitation data transmission process, respectively. ON / OFF data is shifted to the right bit by bit.

  The sub-integrated board 111 sequentially transmits from the ON / OFF data of the excitation signal of the least significant bit (LSB) to the ON / OFF data of the excitation signal of the most significant bit (MSB) to the lamp integrated board 112. Specifically, the sub-integrated board 111 converts the first excitation data shown in FIG. 79A to the first electric power in order of SM2-1, SM2-2,..., SM1-1,. One bit is transmitted to the decoration control board 112.

  The sub-integrated board 111 converts the second excitation data shown in FIG. 79 (b) into the first electrical control board 112 in the order of SM4-1, SM4-2,..., SM3-1,. 1 bit at a time.

  FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the stepping motor process executed by the sub-integrated board 111. This stepping motor process is a process in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36; S260), and is executed at the timing when the timer interrupt process is executed.

  First, the sub-integrated board 111 performs a 2 ms timer batch subtraction process for subtracting the driving time of the stepping motor scheduler pattern by 2 ms (S380).

  For example, the sub-integrated board 111 subtracts the data 0 (FIG. 75) of the pattern 38 every time the 2 ms timer batch subtraction process is performed, such as 38 ms, 36 ms,.

  Next, the sub-integrated board 111 performs a 2 ms stepping motor scheduler activation process (FIG. 77) for setting the address of the stepping motor scheduler that drives the stepping motors 150h, 153f, 152h, or 155 (S382).

  Next, the sub-integrated board 111 performs a 2 ms stepping motor scheduler operation process (FIG. 78) that advances the stepping motor scheduler pattern (S184).

  Next, the sub-integrated substrate 111 initializes the first excitation data and the second excitation data, and performs excitation data initialization processing for setting each value 0 as an initial value (S386).

  Next, the sub-integrated board 111 performs excitation data creation processing (FIG. 79) for creating first excitation data and second excitation data based on the stepping motor scheduler pattern (S388).

  Next, the sub-integrated board 111 includes stepping motors 150h, 153f, 152h when an abnormality occurs in the character body 150 (Franken), the character body 152 (Dracula), the shielding member 166 (Dracula), and the character body 154 (Wolf man) or An excitation data clear process (FIG. 80) at the time of abnormality for setting the ON / OFF data value of the excitation signal 155 to “0” is performed (S190).

  Next, the sub integrated substrate 111 performs excitation data transmission processing (FIGS. 81 and 82) for transmitting excitation data of the stepping motors 150h, 153f, 152h, and 155 (S192).

  The sub-integrated substrate 111 performs drive control of the stepping motors 150h, 153f, 152h, or 155 by transmitting excitation data, and rotates these stepping motors in the CW (Clock Wise) or CCW (Counter Clock Wise) direction. .

  FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the character body abnormality determination process (Franken) executed by the sub-integrated board 111. Part of this character body abnormality determination process (S400 and S402) is a process in the 16 ms steady process of the reset process (FIG. 35; S248), and is executed at the timing when the 16 ms steady process is executed.

  A part of the character body abnormality determination process (S404 to S412) is a process in the 2 ms timer interrupt process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36; S260), and is executed at the timing when the 2 ms timer interrupt process is executed.

  For example, in step S408, which will be described later, the stepping motor 150h is CCWed for 60 steps. Each of these processes is performed each time a variation number of the variation display pattern shown in FIG. 32 (for example, an accessory reach of the variation number 32) is transmitted as a command from the main control substrate 101 to the sub integrated substrate 111.

  First, the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether or not the character body 150 (Franken) is in the original position based on whether or not the reference plate 150m is detected by the photosensor 150n (S400).

  Specifically, the sub-integrated board 111 detects a state where the reference plate 150m is in the recess of the photosensor 150n as a state where the character body 150 (franken) is in the original position. On the other hand, the sub-integrated board 111 detects a state in which the reference plate 150m is not in the recess of the photosensor 150n as a state in which the character body 150 (Franken) is not in the original position.

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in the determination in step S400 (S400; YES), it sets the value of the character body (Franken) abnormality flag F-MS1 to “0” (S402), and this character body abnormality The determination process ends.

  The character body (Franken) abnormality flag F-MS1 is a flag indicating whether or not the reference plate 150m is in a state of being accommodated in the recess of the photosensor 150n. When the reference plate 150m is received in the recess of the photo sensor 150n and the character body 150 (Franken) is in a normal state, the value is set to “0”. Further, when the reference plate 150m is not housed in the recess of the photosensor 150n and the character body (franken) 150 is in an abnormal state, the value is set to “1”.

  Here, the character body 150 (Franken) appears on the front side of the display area 42 when the stepping motor 150 rotates in the CW direction, and moves back to the original position when the stepping motor 150 rotates in the CCW direction. To do. Therefore, when the character body 150 (Franken) is not in the original position, it can be returned to the original position by CCWing the stepping motor 150h (original position return processing (Franken)).

  If the sub-integrated substrate 111 obtains a negative result in the determination at step 400 (S400; NO), it determines that the reference plate 150m is not in the recess of the photosensor 150n, and determines that the reference plate 150m is the photosensor 150n. So that the stepping motor 150h is moved by one step CCW so as to be accommodated in the concave portion (S404).

  Next, the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether or not the edge of the reference plate 150m is detected based on the history that the photo sensor 150n detects the edge of the reference plate 150m (S406).

  Specifically, when the photo sensor 150n continuously detects the edge of the reference plate 150m three times, the sub-integrated board 111 determines that the character body 150 (franken) is in a state of returning to the original position.

  On the other hand, if the photo sensor 150n does not detect the edge of the reference plate 150m three times in succession, the sub-integrated board 111 determines that the character body 150 (Franken) is not returned to the original position.

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in the determination of step S406 (S406; YES), it determines that the character body 150 (Franken) is in a state of returning to the original position, and turns the stepping motor 150h CCW for 60 steps. After rotating in the direction for fine adjustment (S408) and proceeding to step S402, the character body abnormality determination process is terminated.

  In contrast, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in the determination of step S406 (S406; NO), it determines whether or not the stepping motor 150h has rotated N1 steps or more (S410).

  Here, the N1 step is the number of steps when the stepping motor 150h makes one rotation. For example, the N1 step is 483 steps.

  If the sub-integrated substrate 111 obtains a negative result in the determination at step S410 (S410; NO), the sub-integrated substrate 111 proceeds to step S404. In contrast, when the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in the determination of step S410 (S410; YES), it sets the value of the character body (Franken) abnormality flag F-MS1 to “1” (S412), The character body abnormality determination process is terminated.

  In this character body abnormality determination process, the sub-integrated board 111 stops driving the stepping motor 150h as abnormal when the detection signal from the photosensor 150n has not existed for a predetermined time.

  FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing character body abnormality determination processing (Dracula) executed by the sub-integrated board 111. Part of this character body abnormality determination process (S420 and S422) is a process in the 16 ms steady process of the reset process (FIG. 35; S248), and is executed at the timing when the 16 ms steady process is executed.

  A part of the character body abnormality determination process (S4424 to S432) is a process in the 2 ms timer interrupt process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36; S260), and is executed at the timing when the 2 ms timer interrupt process is executed.

  First, the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether or not the character body 152 (Dracula) is in the original position based on whether or not the reference plate 153m is detected by the photosensor 153n (S420).

  Specifically, the sub-integrated board 111 detects the state where the reference plate 153m is in the recess of the photosensor 153n as the state where the character body 152 (Dracula) is in the original position. On the other hand, the sub-integrated board 111 detects a state where the reference plate 153m is not in the recess of the photosensor 153n as a state where the character body 152 (Dracula) is not in the original position.

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in the determination in step S420 (S420; YES), it determines that the reference plate 153m is in the recess of the photosensor 153n, and the character body (Dracula) abnormality flag The value of F-MS2 is set to “0” (S422), and this character body abnormality determination process is terminated.

  The character body (Dracula) abnormality flag F-MS2 is a flag indicating whether or not the reference plate 153m is in a state where it is housed in the recess of the photosensor 153n. When the reference plate 153m is received in the recess of the photosensor 153n and the character body 152 (Dracula) is in a normal state, the value is set to “0”. Further, when the reference plate 153m is not housed in the recess of the photosensor 153n and the character body 152 (Dracula) is in an abnormal state, the value is set to “1”.

  Here, the character body 152 (Dracula) appears on the front side of the display area 42 by rotating the stepping motor 153f once in the CW direction, and moves back to the original position. Therefore, when the character body 152 (Dracula) is not in the original position, it can be returned to the original position by CWing the stepping motor 153f (original position return processing (Dracula)).

  If the sub-integrated substrate 111 obtains a negative result in the determination at step S420 (S420; NO), it determines that the reference plate 153m is not in the recess of the photosensor 153n, and determines that the reference plate 153m is the photosensor 153n. In step S424, the stepping motor 153f is returned by one step CW so as to be accommodated in the recess.

  Next, the sub-integrated substrate 111 determines whether or not the edge of the reference plate 153m is detected based on the history of the photosensor 153n detecting the edge of the reference plate 153m (S426).

  Specifically, when the photo sensor 153n continuously detects the edge of the reference plate 153m three times, the sub-integrated board 111 determines that the character body 152 (Dracula) is in a state of returning to the original position.

  On the other hand, if the photo sensor 153n does not detect the edge of the reference plate 153m three times in succession, the sub-integrated board 111 determines that the character body 152 (Dracula) is not in a state of returning to the original position.

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in the determination of step S426 (S246; YES), it determines that the character body 152 (Dracula) is in a state of returning to the original position, and moves the stepping motor 153f by 78 steps CW. After rotating in the direction for fine adjustment (S428) and proceeding to step S422, the character body abnormality determination process is terminated.

  In contrast, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in the determination at step S426 (S426; NO), it determines whether the stepping motor 153f has rotated N2 steps or more (step S430).

  Here, the N2 step is the number of steps when the stepping motor 153f rotates twice. For example, if the N2 step is 483 steps in one rotation, it is 483 × 2 steps in two rotations.

  If the sub-integrated substrate 111 obtains a negative result in the determination at step S430 (S430; NO), the sub-integrated substrate 111 proceeds to step S424. In contrast, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in the determination at step S430 (S430; YES), it sets the value of the character body (Dracula) abnormality flag F-MS2 to “1” (S432), The character body abnormality determination process is terminated.

  In this character body abnormality determination process, the sub-integrated board 111 stops driving the stepping motor 153f as an abnormality when the detection signal from the photosensor 153n is not present for a predetermined time.

  FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing a shielding member abnormality determination process (dracula) executed by the sub-integrated board 111. Part of this shielding member abnormality determination process (S440 and S442) is a process in the 16 ms steady process of the reset process (FIG. 35; S248), and is executed at the timing when the 16 ms steady process is executed.

  A part of the shielding member abnormality determination process (S444 to S452) is a process in the 2 ms timer interrupt process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36; S260), and is executed at the timing when the 2 ms timer interrupt process is executed.

  First, the sub-integrated substrate 111 determines whether or not the shielding member 166 (Dracula) is in the original position based on whether or not the reference plate 152m is detected by the photosensor 152n (step S440).

  Specifically, the sub-integrated substrate 111 detects the state where the reference plate 152m is in the recess of the photosensor 152n as the state where the shielding member 166 (Dracula) is in the original position. On the other hand, the sub-integrated substrate 111 detects a state where the reference plate 152m is not in the recess of the photosensor 152n as a state where the shielding member 166 (Dracula) is not in the original position.

  If the sub-integrated substrate 111 obtains a positive result in the determination in step S440 (S440; YES), it determines that the reference plate 152m is in the recess of the photosensor 152n, and the shielding member (dracula) abnormality flag. The value of F-MS3 is set to “0” (S442), and this shielding member abnormality determination process is terminated.

  The shielding member (Dracula) abnormality flag F-MS3 is a flag indicating whether or not the reference plate 152m is in a state where it is housed in the recess of the photosensor 152n. When the reference plate 152m is received in the recess of the photosensor 152n and the shielding member 166 (Dracula) is in a normal state, the value is set to “0”. Further, when the reference plate 152m is not housed in the recess of the photosensor 152n and the shielding member 166 (Dracula) is in an abnormal state, the value is set to “1”.

  Here, the shielding member 166 (Dracula) appears on the front side of the display area 42 by rotating the stepping motor 152h once in the CW direction, and operates to return to the original position. Therefore, when the shielding member 166 (Dracula) is not in the original position, it can be returned to the original position by rotating the stepping motor 152h in the CW direction ("original position return processing (Dracula))".

  If the sub-integrated substrate 111 obtains a negative result in the determination at step S440 (S420; NO), the sub-integrated substrate 111 determines that the reference plate 152m is not in the recess of the photosensor 152n, and determines that the reference plate 152m is the photosensor 152n. In step S444, the stepping motor 152h is returned by one step CW so as to fit in the recess.

  Next, the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether or not the edge of the reference plate 152m is detected based on the history of the photosensor 152n detecting the edge of the reference plate 152m (S446).

  Specifically, when the photo sensor 152n detects the edge of the reference plate 152m three times in succession, the sub-integrated substrate 111 determines that the shielding member 166 (Dracula) is in a state of returning to the original position.

  On the other hand, if the photo sensor 152n does not detect the edge of the reference plate 152m three times in succession, the sub-integrated substrate 111 determines that the shielding member 166 (Dracula) is not in a state of returning to the original position.

  If the sub-integrated substrate 111 obtains a positive result in the determination at step S446 (S446; YES), it determines that the shielding member 166 (Dracula) is in a state of returning to the original position, and sets the stepping motor 152h to CW for 27 steps. After rotating in the direction for fine adjustment (S448) and proceeding to step S442, the shielding member abnormality determination process is terminated.

  In contrast, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in the determination at step S446 (S446; NO), it determines whether the stepping motor 152h has rotated N3 steps or more (S450).

  Here, the N3 step is the number of steps when the stepping motor 152h rotates twice. For example, the N3 step is 483 steps for one rotation and 483 × 2 steps for two rotations.

  If the sub-integrated substrate 111 obtains a negative result in the determination at step S450 (S450; NO), the sub-integrated substrate 111 proceeds to step S444. On the other hand, when the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in the determination in step S450 (S450; YES), it sets the value of the shielding member (Dracula) abnormality flag F-MS3 to “1” (S452), This shielding member abnormality determination process is complete | finished.

  Note that, in the shielding member abnormality determination process, the sub-integrated board 111 stops driving the stepping motor 152h as an abnormality when there is no detection signal from the photosensor 152n for a certain period of time.

  FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing character body abnormality determination processing (wolf man) executed by the sub-integrated board 111. Part of the character body abnormality determination process (S460 and S462) is a process in the 16 ms steady process of the reset process (FIG. 35; S248), and is executed at the timing when the 16 ms steady process is executed.

  A part of the character body abnormality determination process (S464 to S472) is a process in the 2 ms timer interrupt process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36; S260), and is executed at the timing when the 2 ms timer interrupt process is executed.

  First, the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether or not the character body 154 (wolf man) is in the original position based on whether or not the reference plate 154m is detected by the photosensor 154n (S460).

  Specifically, the sub-integrated board 111 detects a state in which the reference plate 154m is in the recess of the photosensor 154n as a state in which the character body 154 (wolf man) is in the original position. On the other hand, the sub-integrated board 111 detects a state where the reference plate 154m is not in the recess of the photosensor 154n as a state where the character body 154 (wolf man) is not in the original position.

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in the determination in step S460 (S460; YES), the sub-integrated board 111 determines that the reference plate 154m is in the recess of the photosensor 154n, and the character body (wolf man) abnormality The value of the flag F-MS4 is set to “0” (S462), and this character body abnormality determination process is terminated.

  The character body (wolf man) abnormality flag F-MS4 is a flag that indicates whether or not the reference plate 154m is in the recess of the photosensor 154n. When the reference plate 154m is received in the recess of the photosensor 154n and the character body 154 (wolf man) is in a normal state, the value is set to “0”. Further, when the reference plate 154m is not housed in the recess of the photosensor 154n and the character body 154 (wolf man) is in an abnormal state, the value is set to “1”.

  Here, the character body 154 (wolf man) appears on the front side of the display area 42 and returns to the original position by rotating the stepping motor 155 once in the CW direction. Therefore, when the character body 154 (wolf man) is not in the original position, it can be returned to the original position by CWing the stepping motor 155 (original position return processing (wolf man)).

  If the sub-integrated substrate 111 obtains a negative result in the determination at step S460 (S460; NO), it determines that the reference plate 154m is not in the recess of the photosensor 154n, and determines that the reference plate 154m is the photosensor 154n. So that the stepping motor 155 is moved by one step CW so as to be accommodated in the recess (S464).

  Next, the sub-integrated substrate 111 determines whether or not the edge of the reference plate 154m is detected based on the history that the photosensor 154n detects the edge of the reference plate 154m (S466).

  Specifically, when the photo sensor 154n continuously detects the edge of the reference plate 154m three times, the sub-integrated board 111 determines that the character body 154 (wolf man) is in a state of returning to the original position.

  On the other hand, if the photo sensor 154n does not detect the edge of the reference plate 154m three times in succession, the sub-integrated board 111 determines that the character body 154 (wolf man) is not in a state of returning to the original position.

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in the determination in step S466 (S466; YES), it determines that the character body 154 (wolf man) is returning to the original position and moves the stepping motor 155 by only 46 steps. After rotating in the CW direction for fine adjustment (S468) and proceeding to step S462, the character body abnormality determination process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in the determination at step S466 (S466; NO), it determines whether the stepping motor 155 has rotated N4 steps or more (S470).

  Here, N4 step is the number of steps when the stepping motor 155 rotates twice. For example, the N4 step is 483 steps for one rotation and 483 × 2 steps for two rotations.

  If the sub-integrated substrate 111 obtains a negative result in the determination at step S470 (S470; NO), the sub-integrated substrate 111 proceeds to step S464. In contrast, when the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in the determination at step S470 (S470; YES), it sets the value of the character body (wolf man) abnormality flag F-MS4 to “1” (S472). Then, the character body abnormality determination process is terminated.

  In this character body abnormality determination process, the sub-integrated board 111 stops driving the stepping motor 155 as an abnormality when the detection signal from the photosensor 154n does not exist for a predetermined time.

(6) Timing Chart FIG. 82 is a timing chart at the time of transmission of the first excitation data and the second excitation data transmitted in the excitation data transmission process. The excitation data transmission process is executed by the sub-integrated board 111.

  When the excitation data transmission process is started, the value of the transmission permission bit Te shown in FIG. 82 (b) is set to “1” (FIG. 81; S360).

  When both the value of the transmission buffer empty flag Tb shown in FIG. 82 (c) and the value of the transmission register empty flag Tr shown in FIG. 82 (f) are “1” (FIG. 81; S362, timing T1), the second Excitation data is set in the transmission buffer register 111asb.

  Further, the value of the transmission buffer empty flag Tb falls from “1” to “0”, and is downed (FIG. 81; S364, timing T2).

  Next, the second excitation data of the transmission buffer register 111asb is transferred to the transmission register 111asr (FIG. 81; S366) and waits until the transfer is completed (FIG. 81; S368). When the transfer is completed, the value of the transmission buffer empty flag Tb rises from “0” to “1” and rises up (timing T3).

  In this case, the transfer clock SM-CLK shown in FIG. 82 (d) is generated, the transmission register empty flag Tr is down-edge, and the first bit is sequentially transmitted from LSB (D0 ′) to MSB (D7 ′) of the transmission register 111asr. Two excitation data (FIG. 82 (e); SM-DAT) is transmitted.

  Next, the first excitation data is set in the transmission buffer register 111asb, and the transmission buffer empty flag Tb goes down (FIG. 81; S170, timing T4). Next, the process waits until the transmission of the second excitation data in which the value of the transmission register empty flag Tr is “1” is completed (FIG. 81; S372).

  When the transmission is completed, the transmission register empty flag Tr rises, the first excitation data in the transmission buffer register 111asb is transferred to the transmission register 111asr (FIG. 81S374), and waits until the transfer is completed (FIG. 81; S376).

  When the transfer is completed, the transmission buffer empty flag Tb rises (timing T5). At this time, the transmission register empty flag Tr goes down, and the second excitation data is followed by the first excitation data (FIG. 82 (e); SM−), bit by bit from LSB (D0) to MSB (D7) in the transmission register 111asr. DAT) is transmitted. When transmission is completed, the transmission register empty flag Tr rises.

  The transmission permission bit Te is set to a transmission permission state having a value of “1” before the excitation data transmission process is started. Here, the transmission permission bit Te is set to a transmission prohibited state having a value of “0” (timing T6) during the transfer of the first excitation data, but actually transmission is prohibited after the transmission of the first excitation data is completed. It becomes a state.

  In this embodiment, the transfer clock SM-CLK is set to 250 kHz, one period is 4 μs, and the clock pulse width Tc is 2 μs.

  The transfer speed of the excitation data SM-DAT synchronized with the transfer clock SM-CLK is 250 kbps (Bit Per Second). Since the first excitation data and the second excitation data are each 1-byte information, the total is 2 bytes (16 bits), and the transmission time performed in the excitation data transmission process is 16 bits × 4 μs = 64 μs. .

  As a result, the transmission of the first excitation data and the second excitation data is latched by the latch signal SM-LAT shown in FIG. 82A as one process of the 2 ms timer interrupt process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36; S260). To complete.

  FIG. 83 is a timing chart when receiving the first excitation data and the second excitation data. The excitation data reception process is executed by the serial / parallel converters 112h and 112i of the first electrical control board 112.

  The first excitation data and the second excitation data from the sub-integrated substrate 111 are transferred to the shift register 112is in synchronization with the transfer clock SM-CLK shown in FIG. 83 (b) as excitation data SM-DAT shown in FIG. 83 (c). Shifted.

  For example, the second excitation data passes through the shift register 112hs of the serial / parallel converter 112h of the first electrical control board 112 and is shifted to the shift register 112is of the serial / parallel converter 112i.

  The first excitation data is shifted to the shift register 112hs of the serial / parallel converter 112h. The first excitation data and the second excitation data transmitted to the shift register 112hs and the shift register 112is by being latched by the latch signal SM-LAT (see FIG. 83A) are stored in the storage register 112ht and the storage register 112it. Each at once.

  The transferred first excitation data and second excitation data are output as excitation signals to the drive circuit units 112j, 112k, 112m, and 112n, respectively. Specifically, the second ON / OFF data of the excitation signals SM3-4 to SM3-1 and SM4-4 to SM4-1 shown in FIGS. 83 (m) to (p) and (q) to (t) is used. Excitation data D7 ′ to D4 ′ and D3 ′ to D0 ′ are output to the drive circuit units 112m and 112n, respectively.

  As the ON / OFF data of the excitation signals of SM1-4 to SM1-1 and SM2-4 to SM2-1 shown in FIGS. 83 (d) to (g) and (h) to (k), D7 of the first excitation data is used. D4 and D3 to D0 are output to the drive circuit units 112j and 112k, respectively.

  In accordance with this excitation signal, drive control of the stepping motors 150h, 153f, 152h and 155 is performed by the drive circuit units 112j, 112k, 112m and 112n, respectively, resulting in rotational movement of CW or CCW.

  Here, the excitation signal ON / OFF data D0 to D7 and D0 ′ to D7 ′ indicated by the wavy lines in FIGS. 83D to 83T were latched by the latch signal SM-LAT last time (2 ms before). The excitation signal ON / OFF data D0 to D7 and D0 ′ to D7 ′ indicated by solid lines are latched this time.

  The latch signal SM-LAT is set to 3 μs, which is larger than the clock pulse width Tc, as the latch signal width in this embodiment, and when the value of the latch signal SM-LAT rises from “0” to “1”, that is, The first excitation data and the second excitation data transmitted to the shift register 112hs and the shift register 112is at the time of up-edge are respectively transferred to the storage register 112ht and the storage register 112it at a time.

(7) Screen Configuration FIG. 33 shows decorative symbols that are variably displayed in the display area 42. The decorative design is a design including 10 types of numbers from “0” to “9”. The decorative symbol is composed of a specific symbol and a non-specific symbol. The specific symbol is a probability variation jackpot symbol, and the non-specific symbol is a normal symbol.

  The specific symbols are “1”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”, “7” and “9” as shown in FIG. The non-specific symbols are “0”, “2”, and “8” as shown in FIG. These decorative designs are stored in the ROM 113 of the second electrical control board 113.

  In the present embodiment, the probability variation entry rate is two thirds, but the ratio of the specific symbols in the decorative symbols is seven tenths. Therefore, the probability variation entry rate and the ratio of the specific symbol in the decorative symbol are not associated one-to-one.

  Thus, by displaying the decorative symbol displayed in the display area 42 at a higher ratio of the specific symbol than the probability variation rush rate, it is possible to make it appear as if the probability variation rush rate is higher than the actual probability variation rush rate. Therefore, it is possible to improve a sense of expectation that is a promising big hit for the player.

  The specific symbol is colored in red, and the non-specific symbol is colored in blue. In this way, by arranging the specific symbols and the non-specific symbols differently, the player can easily identify the specific symbols and the non-specific symbols.

  Moreover, the form of a decorative design is comprised in the aspect with thickness so that various numbers can be visually recognized three-dimensionally. As shown in FIG. 33 (C), the decorative pattern 80 is a wall thickness that two-dimensionally displays the depth of the array identification section 121 and the array identification section 121 indicating the shape of numbers as the array identification information that can be identified in the order of arrangement. A depth display unit 122 serving as a part is provided.

  And in the array identification part 121 (inside of the numbers) in the decorative pattern 80, “Wolf man”, “Dracula”, “Franken”, “Monster-kun”, “Kai-chan” or “Moon and bat” Any character 123 is depicted.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33A, the “1” decorative symbol 80 has “wolf man”, the “3” decorative symbol 80 has “Franken”, and the “4” decorative symbol 80 has. “Moon and Bats”, “5” decorative symbol 80 is “Dracula”, “6” decorative symbol 80 is “Moon and Bat”, and “7” decorative symbol 80 is “Monster-kun”, “9” "Decoy" is depicted in the decorative pattern 80 of "". As shown in FIG. 33B, “moon and bat” are depicted in the decorative symbols 80 of “0”, “2”, and “8”.

  In addition, a background image 124 as a decorative pattern for decorating the depth display section 122 is depicted on the depth display section 122 (number side surface section) of the decorative pattern 80. In the background image 124, the design of “monster house and bat” is depicted in common in all the decorative symbols 80 of “0”, “1”, “2”,.

  The display colors of the various characters 123 and the background image 124 are controlled to be the same color as that of the decorative pattern 80. For example, in the case of a specific symbol, various characters 123 and background images 124 are colored in red using gradation based on the red color of the specific symbol. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the recognition of the numbers (array identification unit 121) in the decorative design 80 from being disturbed.

  In addition, the array identifying unit 121 has a larger occupied area on the display form in the decorative design 80 than the depth display unit 122. In other words, the display surface of the numerical part constituting the decorative design 80 becomes larger than the display surface of the thick part. For this reason, in the visibility of the decorative design 80, the thick part (depth display part 122) can be prevented from obstructing the recognition of the numerical part (array identification part 121).

  The array identification unit 121 is not limited to the shape of a number, and may be any shape as long as it indicates the shape of the array identification information. The sequence identification information here refers to information that is composed of a plurality of types of identification information and that can generally identify the sequence order. Specifically, numbers such as “0, 1, 2,...” And “1, 2, 3, ...”, “a, b, c,...” And “A, B, C,. ", Etc.", and information that can identify the sequence of kana characters such as "a, i, u, ..." and "a, i, u, ...".

  FIG. 89 is a screen configuration diagram at the time of presentation executed in the display area 42 by the liquid crystal display 116. In the display area 42, the decorative symbol based on the variation display pattern in which the variation number is “1”, which is the outlier value of the big hit determination random number in the jackpot determination process and is not accompanied by the reach mode, is variably displayed.

  First, the sub-integrated board 111 receives information on stop symbols selected so that the left decorative design 80a, the middle decorative design 80b, and the right decorative design 80c are different from each other, and the variable display pattern. 113.

  When the second electrical decoration control board 113 receives the stop symbol information and the variation display pattern from the sub-integrated substrate 111, the process of effect display control is described based on the received stop symbol information and the variation display pattern. Process data is selected. And the 2nd electrical decoration control board 113 starts control of a decoration design based on the content described in the process data.

  The left decorative design 80a and the right decorative design 80c start changing display by the control of the decorative design started by the second electrical control board 113 (FIG. 89A).

  At this time, the left decorative design 80a and the right decorative design 80c change at high speed from the upper side to the lower side of the display area 42. The left decorative design 80a and the right decorative design 80c are translucent display modes in which the daytime background image 81 is visible. The decorative pattern 80b in the middle is variably displayed in an opaque display mode instead of a translucent display mode.

  Based on the process data, the second electrical decoration control board 113 stops and displays the left decorative design 80a of the left decorative design 80a and the right decorative design 80c after a predetermined time has elapsed. At this time, the left decorative pattern 80a gradually changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation display, and is changed from translucent to an opaque display mode in which the daytime background image 81 is not visible (FIG. 89B). .

  Then, the left decorative design 80a is stopped and displayed with the finally specified stop design. Here, the left decorative design 80a is stopped and displayed with a stop design of “7” (FIG. 89C).

  Similarly, the right decorative design 80c gradually changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation display, and changes from semi-transparent to an opaque display mode in which the daytime background image 81 is not visible.

  Then, the right decorative design 80c is stopped and displayed with the finally specified stop design. Here, the right decorative design 80c is stopped and displayed with a stop design of “6” (FIG. 89 (D)).

  FIG. 90 is a screen configuration diagram at the time of presentation executed in the display area 42 by the liquid crystal display 116. In the display area 42, an advanced notice effect with the advanced notice pattern number “12” and a comment notice effect with the comment notice pattern number “14” are displayed.

  When the sub-integrated board 111 executes the advanced notice effect with the advanced notice pattern number “12” and the comment notice effect with the comment notice pattern number “14”, the sub-integrated board 111 has the variable display pattern and the developed notice pattern number “12”. Based on the comment notice pattern number “14”, the control data of the effect lamps 44a and 44b, the decoration lamp 49, and the sound wave device 115 are selected. In addition, the sub-integrated board 111 transmits information on the variable display pattern, the advanced notice pattern number 12, the comment notice pattern number 14, and the stop symbol to the second electrical decoration control board 113.

  Further, the sub integrated substrate 111 starts a timer set in the control data. This timer synchronizes with the image display control executed based on the process data selected on the second electrical control board 113, and controls the driving of the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, 155, and the effect lamps 44a, 44b. The lighting control of the decoration lamp 49 and the sound control of the sound wave device 115 are performed.

  When the second electrical control board 113 receives various information from the sub-integrated board 111, based on the received various information, the second display control board 113 changes the variable display pattern, the advanced notice pattern number “12”, and the comment notice pattern number “14”. Process data in which the process of the corresponding presentation display control is described is selected.

  And the 2nd electrical decoration control board 113 starts control of the image display of a decoration symbol and a character based on the content described in the process data. That is, the 2nd electrical decoration control board 113 starts the fluctuation | variation display of the decoration symbols 80a-80c based on the selected process data (FIG. 90 (A)).

  And the 2nd electrical decoration control board 113 carries out display control of the balloon 78 from monster-kun on the display area 42 based on process data (FIG. 90 (B)).

  Note that step 1 in the first stage is a state in which only the character image (monster) 70 imitating a human boy is displayed on the display area 42, and the balloon 78 from the monster is displayed and controlled (FIG. 90C). It is a state. This is a state developed from the 0 stage where only the character image (monster) 70 imitating a human boy is displayed and controlled to the 1 stage where the balloon 78 from the monster is displayed and controlled.

  Note that a comment sentence 77 “Big hit!” Is displayed and controlled in the balloon 78 from the monster-kun whose display is controlled in the display area 42. Further, in synchronization with the display control of the comment content, the sonic device 115 performs voice control and outputs the comment content (“Big hit!”) As a voice. In this way, the comment notice effect is executed as a part of the advanced notice effect (step 1 in one step).

  As shown in FIG. 90B, the balloon 78 from the monster is composed of an area ratio of about 40% with respect to the display area 42 (50% vertically and 80% horizontally). The outlet is directed toward the mouth of a character image (monster) 70 that imitates a human boy.

  The content of the comment “Big hit!” Is displayed and controlled in a speech balloon 78 from the monster, and it is possible to give an impression as if the monster is talking to the player.

  The balloon 78 from the monster is based on white, and the comment content that is display-controlled inside the balloon is configured to be surrounded by black characters with black characters, thereby making the comment content stand out. be able to.

  Furthermore, the character string of the comment content is displayed in a balloon with a limit of 10 characters per line in the left-right direction, and the number of characters larger than that is displayed over two lines, thereby allowing the player to The character of the comment content can be clearly recognized.

  Then, the character image 71 imitating a wolf man is displayed on the display area 42 (FIG. 90C).

  Step 1 in the first stage is a diagram in which a character image 71 imitating a wolf man is displayed and controlled from a state where only a character image (monster) 70 imitating a human boy is displayed in the display area 42. This is the state of 90 (C).

  Further, the stage is developed from the 0 stage in which only the character image (monster) 70 imitating a human boy is displayed and controlled to the 1 stage in which the character image 71 imitating a wolf man is displayed and controlled. .

  After the character image 71 imitating the wolf man is controlled in FIG. 90C, the character image 72 imitating the dracula is displayed in the display area 42 after a predetermined period of time (FIG. 90D).

  This state is step 2 in two stages, and the stage is developed from one stage in which the character image 71 imitating the wolf man is controlled to two stages in which the character image 72 imitating the dracula is controlled in display. is there.

  90C and 90D, all the mini character images 90 to 93 are controlled to be displayed in the display area 42 based on the mini character notice pattern whose mini character notice pattern number is “11”.

  In this case, the two types of notice effects are simultaneously executed so that the character images 70 to 74 are displayed by the advanced notice effect and the mini character images 90 to 93 are displayed in the display area 42 by the mini character notice effect. The

  Therefore, the notice effect is more lively than the case where only one of the advanced notice effect and the mini character notice effect is executed, and the game does not become monotonous for the player, thereby suppressing the decrease in the interest of the game. it can.

  Note that the mini-character notice effect can be executed simultaneously with the advanced notice and lightning notice effect in which the character body 150, 152, or 154 appears, similarly to the developed notice effect that displays the character images 70 to 74.

  Here, the mini character images 90 to 93 are displayed on the back of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c, while the character image 71 imitating a wolf man and the character image 72 imitating a dracula are displayed on the front of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c. The

  Therefore, a character image 71 imitating a wolf man and a character image 72 imitating a dracula are displayed in front of the mini character images 90-93.

  For example, a mini character image 90 representing a Hiroshi is displayed in FIG. 90C, but a character image 72 simulating a Dracula is displayed in FIG. A part of the variable display of the left decorative design 80a becomes invisible.

  Therefore, the player is given priority to the advanced notice effect in which the character images 70 to 74 are displayed rather than the mini character notice effect in which the mini character images 90 to 93 are displayed and the variable display of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c. Can do.

  After the character image 72 simulating Dracula is displayed and controlled in FIG. 90D, the character image 73 simulating Franken is displayed and controlled in the display area 42 after a predetermined period of time (FIG. 90E).

  This state is step 3 in three stages, and the stage is developed from two stages in which the character image 72 imitating Dracula is displayed and controlled to three stages in which the character image 73 imitating Franken is displayed and controlled. is there.

  After the character image 73 imitating Franken is displayed and controlled in FIG. 90E, a character image (monster) 70 imitating a human boy is displayed and controlled in the display area 42 after a predetermined period of time (FIG. 90 (E)). F)).

  This state is step 4 in four stages, from the three stages in which the character image 73 imitating Franken is displayed and controlled to the four stages in which the character image (monster) 70 imitating a human boy is displayed and controlled. Is a developed state.

  In the present embodiment, the character images 71 to 73 whose display is controlled in the display area 42 are continuously displayed from the first stage (FIG. 90C) to the third stage (FIG. 90E). It is controlled so that the effect display by a plurality of characters is possible.

  Further, the player can grasp the stage of the advanced notice effect by the number of display of the character images 71 to 73 whose display is controlled in the display area 42. Furthermore, since the level of jackpot expectation increases as the stage of the advanced notice effect develops, the expectation for jackpot can be increased according to the number of display of the character images 71 to 73.

FIG. 91 is a screen configuration showing an advanced notice effect for driving the character body.
If the sub-integrated board 111 decides to execute the advanced notice effect with the advanced notice pattern number “17”, the sub-integrated board 111 performs stepping based on the variable display pattern, the evolved notice pattern number “17”, and the comment notice pattern. The control data of the motors 150h, 152h, 153f, 155, the effect lamps 44a, 44b, the decoration lamp 49, and the sound wave device 115 are selected.

  In addition, the sub-integrated board 111 transmits information such as a variable display pattern, an advanced notice pattern number “17”, and a stop symbol to the second electrical decoration control board 113. Further, the sub integrated substrate 111 starts a timer set in the control data.

  When the second electrical decoration control board 113 receives various information from the sub-integrated board 111, the second electrical decoration control board 113 selects process data corresponding to the variable display pattern and the advanced notice pattern number “17” based on the received various information.

  And the 2nd electrical decoration control board 113 starts control of the variation display of a decoration symbol and the image display of a character based on the content described in the process data.

  When the control from the second electrical decoration control board 113 is started, the balloon from the monster is displayed in the display area 42.

  Note that in the advanced notice effect with the evolved notice pattern number “17”, the character images 71 to 73 are not controlled to be displayed in the display area 42, and the character body is controlled by the drive control of the stepping motors 150 h, 152 h, 153 f and 155. 150, 152 and 154 appear.

  Further, the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 are controlled by the drive signal being output to the first electrical decoration control board 112 by the sub-integrated board 111.

  Therefore, control data related to the drive control is not set in the process data selected by the second electrical decoration control board 113. In the process data selected corresponding to the advanced notice pattern whose evolution notice pattern number is “17”, the operation and display of the character bodies 150, 152 and 154 by the drive control of the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f and 155 are displayed. In order to synchronize the display mode of the area 42, the decorative symbols are variably displayed until predetermined drive control is executed by the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f and 155.

  When predetermined drive control is executed (for example, FIG. 91 (D ′)), control data for controlling display of the character image 70 is set.

  When a predetermined period has passed after the display of the balloon from the monster is controlled, the sub-integrated board 111 outputs a drive signal to the stepping motor 155 based on the control data. Then, a character body 154 that imitates a wolf man appears so as to cover a part of the display area 42 in front of the display area 42 for a predetermined period (FIG. 91 (A ′)).

  Note that the two-step step 2 ′ is a diagram in which a character body 154 imitating a wolf man appears from the state where only the character image (monster) 70 imitating a human boy is displayed in the display area 42. 91 (A ′). Further, the stage is developed from the first stage where the display of the balloon from the monster is controlled to the second stage where the character body 154 imitating the wolf man appears for a predetermined period.

  In FIG. 91 (A '), after the character body 154 imitating a wolf man appears to cover a part of the display area 42 in front of the display area 42 for a predetermined period, it is driven to the stepping motors 152h and 153f after the predetermined period has elapsed. A character body 152 that imitates a Dracula by outputting a signal appears so as to cover a part of the display area 42 in front of the display area 42 for a predetermined period (FIG. 91 (B ′)).

  This state is step 3 ′ in three stages, and the stage is developed from two stages in which a character body 154 imitating a wolf man appears for a predetermined period to three stages in which a character body 152 imitating a dracula appears for a predetermined period. It is the state made to do.

  The character body 152 imitating Dracula in FIG. 91 (B ′) appears so as to cover a part of the display area 42 in front of the display area 42 for a predetermined period, and then a drive signal is output to the stepping motor 150h after the predetermined period has elapsed. Then, the character body 150 imitating Franken appears for a predetermined period so as to cover a part of the display area 42 in front of the display area 42 (FIG. 91 (C ′)).

  This state is a four-stage step 4 ′, and the stage is developed from the three stages in which the character body 152 imitating Dracula appears for a predetermined period to the four stages in which the character object 150 imitating Franken appears for a predetermined period. It is in the state.

  The character body 150 imitating Franken in FIG. 91 (C ′) appears so as to cover a part of the display area 42 in front of the display area 42 for a predetermined period, and after a predetermined period, the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and A drive signal is output to 155 and character bodies 150, 152, and 154 appear.

  After a predetermined period, a character image (monster) 70 simulating a human boy is displayed in the display area 42 (FIG. 91 (E ')).

  At this time, a drive signal is output to the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 to accommodate the character bodies 150, 152, and 154. Thus, the operations of the character bodies 150, 152 and 154 and the display of the character images 70 to 73 in the display area 42 are synchronized by the timer set in the control data and the timer set in the process data.

  This state is step 5 in five steps, from the three steps in which the character body 150 imitating Franken appears for a predetermined period, to the five steps in which the character image (monster) 70 imitating a human boy is displayed and controlled. It is the state which developed the stage.

  In the case of shifting to FIG. 90 (E) to FIG. 90 (F) and in the case of shifting to FIG. 91 (D ′) to FIG. 91 (E ′), the control for stopping and displaying the left decorative symbol 80a is executed. However, the middle decorative symbol 80b and the right decorative symbol 80c are not stopped and displayed. That is, the advanced notice effect is executed after the decorative display of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c is started and before the right decorative symbol 80c is stopped and displayed.

  Further, control is performed so that the appearance directions of the character image and the character body corresponding to the same character are the same. For example, the display control is performed so that the character image 71 appears from the left side of the display area 42 in FIG. 90C, and the character body 154 is displayed in the display area 42 by driving the stepping motor 155 in FIG. It is comprised so that it may appear from the accommodating part 160 provided in the left side.

  With this configuration, the character image and the character member corresponding to the same character appear from the same direction, so that the player can more clearly understand that the relationship between the character image and the character body is the same. it can.

  Further, in this embodiment, the advanced notice effect is executed when one of the character image and the character member appears at each stage. However, the display control of the character image corresponding to the same character and the character are performed at each stage. You may comprise so that both a character image and a character body may appear by performing drive control of the stepping motor which can move a body.

  With this configuration, in order to make the character appear recognizable in more ways at each stage, it is easy for the player to recognize that the performance is being executed, and the player's expectation is further increased. Can be increased.

  In this case, it may be configured such that both the character body and the character image appear only when the background image is the night background image 82, and when only one of them appears by such a configuration. You can give an impression that more monsters are making noise at night, so you can give a stronger impression that the monsters start moving at night.

  When both the character body and the character image appear in the advanced notice effect, the appearance direction of the character image and the appearance direction of the character body may be different.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the character body appears so as to cover a part of the display area 42, so that the character image and the character body appear from the same direction to cover the area where the character image is displayed by the character body. There is a risk that the character image cannot be visually recognized. This problem can be solved by changing the appearance direction of the character image and the character body.

  Further, in this embodiment, the number of character images to be displayed and controlled in the advanced notice effect is different from the number of character bodies that appear by controlling the driving of the stepping motor. You may make it perform by making the number of character bodies the same.

  That is, in this embodiment, character images 70 to 73 corresponding to four characters (monster, wolf man, Dracula, Franken) and character bodies 150, 152 corresponding to three characters (wolf man, Dracula, Franken). , 154, and the advanced notice effect is executed, but four character members (monster, wolf man, Dracula, Franken) corresponding to the four characters of the character images 70 to 73 are provided, and the advanced notice effect is provided. May be configured to execute.

  Further, the number of character images to be displayed and controlled by the advanced notice effect may be configured to be smaller than the number of character bodies that appear by controlling the driving of the stepping motor.

  For example, an advanced notice effect is executed by a character image corresponding to three characters (wolf man, Dracula, Franken) and a character body corresponding to four characters (Monster-kun, Wolf Man, Dracula, Franken). May be.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the character body is switched for each stage to appear, but the character body may continuously appear so that the drive control by a plurality of characters can be performed at each stage. .

  In addition, the player can grasp the stage of the advanced notice effect based on the number of characters appearing, and further, as described above, the expectation level of jackpot increases as the stage of the advanced notice effect develops. The sense of expectation for the big hit can be increased according to the number of character bodies.

  When both the character body and the character image are displayed at the same stage in the advanced notice effect, only one of the character image and the character body is continuously displayed at each stage. You may control.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to grasp the stage of the advanced notice effect according to the number of appearances of the character body and the display number of the character images, and further, as described above, the stage of the advanced notice effect is developed. Since the degree of expectation for the big hit is increased, the expectation for the big hit can be increased according to the number of character bodies appearing.

  In this embodiment, the character body (Franken) abnormality flag F-MS1, the character body (Dracula) abnormality flag F-MS2, the shielding member (Dracula) abnormality flag F-MS3, and the character body (wolf man) abnormality flag F- When one of the values of MS4 is “1” and is in an abnormal state, for example, the value of the character body (Franken) abnormality flag F-MS1 is “1” and the character body (Franken) 150 is abnormal. In this case, the value of the first excitation data and the value of the second excitation data are set to “0” in step S342 of the abnormal excitation data clear process described with reference to FIG.

  By this setting, the switching of the excitation current to each phase coil (φ1 to φ4) of the stepping motors 150h, 153f, 152h, 155 by the drive circuit units 112j, 112k, 112m, 112n is stopped, respectively, and the stepping motors 150h, 153f, 152h and 155 do not rotate.

  Therefore, the character body (Franken) 150, the character body (Dracula) 152, the shielding member (Dracula) 166, and the character body (Wolf man) 154 do not operate. Specifically, when the advanced notice pattern number “17” is set, in step 1 ′, the character body (wolf man) 154 should appear on the front side of the display area 42, but the stepping motor 155 Since it does not rotate, the character body (wolf man) 154 shown in FIG. 91 (A ′) does not appear.

  In step 2 ′, the character body (Dracula) 152 and the shielding member (Dracula) 166 should appear on the front side of the display area 42. However, since the stepping motors 153f and 152h do not rotate, respectively, FIG. 91 (B ′ The character body (Dracula) 152 and the shielding member (Dracula) 166 shown in FIG.

  In step 3 ′, the character body (Franken) 150 should appear on the front side of the display area 42. However, since the stepping motor 150h does not rotate, the character body (Franken) 150 shown in FIG. Does not appear.

  When the variation number of the variation display pattern is transmitted as a command from the main control board 101 next time, the value of the character body (Franken) abnormality flag F-MS1 is “0” by the character body (Franken) abnormality determination process. When the character body (franken) 150 is in a normal state, as shown in FIGS. 91 (A ′) to (C ′), a character body (wolf man) 154 and a character body (Dracula) are displayed on the front side of the display area 42. 152, a shielding member (Dracula) 166, and a character body (Franken) 150 appear in this order.

  FIG. 92 is a screen configuration showing an advanced notice effect with the advanced notice pattern number “18” and a comment notice effect with the button notice pattern number “4”.

  When the sub-integrated board 111 decides to execute the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern number 18, the sub-integrated board 111 displays the variable display pattern, the evolved notice pattern number 18, and “Press the button!” Button. The control data of the effect lamps 44a and 44b, the decoration lamp 49, and the sound wave device 115 corresponding to the notice pattern is selected, and the change display pattern, the advanced notice pattern number 18, and a button for displaying "Press the button!" The notice pattern and the stop symbol information are transmitted to the second illumination control board 113.

  Further, the sub integrated substrate 111 starts a timer set in the control data. This timer synchronizes with the image display control executed on the basis of the process data selected on the second electrical control board 113, the drive control of the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, 155, the effect lamps 44a, 44b, and This is for performing lighting control of the decoration lamp 49 and sound control of the sound wave device 115.

  Based on the reception of information from the sub-integrated board 111, the second electrical control board 113 includes a variable display pattern, an advanced notice pattern number 18, and a button notice pattern that displays “Press the button!”. Process data describing a process of effect display control executed in the corresponding display area 42 is selected, and control such as a decorative symbol and the above-described character image display is performed based on the contents described in the process data. To start. That is, the variable display of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c is started based on the selected process data.

  Based on the process data, the balloon 78 from the monster is displayed in the display area 42 (FIG. 92A). Note that a comment sentence 77 (comment content) of “Please press the button!” Is displayed and controlled on the balloon 78 from the monster-kun whose display is controlled in the display area 42 based on the process data.

  In addition, voice control of the sound wave device 115 is performed in synchronization with the display control of the comment content, and the comment content (“Press the button!”) Is output as a voice. Further, in the lower right of the display area 42, together with an image 79 simulating the operation button 38, the display of the character “PUSH” is prompted to the player to operate the operation button 38.

  As described above, the button notice effect is executed as the whole of the advanced notice effect (step 1 in one step). The display form of the comment sentence 77 is the same as the display form of the comment sentence 77 based on the comment notice pattern.

  When the operation button 38 is operated once, an operation signal is input to the CPU 113a, and when it is determined that the advanced notification effect of the button notification pattern number 4 is executed at the timing when the operation signal is input, The control data of the effect lamps 44a and 44b, the decoration lamp 49, and the sound wave device 115 corresponding to the notice pattern number 4 is selected, and the information of the button notice pattern number 4 is transmitted to the second electrical decoration control board 113.

  Then, the balloon 78 from the monster kun whose display is controlled in the display area 42 is updated to the comment sentence 77 (comment content) of "Maybe ...!?" B)).

  In addition, the voice control of the sound wave device 115 is performed in synchronization with the display control of the comment content, and the comment content (“probably ...!?”) Is output as a voice. Here, the balloon 78 from the monster is updated from white to light blue, and the display control is performed, so that the player can clearly recognize that a response has been made to the comment content "Maybe ...!?" Can be made.

FIG. 93 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the intense heat notification effect of the intense heat notification pattern number 1.
FIG. 93 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the intense heat notification effect of the intense heat notification pattern number 5 described above.

  The sub-integrated board 111 is the case where it is determined to execute any of the advanced notice pattern effects 1 to 18, 20, and 21 and performs the intense heat notice pattern number 1. If it is decided to do so, a balloon from the monster displayed as an image of the advanced notice pattern (step 1 of the advanced notice pattern) and a balloon from the monster determined by the intense notice pattern (of the intense notice pattern) Since the balloons in step 1) match, in addition to the information on the variable display pattern, the advanced notice pattern, and the stop pattern, information on the intense heat notice pattern of the intense heat notice pattern No. 1 is used as the second electrical control board. 113.

  Based on the reception of information from the sub-integrated board 111, the second electrical decoration control board 113 displays the display area 42 corresponding to the variable heat display pattern, the advanced notice pattern, and the intense heat notice pattern of the intense heat notice pattern number 3. The process data describing the process of the effect display control executed in is selected, and the control of the decorative design, the above-described character image display, etc. is started based on the contents described in the process data.

  Then, at the timing of controlling the display of the balloon 78 from the monster in the display area 42 according to the advanced notice effect pattern (the timing at which step 1 of the advanced notice pattern is executed), Unlike the white balloon 78, the rainbow-colored balloon 78 whose color scheme has been changed is displayed on the display area 42 (FIG. 93A).

  For example, when it is decided to execute the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern number 11 and when it is decided to execute the intense heat notice effect of the intense heat notice pattern number 3, FIG. ) To 90 (F) in the advanced notice effect of FIG. 90 (B), the background color is not white but the rainbow color balloon 78 of FIG. 93 (A). Is controlled in the display area 42.

  The sub-integrated board 111 is determined to execute the advanced notice effect of any one of the advanced notice pattern numbers 7, 8, 12, and 13, and the intense heat notice pattern of the intense heat notice pattern number 5 is used. If it is decided to execute, the character imitating Franken displayed in the advanced notice pattern (Step 4 of the evolved notice pattern) and the character imitating Franken determined by the intense notice pattern (Intense notice pattern) Since the character in step 4) of the thermal notice pattern is matched, in addition to the information on the variable display pattern, the advanced notice pattern, and the stop pattern, the information on the intense heat notice pattern of the intense heat notice pattern number 5 It transmits to the illumination control board 113.

  Based on the reception of information from the sub-integrated board 111, the second electrical decoration control board 113 displays a display area 42 corresponding to the variable heat display pattern, the advanced notice pattern, and the intense heat notice pattern No. 5. The process data in which the process of the effect display control to be executed is selected, and the control of the decorative symbol and the image display of the character described above is started based on the contents described in the process data.

  Then, at the timing of controlling the display of the character image 73 simulating Franken in the display area 42 according to the advanced notice effect pattern (timing for executing Step 4 of the advanced notice pattern), the Franken displayed on the image with the developed notice pattern is simulated. Unlike the character image 73, a white character image 76 simulating Franken that has been changed to a color scheme based on white is displayed in the display area 42 (FIG. 93B).

  For example, when it is decided to execute the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern number 12, and when it is decided to execute the intense heat notice effect of the intense heat notice pattern number 5, FIG. ) To 90 (F) in the advanced notice effect of FIG. 90 (E). In the scene where display control is performed for the character image 73 simulating the franken of FIG. 90 (E), instead of the character image 73, the white simulating the franken of FIG. 93 (B). Display control of the character image 76 in the display area 42 is performed.

  Also, when it is decided to execute the advanced notice pattern of the advanced notice pattern number 12 and when it is decided to execute the intense notice pattern effect of the intense heat notice pattern number 2, FIG. Display control of the character image 71 imitating the wolf man of FIG. 90C in the advanced notice effect of FIG. 90F is performed.

  In this scene, instead of the character image 71, a white character image (not shown) imitating a wolf man with a different form is displayed in the display area 42, and the intense heat announcement pattern number 3 is executed. In the scene where the white balloon 78 from the monster in FIG. 90 (B) is displayed and controlled in the advanced notice effect of FIGS. 90 (A) to 90 (F), the intense heat notice pattern number 1 and Similarly, display control of the rainbow-colored balloon 78 (FIG. 93A) from the monster is performed.

  Then, in the scene where the character image 71 imitating the wolf man in FIG. 90C is displayed and controlled, a white character image (not shown) imitating a wolf man having a different form like the intense heat notice pattern number 2 is displayed in the display area. The display is controlled to 42.

  When it is decided to execute the intense heat notice effect of the intense heat notice pattern number 4, the character imitating the Dracula of FIG. 90 (D) in the advanced notice effect of FIGS. 90 (A) to 90 (F). In a scene where the display of the image 72 is controlled, the display area 42 is controlled to display a white character image (not shown) imitating a wolf man with a different color scheme of clothing instead of the character image 72.

  When it is decided to execute the intense heat warning effect of the intense heat warning pattern number 6, the human boy of FIG. 90 (F) in the advanced warning effect of FIGS. 90 (A) to 90 (F) is simulated. In the scene where display control of the character image (monster) 70 is performed, the display area 42 is controlled to display a white character image (not shown) imitating a wolf man with a different color scheme of clothing instead of the character image 70.

  In the present embodiment, among the image display of a plurality of types of characters such as wolf man, Dracula, Franken, and Monster, the image display character to be executed with the selected advanced notice pattern and the selected intense notice pattern When the image display character executed in step 1 matches, the intense heat announcement effect is executed as a part or all of the advanced notice effect.

  Further, since the intense heat announcement effect is not executed unless the characters match, the execution rate is low, and therefore, the big hit expectation degree is set high for the character of the intense heat announcement effect.

  FIG. 94 shows a determination example of jackpot determination as production example 1 of the lightning warning effect. The main control board 101 determines that the variation display pattern is “function reach, hit” as the variation number 33, and The case where the lightning bolt warning pattern number 2 (twice blackout) is determined as the lightning warning pattern from the lightning bolt warning table for the daytime background on the integrated substrate 111 is shown.

  When the special symbol display 41 starts the variation display of the special symbol, the variation display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c is also started in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 (FIG. 94A).

  Specifically, in the vicinity of the center of the display area 42, the display pattern is variably displayed in such a manner that the middle decorative symbol 80b jumps, and a background image is visible on both sides of the central decorative symbol 80b. The left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c that are semi-transparent are displayed in a variable manner in such a manner that the reel rotates from the upper side to the lower side of the display area 42.

  In addition, a daytime background image 81 is displayed in the display area 42, and a character image (monster) 70 is displayed below the decorative pattern 80b in the middle (lower center of the display area 42).

  Next, as the first blackout effect, a dark display image 83 that darkens the display area 42 that controls the display of the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c and the daytime background image 81 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the predetermined time. (For example, 1 second) is displayed (FIG. 94B).

  At this time, the player can recognize that one of a plurality of lightning notice effects has been started, and a special effect with a high expectation of jackpot (such as a super reach development effect that starts from a spotlight notice) It is possible to have a sense of expectation that an article reach production will be performed. Thereafter, when a predetermined time elapses, the display area 42 is controlled so as to continue the content before the first blackout effect is performed (FIG. 94C).

  Next, as the second blackout effect, a dark image 83 having a higher degree of darkness than the darkness at the first blackout effect is displayed so that the player is more difficult to see than the first blackout effect. A time (for example, 2 seconds) longer than the production time during the blackout production is displayed (FIG. 94D).

  At this time, the player can recognize that it is not at least the blackout gasse effect of lightning warning pattern number 1, and there is a possibility that the second blackout gasse effect of lightning warning pattern number 2 is being performed. Remaining, but the expectation that special production (super reach development production that starts from spotlight notice or production reach production etc.) that has higher expectation of big hit than the first blackout production will be performed is the first black This can be improved compared to the out production.

  In other words, when the blackout effect is performed twice, the expectation that a special effect (such as a super reach development effect or a feature reach effect that starts from a spotlight notice) will be gradually improved. Can do. Thereafter, as in the case after the first blackout effect, the display area 42 is controlled to continue the content before the blackout effect is performed (FIG. 94E).

  Next, when the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c are stopped and displayed, a reach form (in the figure, a reach form of “7” is illustrated) is formed, and notification that an accessory reach production is started The character 84 “actual reach” is displayed (FIG. 94 (F)).

  At this time, since the content before the blackout effect was continuously displayed after the second blackout effect, a special effect (a spotlight notice or an object with a higher hit expectation than the super reach effect) Reaching, etc.), the expectation that it was the second blackout gasse production could be improved again by performing the actor reach production. Can give sharpness.

  In the character reach production, the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 attached to the effect device 40 operate, and still stop according to the state of the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 and the shielding members 164, 166, and 168. There is an effect that the decorative pattern 80b that is not displayed is variably displayed.

  Next, in the first lightning effect production example 1, since the variable number 33 is “actual reach, hit”, the decorative pattern 80b in the middle is stopped and displayed with the same symbols as the left and right decorative patterns 80a and 80c. As a result, the big hit symbol (in the figure, the big hit symbol “777” is illustrated) is fixedly displayed (FIG. 94 (G)).

  After that, the combination of the decorative symbols that are confirmed and displayed is a jackpot symbol, and the opening image 85 that informs the player that the jackpot game will be started can be displayed and controlled with the above-described multiple types of effects. Are displayed together with the character images 70 to 75 (FIG. 94 (H)).

  FIG. 95 shows, as a lightning notice effect example 2, a change display pattern determined by the main control board 101 as one of the change numbers 1, 3 to 22, and the sub-integrated board 111 from the daylight background lightning notice table. The case where the background change effect of lightning warning pattern number 3 is determined as the lightning warning pattern is shown.

  As for the production example 2 of the lightning warning effect, as in the production example 1, the first blackout production is performed.

  After the first blackout effect, when a predetermined time elapses, the display area 42 is controlled to continue the content before the first blackout effect is performed (FIG. 95A).

  Thereafter, the dark image 83 having a higher degree of darkness than the darkness in the first blackout effect is displayed in the first blackout effect so that the player is more difficult to see than the first blackout effect. A longer time (for example, 2 seconds) is displayed (FIG. 95B).

  Thereafter, the display area 42 is controlled so as to continue the content before the blackout effect is performed, but a night background image 82 different from the background image before the blackout effect is displayed is displayed as the background image. (FIG. 95 (C)).

  At this time, there is no special effect (spotlight notice, accessory reach effect, etc.) with a higher degree of expectation of jackpot than the super reach effect.

  However, the lightning flash notice of the lightning notice pattern numbers 4 and 5 can be easily performed by using the night background lightning notice table (FIG. 54) when determining the lightning notice effect in the change display of the decorative pattern after the next time. Or the advance notice table for night background (FIG. 45) is used when selecting the advance notice effect, and the operating rate of the character bodies 150, 152, 154 is improved, so that the player's big hit gaming state Can increase expectations for

  Next, when the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c are stopped and displayed, a reach mode (a reach mode of “7” is illustrated in the figure) is formed, and a notification that the reach effect is started is made. The “reach” character 86 is displayed (FIG. 95D).

  Thereafter, a super reach effect, a super reach development effect, or the like corresponding to any one of the change display patterns of the change numbers 1, 3 to 22 determined on the main control board 101 is performed.

  It is the night background image 82 when the display of the decorative symbols in the display area 42 is started, and the background change effect of the lightning warning pattern number 3 is determined as the lightning warning pattern from the night background lightning warning table on the sub-integrated board 111. In such a case, after the second blackout effect, a daytime background image 81 different from the background image before the blackout effect is displayed is displayed as the background image.

  In FIG. 96, as the third effect example of the lightning notice effect, the main control board 101 is determined as one of the change numbers 4, 6 to 10, 12 to 16, or 18 to 22 as the change display pattern. The case where the lightning flash effect of lightning warning pattern number 5 is determined as the lightning warning pattern from the background lightning warning table is shown.

  Note that the first blackout effect is also performed in the third lightning effect effect example 3, as in the first effect example.

  When a predetermined time has elapsed after the first blackout effect, display control is performed on the display area 42 so as to continue the content before the first blackout effect is performed (FIG. 96A).

  Thereafter, the dark image 83 having a higher degree of darkness than the darkness in the first blackout effect is displayed in the first blackout effect so that the player is more difficult to see than the first blackout effect. A longer time (for example, 2 seconds) is displayed (FIG. 96 (B)).

  After that, the effect lamp 44a arranged above the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 blinks and lights up, and a lightning flash notice for running a lightning (thunder) 87 on the dark image 83 from above the display area 42 is performed. As a result, the left decorative pattern 80a (illustrated as “7” in the figure) is stopped and displayed so as to appear in the dark image 83 when illuminated by the lightning 87 (FIG. 96C).

  Next, the dark image 83 having a higher degree of darkness than the darkness in the first and second blackout effects is displayed in the second blackout effect so that the player cannot visually recognize (not visible). (For example, 2 seconds) is displayed (FIG. 96D).

  At this time, the left, middle and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c are displayed on the right side of the display area 42 in a state where the left decorative symbol 80a is stopped and the middle and right decorative symbols 80b and 80c are variably displayed. The lower part of the display is darker than a normal display (for example, when a reach effect or the like is not executed), and is darkened to the extent that it is difficult for the player to view.

  In the present embodiment, the left decorative symbol 80a is stopped and displayed by the first lightning flash warning, and the left decorative symbol 80a is continuously stopped and displayed in the dark image 83 thereafter. In this case, it is sufficient that the reach mode is formed by the end of the second lightning flash notice described later, and the left decorative symbol 80a is not stopped and displayed by the first lightning flash notice. In D), the left decorative design 80a may be in a variable display.

  Next, after a third blackout effect, when a predetermined time elapses, the effect lamps 44a and 44b arranged on the upper right side of the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 are flashed / lighted a plurality of times, By performing a lightning flash advance notice to run the lightning (lightning) 87 on the dark image 83 from the right side of the display area 42, the right decorative design 80c is displayed together with the left decorative design 80a that is already stopped by being illuminated by the lightning 87. (In the figure, “7” is exemplified) is stopped and displayed so as to appear in the dark image 83 (FIG. 96E).

  At this time, since the second lightning flash announcement was made, the player will not be out of reach with normal reach and super reach production, and in other cases, the super reach with high expectation of jackpot With the development and super reach branching premiere, you can expect a big hit.

  Next, when the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c are stopped and displayed, a reach mode (a reach mode of “7” is illustrated in the figure) is formed, and a notification that the reach effect is started is made. The “reach” character 86 is displayed (FIG. 96F).

  Thereafter, a super reach effect or a super reach development effect corresponding to any of the change display patterns of change numbers 4, 6 to 10, 12 to 16, and 18 to 22 determined by the main control board 101 is performed. If the lightning bolt warning pattern number 4 is determined as the lightning bolt warning pattern on the sub-integrated board 111, the second lightning flash warning is not performed, but only the first lightning flash warning is performed.

  FIG. 97 is an effect example in which the display mode of the decorative symbol 80 is changed in the effect example 3 (lightning flash notification) of the lightning notice effect.

  First, at the time of normal symbol variation, as shown in FIG. 97 (A), the character 123 depicted in the array identification unit 121 of the ornamental symbol 80 (in FIG. 97 (A), depicted in the ornamental symbol 80 of “7”). The color of the background picture 124 (the picture of “monster house and bat”) depicted in the depth display unit 122 is recognized by the number (sequence identification unit 121) in the decorative design 80. So that the color scheme of the character 123 and the background image 124 is gradation in the same color as the color scheme (base color) of the decorative symbol 80 (the “7” decorative symbol 80 (specific symbol) shown in FIG. 97A). The image is displayed in a reddish color based on the red color of the specific design.

  That is, the decorative symbol 80 is displayed in the symbol display mode (sequence highlighting display mode) in which the visibility of the sequence identification unit 121 is given the highest priority without the character 123 and the background image 124 interfering with the visibility of the sequence identification unit 121.

  On the other hand, when the lightning flash advance notice is performed, when the darkening image 83 shown in FIG. 96 (B) or FIG. 96 (D) is displayed, an effect of running the lightning 87 on the display area 42 is performed (FIG. 96 (C), (E)), and the decorative pattern 80 is displayed in a display mode that appears in the dark image 83 when illuminated by the lightning 87 displayed in the background image, as shown in FIG. 97 (B). Is displayed.

  Specifically, by illuminating the white light of the lightning 87, the color scheme of the decorative pattern 80 based on red is a monochrome color scheme in which the white color is emphasized (a color scheme having a higher white display ratio than black). The image is changed and displayed.

  In addition, in such a lightning flash notice, image display control is performed to change the brightness of the lightning 87 displayed on the background image in order to enhance the production effect. When the brightness of the lightning 87 decreases, The degree to which the white light of the lightning 87 illuminates the decorative pattern 80 is reduced, so that the decorative pattern 80 is slightly illuminated in the dark image 83 by being illuminated by the lightning 87 whose luminance is reduced, as shown in FIG. 97C. Displayed in a display manner that emerges.

  Specifically, the decorative design 80 is displayed as an image instead of a monochrome tone color scheme in which white is emphasized to a monochrome tone color scheme in which black is emphasized (a color scheme having a higher black display ratio than white).

  Then, when the reach mode is formed after the lightning flash advance notice is finished and the reach production shown in FIG. 96 (F) is started, as shown in FIG. 97 (D), it is depicted in the array identification unit 121. The background image 124 depicted on the character 123 and the depth display unit 122 is displayed in an original color tone regardless of the base color.

  As a result, the character 123 is highlighted in the array identification unit 121, and the background image 124 is highlighted in the depth display unit 122. That is, the character 123 and the background image 124 drawn in a color scheme that does not interfere with the recognition of the numbers (the arrangement identification unit 121) during normal symbol variation are displayed in an image that can be positively recognized during the lightning flash advance notice.

  In other words, the visibility of the character 123 and the background image 124 is given the highest priority, and the character 123 and the background image 124 can be clearly visually recognized (decoration of the decorative symbol 80 is enhanced compared to the arrangement highlighting display mode) (decoration). The decorative pattern 80 is displayed in the highlight mode.

  In addition, in addition to the “monster house and bat” design, the “lightning” design 124a is additionally displayed on the background image 124 in this decoration highlighting display mode in order to leave a reverberation after the lightning flash notice. However, the symbol display in the decoration emphasis display mode is terminated immediately before the start of the reach effect, and after the reach effect, the display is changed to the array emphasis display mode again and the variation display of the decoration symbol 80 is performed.

  FIG. 98 shows, as a lightning notice effect example 4, the main control board 101 determines one of the change numbers 29 and 30 as the change display pattern, and the sub-integrated board 111 shows the lightning notice from the daylight background lightning notice table. The case where the blackout production of the lightning notice pattern number 2 is decided twice as a pattern is shown.

  Note that the first blackout effect is also performed for the lightning bolt notice effect example 4 as with the effect example 1.

  After the first blackout effect, the display area 42 is controlled so that the content before the first blackout effect is continued after a predetermined time has elapsed (FIG. 98 (A)).

  Thereafter, the dark image 83 having a higher degree of darkness than the darkness in the first blackout effect is displayed in the first blackout effect so that the player is more difficult to see than the first blackout effect. A longer time (for example, 2 seconds) is displayed (FIG. 98B).

  Thereafter, a spotlight notice is made under the center of the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 while a character (a character image (monster) 70 is illustrated) appears in the spotlight 88 (FIG. 5). 98 (C)).

  At this time, since the spotlight notice is performed, the player can confirm that the super reach development effect with a high degree of big hit expectation is performed, and can improve the sense of expectation that will be a big hit.

  Furthermore, since the super reach development effect corresponding to the character is performed, it is possible to recognize the high degree of expectation of the big hit, and it is possible to have various feelings of expectation depending on the character that has appeared.

  Note that the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c are the normal decorative symbols (for example, when the reach effect or the like is not executed) in the lower right portion of the display area 42 (the portion that is not illuminated by the spotlight 88). This is smaller than when the variable display is executed, and is displayed in a dark state to the extent that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  Next, the start image 89 for starting the super reach development effect corresponding to the character whose image display is controlled by the spotlight notice is the effect that the character image (monster) descends from the upper side of the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 to the lower side. Is performed (FIG. 98D).

  Thereafter, the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c are stopped and displayed as a super reach development effect corresponding to one of the variable display patterns of the variable numbers 29 and 30 determined on the main control board 101, thereby reaching the reach mode ( In FIG. 98, the super-reach development effect is started in a state in which the reach form of “7” is formed) (FIG. 98E).

  Here, the spotlight notice is not determined by the sub-integrated board 111 like the lightning flash notice (Production Example 2) or the background change notice (Production Example 3), and the variation number 23 in which the same blackout effect is incorporated. Are determined by the main control board 101 as?

  Even for the lightning warning effect determined on the main control board 101, until the end of the second blackout effect in FIG. 98 (B) (approximately 3.5 seconds from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c). Are displayed in the same effect form as in FIG. 95B of effect example 2 and FIG. 96B of effect example 3.

  In the lightning flash notice and the spotlight notice, the lightning (lightning) 87 can be run or the spotlight 88 can be bathed in the character by setting the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 to the dark image 83 by the blackout effect. It is a notice effect that becomes possible.

  Therefore, it can be said that the lightning flash notice and the spotlight notice are effects that are unique to the dark display by performing the blackout effect.

  As described above, according to the configuration of this embodiment, it is difficult to visually recognize the entire display area where the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c are displayed in the display area 42, the character image 70, and the like. By executing a lightning notice effect (disappearance effect) for displaying the dark image 83 for a predetermined time, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c until the dark image 83 is displayed by the player are displayed. It becomes impossible to pay attention to the fluctuating display, the character image 70, etc., and it is possible to effectively make the notice effect (blackout effect) that the player wants to be aware of.

  In addition, after the start of the notice effect by the blackout effect, the effect lamps 44a and 44b of the effect device 40 are turned on and blinked, and the lightning 87 is displayed in the display area 42 as a notice effect. By displaying the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c in a visible manner in such a production manner, it is possible to effectively pay attention to a notice production that the player wants to be aware of.

  Therefore, by noticing and paying attention to the notice effect that the player wants to be aware of, even if the player plays a game for a long time, the game does not become monotonous, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game. it can.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 performs the lightning warning selection process (step S214) of the warning selection process, and outputs information corresponding to the result of the warning selection process as the sub information output process. (Step S 110) A transmission effect execution means for transmitting to the second illumination control board 113 and displaying and controlling the lightning warning effect in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 by the CPU 113 a mounted on the second illumination control board 113. It has.

  Note that according to the configuration of the present embodiment, a dark image that makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire display area 42 where information such as the variation display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c and the character image 70 is displayed. 83 is displayed for a predetermined time, but it is sufficient that the player cannot pay attention to the information display. For example, only a bright image or a background image is displayed in the display area 42 as an image different from the dark image 83. Alternatively, the information display may be concealed by erasing an image including the information display by turning off the power of the display area 42 or providing an operable concealment member in the effect device 40 or the like.

  Conventionally, by displaying a plurality of characters, there is also a lively effect other than the special symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display device, but even if a plurality of characters are displayed, a big hit symbol is derived. It was rarely done and did not make the character aware. However, such a presentation can be made conscious by the configuration of the present embodiment.

  FIG. 99 is an explanatory diagram showing the mini character notice effect of the mini character notice pattern number 1. When the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 decides to execute the mini character notice pattern No. 1 mini character notice pattern, as described above, the variable display pattern, the mini character notice pattern No. 1 mini character notice pattern, and the stop Information such as symbols is transmitted to the second electrical decoration control board 113.

  The CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 performs the effect display control executed in the display area 42 corresponding to the variable display pattern and the mini character notice pattern number 1 based on the reception of the signal indicating the information. The process data in which the above process is described is selected, and control of the decorative design, the above-described mini character image display, and the like based on the contents described in the process data is started.

  In other words, the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c are started to be displayed in a translucent display manner based on the selected process data. At this time, the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c change rapidly from the upper side to the lower side of the display area 42 (the moving speed is faster than the process in which each of the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c is stopped and displayed. (Change).

  In addition, since the image of the mini character is not displayed on the back by the mini character notice, the medium decoration pattern 80b does not need to be visible to the player on the back, and changes in an opaque display mode instead of a translucent display mode. It is displayed. However, even if the decorative pattern 80b in the inside is variably displayed in a translucent display mode, it does not affect the player's visual recognition.

  Based on the process data, the mini-character image 90 representing the Hiroshi is displayed in the display area 42 in a manner in which the door displayed on the lower right side of the display area 42 and on the back of the right decorative pattern 80c is opened and the upper body is mounted. Control is performed (FIG. 99A).

  At this time, the right decorative design 80c is variably displayed in a translucent display mode, and the player can visually recognize the mini character image 90 representing Hiroshi on the back of the right decorative design 80c.

  Therefore, the player does not need to move the viewpoint between the right decorative pattern 80c and the mini character image 90 representing Hiroshi, and displays the Hiroshi while gazing at the left, middle, and right decorative patterns 80a to 80c. The mini character image 90 can be visually recognized.

  Then, after the predetermined time has elapsed based on the process data, the door displayed on the back of the right decorative design 80a is closed in the process in which the left decorative design 80a of the left and right decorative designs 80a and 80c is stopped and displayed. Non-display control of the mini character image 90 representing Hiroshi is performed in the display area 42 (FIG. 99B).

  At this time, the left decorative design 80a is gradually changed from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation display, and is changed from translucent to opaque display mode. Therefore, even if the player is gazing at the mini character image 90 representing Hiroshi, the player can surely recognize that the left decorative symbol 80a is stopped and displayed. Then, the left decorative design 80a stops and displays the designated stop design (in the figure, “7” is exemplified) (FIG. 99C).

  As in the case of the left decorative design 80a, the right decorative design 80c is gradually changed from the high-speed change to the low-speed change display in the process in which the right decorative design 80c is stopped and displayed based on the process data. It is changed to an opaque display mode. Then, the right decorative design 80c stops and displays a stop design (designated as “6” in FIG. 99) designated to be different from the left decorative design 80a (FIG. 99D).

  In the present embodiment, the mini-character images 90 to 93 are controlled to be hidden (FIG. 99B) before the left decorative symbol 80a is stopped and displayed, but after the left decorative symbol 80a is stopped and displayed, Display control may be performed until the decorative design 80c is stopped and displayed.

  In this case, a mini-character image imitating a human girl is displayed on the back of the stop position of the left decorative symbol 80a that is first stopped and displayed (left lower part of the display area 42) among the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c. The child is displayed and controlled, and the mini character is a mini character (mini character notice pattern number 4) having a high expectation of big hit, or a combination of mini characters including the mini character (mini character notice pattern number 11) is a big hit. Therefore, before the left decorative symbol 80a is stopped and displayed, the back of the stop position must be watched, and the display area 42 can be focused even in the normal state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a display area having a smaller display area than the respective variable display areas of the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c, that is, the inner sides of the variable display areas of the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c. In addition, the mini character images 90 to 93 are displayed, and the mini character images 90 to 93 are easily visible to the player.

  Note that it is not necessary to move the viewpoint between the decorative symbols 80a to 80c displayed in the display region 42 and the mini character images 90 to 93, and the character image is displayed in a part of the decorative symbol variable display regions. Even if is displayed, the character image may be displayed in all the display areas of the decorative symbol variation display area.

  Alternatively, the mini character image may be displayed such that the display area is larger than the decorative symbol variable display region and the decorative symbol variable display region and the mini character image display region overlap.

  Here, in the liquid crystal display 116, display control is performed on the display area 42 as one effect image by superimposing a plurality of layers.

  Here, the image data such as the background image (the day background image 81 or the night background image 82), the mini character images 90 to 93, and the left, middle and right decorative patterns 80a to 80c are stored in the ROM 113b of the second electrical decoration control board 113. The necessary image data based on the process data is read out separately to the RAM 113c of the second electrical control board 113 at a predetermined timing and output to the liquid crystal display 116, so that each image data has a plurality of layers. Is displayed in the display area 42.

  Priorities displayed in the display area 42 are set for these image data (a plurality of layers). By superposing upper layers in order from the lowest layer, priority is given to higher layers. Are displayed in the display area 42.

  FIG. 100 shows a plurality of layers for displaying the mini character notice effect. FIG. 100 is an explanatory diagram showing a plurality of layers for displaying the advanced notice effect in which steps 1, 2, and 3 of the evolved notice pattern are executed and the mini character notice effect of the mini character notice pattern number 11.

  The plurality of layers for executing the mini character notice effect include a background layer 42a in which a background image (day background image 81 or night background image 82) is displayed as at least the lowest layer, and a mini as a first middle layer. The mini character layer 42b on which the character images 90 to 93 are displayed and the left, middle and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c are displayed in a variable manner as the second middle layer (the higher layer than the first middle layer). The symbol layer 42c to be displayed and the notice character layer 42d on which the character images 70 to 75 are displayed as the highest layer.

  In the background layer 42a, as shown in FIG. 100A, a daytime background image 81 is depicted as a background image, a door 94a at the lower right, a door 94b at the upper left, a door 94c at the upper right, and a door 94c at the lower left. A door 94d is depicted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 100 (B), the mini character layer 42b has a mini character image 90 showing a Hiroshi at a position corresponding to the lower right door 94a of the background layer 42a, and a position corresponding to the lower left door 94b. A mini character image 91 representing Hiroshi's sister, a mini character image 92 imitating a triplet at a position corresponding to the upper right door 94c, and a mini character image imitating a human girl at a position corresponding to the lower left door 94d ( (Kyoko-chan) 93 is depicted.

  The mini character images 90 to 93 include a depiction of a door that is in a half-open state together with the mini character.

  Then, by overlapping the background layer 42a and the mini character layer 42b, which is higher than the background layer 42a, the doors 94a to 94d depicted in the daytime background image 81 are not visible, and the mini character images 90 to 93 are not visible. Becomes visible.

  In the mini character area 42b, only necessary mini character images among the mini character images 90 to 93 are displayed according to the mini character notice pattern number.

  For example, when the mini character notice pattern of the mini character notice pattern number 1 is determined, only the mini character image 90 is displayed on the mini character area 42b, and as shown in FIG. Only the character image 90 representing the above is displayed in the display area 42.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 100C, the symbol layer 42c has a left decorative symbol 80a in a semi-transparent display mode and a middle decorative symbol 80b in an opaque display mode at a position overlapping the display area of the mini character images 91 and 93. The right decorative design 80c is depicted in a semi-transparent display manner at a position overlapping the display area of the mini character images 90 and 92.

  Then, by superimposing the mini character layer 42b and the symbol layer 42c, which is higher than the mini character layer 42b, the back of the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c are transparently displayed during the variation display of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c. Character images 90 to 93 are visible to the player.

  It should be noted that the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c are stopped and displayed on the left side in an opaque display manner at a position overlapping the display area of the mini character image (Kai-chan) 93 imitating a human girl. The right decorative design 80c is depicted in an opaque display manner at a position overlapping the decorative design 80a and the display area of the mini character image 90 imitating Hiroshi.

  When the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c are stopped and displayed by superimposing the mini character layer 42b and the symbol layer 42c higher than the mini character layer 42b, the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c are displayed. The back surface is not transparent, and the position where the mini character images 90 and 93 are depicted is not visible to the player.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 100 (D), the notice character area 42d has an opaque display at a position overlapping the display areas of the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c and the display areas of the mini character images 91 and 93. In an aspect, a character image 71 imitating a wolf man, a character image 72 imitating Dracula, and a character image 73 imitating Franken are depicted.

  Then, by superimposing the mini character layer 42b and the symbol layer 42c and the notice character layer 42d which is higher than these layers, the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c and the mini character notice effect are performed during the advanced notice effect. The character images 70 to 73 in the advanced notice effect are visible to the player in front of the mini character images 90 to 93.

  The blank display area in the mini character layer 42b, the symbol layer 42c, and the notice character layer 42d is a transparent display mode, and can transmit the lower layer.

  FIG. 100 shows only the layer on which the daytime background image 81, the mini character images 90 to 93, the left / middle / right decorative symbols 80a to 80c, and the character images 70 to 73 in the advanced notice effect are displayed. In addition to these layers, based on the image data stored in the ROM 113b of the second electrical control board 113, a character image (monster) 70 imitating a human boy displayed together with the background image, in blackout effects It has a layer on which the dark image 83 and the like are displayed.

  The character images 70 to 75 displayed in the blackout effect are displayed on the same layer as the notice character layer 42d on which the character images 70 to 73 in the advanced notice are displayed.

  And a background image (day background image 81 or night background image 82) <mini character images 90 to 93 in a mini character notice effect <a character image (monster) 70 imitating a human boy (displayed in the lower center of the display area 42) < Left / middle / right decorative symbols 80a-80c <character images 70-75 in advance notice effect (character images 70-73 in advanced notice effect or character images 71-75 in blackout effect) <dark image 83 in blackout effect The priority order displayed in the display area 42 is set in this order.

  Further, since the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 described above appear so as to cover a part of the display area 42 in front of the display area 42, an advanced notice effect that causes the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 to appear is being executed. In addition, some of the mini character images 90 to 93 and the decorative symbols 80a to 80c are not visible to the player.

  That is, the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 appear with a higher priority than all the images displayed in the display area. For example, when mini character images 90 to 93 in the mini character notice effect are displayed, by driving the character body 154 imitating a wolf man, one of the mini character image 91 representing the Hiroshi sister and one of the left decorative symbols 80a. The part becomes invisible.

  Accordingly, the player is given priority to the advanced notice effect in which the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 are driven over the mini character notice effect in which the mini character images 90 to 93 are displayed and the variable display of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c. be able to.

  In the present embodiment, the design layer 42c is set higher than the mini character layer 42b, and the mini character images 90 to 93 are visible through the back of the left and right decorative designs 80a and 80c. It suffices if the viewpoint does not need to be moved between 80a to 80c and the mini character images 90 to 93.

  For example, the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c are displayed so that the character image 70 to 73 in the advanced notice effect is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c. Mini character images 90 to 93 may be displayed on the front side. In this case, the decorative symbols 80a and 80c may be displayed in an opaque display mode.

  In the present embodiment, the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c are variably displayed in a semi-transparent display mode, so that the mini character images 90 to 93 are seen through the back of the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c. However, the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c may be variably displayed so that the mini character images 90 to 93 can be visually recognized.

  For example, the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c are variably displayed with high-speed fluctuation in an opaque display mode, and the visual effect due to the afterimages of the mini character images 90 to 93 visible between the decorative symbols in each of the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c. The mini character images 90 to 93 may be made visible.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, it is a function of the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111, and it is determined whether or not to execute the mini character notice selection process (step S215) of the notice selection process to execute the mini character notice. A rear effect execution determining means for determining is provided.

  Further, the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 executes the mini character notice selection process (step S215) of the notice selection process, and outputs information corresponding to the result of the notice selection process in the sub information output process (step S110). The display area 42 of the back side of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c and the character images 70 to 75 is displayed on the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 by the CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113. A rear effect executing means for controlling the display of a mini character notice effect as a rear effect for controlling the display of the mini character images 80 to 83 is provided.

  101 and 102 show an example of a normal reach effect. The normal reach effect is executed when any of the variation numbers 3 to 22 and 35 is determined as the variation display pattern on the main control board 101.

  In other words, the normal reach effect is the case where the advance notice effect, the lightning notice notice effect example 2 (background change notice), the effect example 3 (lightning flash notice) is executed, or the notice effect is not executed. No. 1 is an effect executed after the reach mode is formed.

  As shown in FIG. 101 (A), when the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c are stopped and displayed, a reach mode (a reach mode of “7” is illustrated in FIG. 101) is formed. When the “reach” character 86 for informing that the production is started is displayed, the left decorative pattern 80a forming the reach mode is usually displayed at the upper left portion of the display area 42 as shown in FIG. 101 (B). (For example, when the reach effect or the like is not executed), the decorative symbol is displayed smaller than when the variable symbol is displayed (in the same figure, the left decorative symbol 80a of “7” is displayed smaller). Example).

  The right decorative design 80c forming the reach mode is displayed smaller in the upper right part of the display area 42 than when the normal decorative design change display is executed (in the same figure, the right side of “7” is displayed). An example in which the decorative design 80c is displayed small).

  Further, the middle decorative symbol 80b is displayed in a larger size at the lower center of the display area 42 than when the normal decorative symbol variation display is executed (in the same figure, the middle decorative symbol 80b of “8” is larger). Example when displayed).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (C), a display area 42 is displayed in the portrait 90 of “Daio” in the monster house displayed by the background images (the day background image 81 or the night background image 82) of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c. An effect image in which all the other items displayed on the screen are drawn in a spiral shape (variation mode) is displayed, and the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c each have a vertical vertical axis as a rotation axis. Is rotated as

  Here, the rotation of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c will be described with reference to FIGS. First, at the time of a normal symbol change other than when the symbol is rotated, as shown in FIG. 101 (D), the decorative symbol 80 is depicted by a numeric-shaped array identification unit 121 in which a character 123 is depicted and a background image 124. The depth display unit 122 that is the thick portion thus formed is displayed in a three-dimensional display state on the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116 that is a two-dimensional space (plane). .

  Specifically, the left and right decorative symbols are changed in such a manner that the reel rotates from the upper side to the lower side of the display region 42, and the middle decorative symbols jump around the center of the display region 42. The display mode is varied.

  However, the three-dimensional display at the time of such a normal symbol change only displays the decorative symbol 80 three-dimensionally by displaying the depth display unit 122 that displays the depth of the array identification unit 121 two-dimensionally. And the display ratio between the array identification unit 121 and the depth display unit 122 constituting the decorative design 80 is maintained substantially constant (generally, the array identification unit 121 is 70% and the depth display unit 122 is 30%). Fluctuation display is performed.

  On the other hand, when the symbol is rotated, the decorative symbol 80 is rotated around the virtual axis 120 (vertical vertical line) set in the virtual three-dimensional space of the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116.

  That is, as shown in FIGS. 101 (E) to 101 (H), the display ratio of the array identification unit 121 and the depth display unit 122 changes every moment with the rotation of the decorative pattern 80. The decorative pattern 80 is displayed as if it were a three-dimensional substance in the display area 42 of the space (plane).

  The symbol display mode of the medium decorative symbol 80b will be described as an example. In the symbol display mode shown in FIG. 101 (E) (the symbol display mode during normal symbol variation), the display ratio of the array identification unit 121 is the depth display unit. The display ratio of the depth display unit 122 is gradually higher as the rotation progresses, and the display of the array identification unit 121 and the depth display unit 122 is similar to the symbol display mode illustrated in FIG. The display ratio is substantially the same (50% for the array identification unit 121 and 50% for the depth display unit 122).

  Thereafter, the rotation further proceeds (through the symbol display mode shown in FIG. 101 (G)), and the display ratio of the depth display portion 122 becomes almost 100% as in the symbol display mode shown in FIG. 101 (H). A decorative pattern 80 of only the depth display unit 122 is displayed.

  Thereafter, reverse rotation is performed, and after the symbol display mode shown in FIG. 101 (G), the display ratio of the array identification unit 121 gradually increases, and as shown in the symbol display mode shown in FIG. 101 (F) After the display ratios of the identification unit 121 and the depth display unit 122 become substantially the same, the reverse rotation proceeds, and the display returns to the symbol display mode shown in FIG. 101 (E) (the symbol display mode during normal symbol variation). By repeatedly changing the display ratios of the array identification unit 121 and the depth display unit 122 described above, the decorative symbol 80 is rotated (including reverse rotation). However, the change of the display ratio of the arrangement | sequence identification part 121 and the depth display part 122 is performed in a series of flows accompanying rotation of the decoration symbol 80. FIG.

  Then, after the decorative symbols 80 (left, middle, and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c) are rotated for a predetermined time, the left and right decorative symbols 80a and 80c are displayed in the symbol display mode shown in FIG. The rotation is stopped in the normal symbol display mode), and is sucked into the portrait 90 in this display mode.

  On the other hand, the rotation of the medium decorative design 80b is stopped in a symbol display mode (the symbol display mode shown in FIG. 101 (H)) in which the display ratio of the depth display unit 122 is almost 100%, and is sucked into the portrait 90. (See FIGS. 102A and 102B).

  Thereafter, an image for a super reach branch effect is displayed, and a transition from the normal reach effect to the super reach effect is confirmed.

  It should be noted that when either of the variation numbers 3 and 4 is determined as the variation display pattern on the main control board 101, that is, when the display result of the deviation is derived after executing the normal reach effect, and after the normal reach effect is performed, the big hit When the display result is derived, after the decorative symbols 80a to 80c described above are rotated, all the symbols in the symbol display mode shown in FIG. 101 (E) (the symbol display mode during normal symbol variation) are displayed. By stopping the rotation of the decorative symbols 80a to 80c, the final display result is derived and the decorative symbol variation display is terminated.

  That is, the display result is derived without displaying the effect in which the decorative symbols 80a to 80c are sucked into the portrait 90 and the image for the super reach branch effect. Accordingly, when the effect of displaying the image for the super reach branching effect is not performed after the decorative symbols 80a to 80c are sucked into the portrait 90, the super reach effect having a higher degree of expectation of the big hit than the normal reach effect at that time. It can be recognized that the super reach development effect is not performed.

  That is, when the effect of displaying the image for the super reach branching effect is performed after the decorative symbols 80a to 80c are sucked into the portrait 90, the super reach effect or the super reach development effect with a higher degree of expectation of the big hit than the normal reach effect is performed. It can be recognized that it will be done, and the expectation that becomes a big hit can be enhanced.

  Further, as the effect display for rotating the decorative pattern 80, the horizontal direction shown in FIG. 101 (D) can be used in addition to the rotation with the vertical virtual line (virtual axis 120) as the rotation axis in the normal reach effect described above. An effect display for rotating the decorative symbol 80 is performed with the virtual axis 120a serving as a virtual perpendicular to the rotation axis.

  The “Moon” pattern is drawn on the upper surface of the thick portion (depth display portion 122) of the decorative pattern 80, and the “Lake” pattern is drawn on the lower surface. The virtual axis 120a is the rotation axis. The pattern of “Moon” and “Lake” can be visually recognized by the rotation.

  Next, an example of a super reach branch effect (branch effect notice) will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 (C) to 102 (H) and FIG. 102 (C) to 102 (H) are explanatory views showing the branch effect notice of the branch effect notice pattern number 5 in the first-type branch effect notice pattern described above.

  When the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 decides to execute the branch effect notice pattern of the branch effect notice pattern number 5 in the first kind branch effect notice pattern, along with information such as the variable display pattern and the stop pattern, Information on the branch effect notice pattern of the branch effect notice pattern number 5 is transmitted to the second electrical decoration control board 113.

  The CPU 113a mounted on the second electrical decoration control board 113 performs the effect executed in the display area 42 corresponding to the branch effect notice pattern No. 5 based on the reception of the signal indicating the information. Process data describing a display control process is selected, and control of character image display is started based on the contents described in the process data.

  After the decorative pattern 80 (left, middle and right decorative patterns 80a to 80c) is drawn into the spiral display mode drawn in the portrait 90, the spiral display mode is drawn based on the process data. The displayed portrait 90 is controlled over the entire display area 42 (FIG. 102C).

  After that, as a first branch effect notice, an impact sound of “passing” that tears the spiral display mode is output from the sound wave device 115, and a character image 71 imitating a wolf man is displayed on the portrait 90 ( FIG. 102 (D)).

  Here, it is a mode with higher brightness than the spiral display mode, and the face of the wolf man after transformation is overlapped with the face of the wolf man before transformation, and is displayed in an enlarged form on the entire portrait 90, The branch effect notice is an effect that has an impact on the player.

  Next, an erasing sound “Shwar” that pulls back the character image 71 imitating a wolf man to a spiral display mode is output from the sound wave device 115, and a portrait 90 on which the spiral display mode is drawn is displayed again in the display area. 42 (FIG. 102E).

  After that, as the second branch effect notice, the impact sound of “passy” that tears the spiral display mode is output from the sound wave device 115 as in the first branch effect notice, and the portrait 90 is imitated with a dracula. The displayed character image 72 is displayed (FIG. 102 (F)).

  Again, this is a mode with a higher brightness than the spiral display mode, and the Dracula's face is displayed in an enlarged mode on the entire portrait 90, thereby making the branching effect notice an effect that has an impact on the player. .

  Next, an erasing sound of “Shwar” that pulls back the character image 72 simulating a dracula to a spiral display mode is output from the sound wave device 115, and a portrait 90 on which the spiral display mode is drawn is displayed again in the display area 42. (FIG. 102G).

  After that, as the third branch effect notice, the sound wave device 115 outputs an impact sound of “passy” that tears the spiral display mode in the same way as the first and second branch effect notices, and to the portrait 90 A character image 73 simulating Franken is displayed (FIG. 102 (H)).

  Again, this is a mode with higher brightness than the spiral display mode, and the Franken's face is displayed in an enlarged mode on the entire portrait 90, thereby making the branching effect notice an effect that has an impact on the player.

  In this case, any of the variation numbers 17 to 22 should already be determined as the variation display pattern, and after executing the third branch effect notice, the franken displayed in the third branch effect notice is displayed. A Franken reach effect is displayed in which the same character image as the imitated character image 73 is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the three branch effect notices are impacted in a short time based on the spiral display mode in which the decorative symbols 80 (left, middle and right decorative symbols 80a to 80c) are sucked. By performing in the mode, it is possible to produce an effect that enhances interest.

  In addition, at the timing when the character image is displayed on the portrait 90, a branching effect warning sound of an impact sound of “passi” and an erasing sound of “Shwer” is output from the sonic device 115. By clarifying the display start and the display start of the spiral display mode (end of display of the character image), the player can be made to grasp the change of the display mode more clearly.

  In addition, since the branch effect warning sound is output at a good tempo, it is possible to further increase the expectation that a reach effect with a high expectation level for the big hit is derived.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the character image 71 imitating a wolf man in the portrait 90, the character image 72 imitating Dracula, the character image 73 imitating Franken, and a monster-kun were imitated in three branch effects notice. A result mode for displaying either the character image 70 or the character image 74 imitating Kai-chan is displayed.

  When it is decided to execute the second branch effect notice pattern, the character image (monster) imitating a human boy is displayed on the portrait 90 in the third effect notice (see FIG. 92A). )).

  For example, when it is decided to execute the second branch effect notice pattern of the branch effect notice pattern number 1, it simulates the franken of FIG. 102 (H) in the branch effect notice of FIGS. 102 (C) to (H). In a scene where display control of the character image 73 on the portrait 90 is performed, display control is performed not on the character image 73 imitating Franken but on the character image (monster) 70 imitating a human boy in FIG.

  If it is decided to execute the third branch effect notice pattern, the character image imitating a human girl (Kyoko-chan) is displayed on the portrait 90 in the third branch effect notice (FIG. 103B). ).

  For example, when it is decided to execute the third branch effect notice pattern of the branch effect notice pattern number 1, it simulates the franken of FIG. 91 (H) in the branch effect notice shown in FIGS. 102 (C) to 102 (H). In a scene where display control of the character image 73 on the portrait 90 is performed, display control is performed not on the character image 73 simulating Franken but on the character image (kaiko-chan) 74 simulating a human girl in FIG.

  In this way, in the third branch effect notice, the character image 70 imitating Monster-kun or the character image 74 imitating Kai-chan is displayed on the portrait 90 as the specific result mode.

  Note that the case where it is decided to display the character image 74 imitating Kai-chan on the portrait 90 in the third branch effect notice is only when the probability is a big hit. That is, since it is possible to grasp that the character image 74 imitating Phantom-chan is displayed on the portrait 90 in the third branching advance notice, it is possible to improve the player's interest. .

  As shown in FIGS. 103 (A) and 103 (B), the portrait 90 displayed as the branch effect notice has a left / right decorative pattern 80a, which forms a reach mode at the timing when each character image is displayed. 80c is stopped (not shown in FIGS. 102D, 102F, and 102H).

  The left decorative symbol 80a is displayed at a lower stop in the upper left part of the display area 42 than when the normal decorative symbol variable display is performed (for example, when the reach effect or the like is not executed), and the right decorative symbol 80c. Is displayed in the upper right portion of the display area 42 in a smaller stop than when the normal decorative symbol variation display is executed.

  Further, in the branching effect presentation notice, display control of any of the character images 70 to 74 is performed on the portrait 90 in the display area 42 and the drive control of the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 1543f, and 155 in the third branch presentation notice described above. Is performed by causing the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 to appear.

  Further, the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 are controlled by the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 by outputting a drive signal to the first lighting control board 112. Control data relating to these drive controls is not set in the process data selected by the mounted CPU 113a.

  In order to synchronize the action of the character bodies 150, 152, 154 by the drive control of the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, 155 and the display mode of the display area 42 to the process data selected corresponding to the branch effect notice pattern. In addition, the control for displaying and controlling one of the character images 70 to 74 at the timing when predetermined drive control is executed by the stepping motors 150h, 152h, 153f, and 155 (for example, when it becomes (H) in FIG. 102). Data is set.

  For example, when it is decided to execute the first type branch effect notice pattern of the branch effect notice pattern number 5 and when it is decided to execute the branch character effect notice pattern of the branch effect effect notice pattern number 2, In the scene where the character image 73 imitating Franken is displayed on the portrait 90 in FIG. 102 (H) in the branch effect notice in FIGS. 102 (C) to (H), the drive signal is output to the stepping motor 150h to imitate Franken. The character body 150 is made to appear in front of the display area 42 so as to cover a part of the display area 42 for a predetermined period (see FIG. 91 (C ′) for the appearance of the character body 150).

  In this way, a game that pays attention to the branch effect notice executed in the display area 42 by executing the branch role effect notice that drives and controls the character bodies 150, 152, and 154 as a part of the branch effect notice. It is possible to give a strong impression to a person, and it is possible to give a strong impression of which of the super reach effects is executed after the branch effect notice (branch role effect notice).

  In addition, since the big hit expectation degree when the branching effect presentation notice pattern is executed is set high, when the character bodies 150, 152, 154 appear, the player's sense of expectation for the big hit gaming state can be increased. it can.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111 executes a branch effect notice selection process (step S216) of the notice selection process, and outputs information corresponding to the result of the notice selection process as a sub information output process (step S216). In step S110), the image is transmitted to the second illumination control board 113, and the CPU 113a mounted on the second illumination control board 113 sequentially displays the effect images of the character images 70 to 74 on the portrait 90 in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 116. By performing display control (execution of branch effect notice (selection appearance)), a selection appearance execution means that suggests a super reach effect executed after the branch effect notice is provided.

  In the branch effect notice, display control is performed so that the final character in the branch effect notice and the character displayed in the super reach effect after execution of the branch effect notice coincide with each other.

  Further, it is a function of the CPU 111a mounted on the sub-integrated board 111, which is a 1-byte notice pattern random number (developed notice pattern random number, intense heat notice pattern random number, lightning notice pattern random number, mini character notice pattern random number, sound determination random number). Random number updating means is provided for updating within a 256 numerical range within the execution area.

  Further, the update random number storage means acquires the notice pattern random number when the CPU 111a mounted on the sub integrated board 111 receives the variable display pattern command, and stores the notice pattern random number in the RAM 111c mounted on the sub integrated board 111 that stores the notice pattern random number. It is.

  Then, the intense heat warning pattern random number is updated within a numerical range of 0 to 201 within the execution area of 1 byte, and the intense heat warning pattern random number stored in the RAM 111c is changed to the intense heat warning pattern numbers 1 to 6. It is determined whether or not it is determined to be the intense heat notice pattern of the intense heat notice pattern numbers 1 to 6 in step S142 of the intense heat notice selection process depending on whether or not it matches the assigned determination value.

  The extinction effect determination table is a daylight background lightning notice table and a night background lightning notice table provided in accordance with the change display pattern and the background images (the day background image 81 and the night background image 82).

  Further, in the present embodiment, a low-obscuration effect executing means for displaying the dark image 83 in the display area 42 as the first blackout effect based on the lightning warning pattern of the lightning warning pattern numbers 1 to 6 is provided.

  Moreover, a high extinction effect executing means for displaying the dark image 83 in the display area 42 as the second blackout effect based on the lightning warning pattern numbers 2 to 6 is provided.

  Further, after the lightning 87 is displayed based on the lightning notice pattern of the lightning notice pattern numbers 4 and 5, the left decorative design 80a or the right decorative design 80c is displayed on the dark image 83 by being illuminated by the brightness of the lightning 87. The image display control means at the time of concealment is displayed.

(8) Determination information display processing (random number distribution display processing)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 104 to 112, processing until the gaming machine 1 displays the random number distribution in the display area 42 will be described.

  The gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment provides the player with random number distribution information by displaying the distribution status of a plurality of random numbers with respect to the winning value of the advantageous game (for example, big hit) when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It has characteristics. Here, the “predetermined condition” means that the next advantageous game is won even if a game more than a predetermined number of times (for example, the probability denominator number of the big hit probability) is performed since the previous advantageous game (for example, big hit) is won. If there is no game, if the next advantageous game is not won even if the game is continued for a predetermined period (for example, 1 hour), or even if the number of game balls (for example, 2500) corresponding to the predetermined amount is entered This is equivalent to a situation where it is determined that the player is likely to end the game, such as when the player has not won the advantageous game. The random number distribution information provided by the gaming machine 1 is information that can be an objective judgment material for the player to analyze the gaming situation, and can affect the player's feelings regarding the gaming situation. For example, if it is difficult to win an advantageous game, the random number distribution information indicating that the random number used in the special lottery has deviated from the winning value is provided, so that the player can win the advantageous game. It is possible to obtain objective information about the absence of the game and to understand the game results so far that could not be won in the advantageous game. The provision of random number distribution information by the gaming machine 1 not only allows the player to have a predetermined feeling about the current gaming situation, but also gives the player a predetermined feeling (for example, in the future) I can feel that I am not likely to win.

(8-1) Processing in Main Control Board In the following description, the main control board 101 causes the sub-integrated board 111 to create its distribution form from the jackpot determination random number and display it on the display means (display area 42). Therefore, random number information is added to the variation pattern command (display command) transmitted to the sub-integrated board 111. The fluctuation pattern command is data having a 2-byte structure, and is data for specifying a fluctuation time or various effects until the special symbol and the decorative symbol start changing and stop.

  After the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main control board 101 acquires a random number at the time of winning by a timer interrupt process, and transfers the information on the acquired random number at the time of winning to the sub integrated board 111 together with the variation pattern command. To do.

  FIG. 104 illustrates an embodiment of each process (timer interrupt process) including a random number update process for obtaining a winning random number, which is executed by the main control board. The main steps among the plurality of steps of the timer interrupt process will be described.

  When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the main control board 101 executes timer interrupt processing at a cycle of 4 ms, for example. In this timer interrupt processing, the main control board 101 performs switch input processing, timer update processing, random number update processing, prize ball control processing, frame command reception processing, fraud detection processing, special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, The symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the drive motor control process, the output data setting process, the sub-integrated board command transmission process, etc. are sequentially executed.

  In the switch input process, a process of inputting a detection signal from the big prize opening switch is performed. The big prize opening switch is arranged inside the big prize opening 60 and detects that a game ball has won the big prize opening 60. In the timer update process, a process for updating the variation time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is performed.

  In the random number update process, a process for updating the jackpot random number by a predetermined value, for example, +1 is performed. In the prize ball control process, control relating to the number of prize balls is performed. For example, when winning at the start winning opening 45, a process of controlling to perform five prize balls is performed.

  In the frame command reception process, a process of receiving a payout command from the payout control board 102 is performed. In the fraud detection processing, processing for detecting fraud such as magnets and external pressure is performed.

  In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, it is determined whether or not there is a winning at the start winning opening 45, and if there is a winning, a lottery process for winning a big hit is performed. In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, it is determined whether or not a game ball has passed through the gate, and if it passes, a process related to winning is performed.

  In the drive unit motor control process, when there is an accessory related to a prize ball, a process of controlling the operation of the accessory is performed. In the output data setting process, a process for setting a port of data to be output to the outside is performed. In the sub integrated board command transmission process, a process of transmitting various commands such as a variation pattern command to the sub integrated board 111 is performed.

  Hereinafter, the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process in the timer interrupt process will be described in detail.

FIG. 105 shows the processing procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing.
In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the main control board 101 first determines whether or not to always issue a command for sound generation (SP1).

  The constantly sounding command is a command for always sounding when a state occurs.

  Next, when the main control board 101 obtains a positive result in the determination at step SP1 (SP1; Y), it issues a constantly sounding command, and sets the issued sounding command in the sub-transmission command buffer in the RAM 101c. (SP2).

  The command set in the sub-transmission command buffer (in this case, the constantly sounding command) is transmitted to the sub-integrated board 111 by the sub-integrated board command transmission process in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 104).

  In contrast, when the main control board 101 obtains a negative result in the determination at step SP1 (SP1; N), it proceeds to step SP3. In step SP3, the main control board 101 determines whether or not there is a winning at the start port (SP3). Here, the start opening includes any or all of the start winning opening 45 and the electric start winning opening 46.

  When the main control board 101 obtains a negative result in the determination at step SP3 (SP3; N), the main control board 101 determines that there is no winning at the start port, and ends the special symbol and special electric accessory control process. On the other hand, when the main control board 101 obtains a positive result in the determination at step SP3 (SP3; Y), it determines that there is a winning at the start opening, and executes the start opening winning process (SP4). .

  The start-up winning time process is a process that is executed when a winning is made at the start-up opening, and is a process for associating the hold with the winning data. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main control board 101 executes a special symbol variation waiting process (SP5), and ends the special symbol and special electric accessory control process.

  The special symbol variation waiting process is a process of setting the winning judgment and the variation pattern command in the command buffer for sub transmission in the RAM 101c. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

FIG. 106 shows the processing procedure of the start opening winning time process.
When there is a winning at the starting port, the main control board 101 first sets a starting port winning command in the sub-transmission command buffer in the RAM 101c (SP41).

  Next, the main control board 101 determines whether or not the reserved number is less than the upper limit (SP42). The upper limit of the number of holds here is four. Therefore, the main control board 101 complete | finishes this process at the time of winning a start opening | mouth prize, when the number of pending | holdings is four (SP42; N).

  On the other hand, when the number of holdings is 1 to 3 (SP42; Y), the main control board 101 increments the current number of holdings by +1, and associates the winning data with the holdings incremented by +1. , The sub-transmission command buffer in the RAM 101c is set (SP43).

  Here, the winning data is data indicating various random numbers such as a jackpot determination random number, reach determination random number, variation pattern random number, variation type random number, and jackpot symbol random number updated by the main control board 101 in the timer interrupt process. It is.

  Next, the main control board 101 executes a pre-read lottery based on the winning data acquired at the time of winning (SP44), and ends the start opening winning process.

FIG. 107 shows the processing procedure of the special symbol variation waiting process.
The main control board 101 determines whether there is a holding number (SP51). Information about the hold is temporarily stored in the RAM 101c of the main control board 101.

  When the main control board 101 obtains a negative result in the determination at step SP51 (SP51: N), it ends this special symbol variation waiting process. On the other hand, when the main control board 101 obtains a positive result in the determination at step SP51 (SP51; Y), it makes a winning determination (SP52).

  In this winning determination, the main control board 101 compares the jackpot determination random number in the winning data set for the hold with the preset hit value indicating the jackpot, and if they match, Judgment is a big hit, and if they do not match, it is judged as lost.

  Next, the main control board 101 uses various flags such as a flag indicating whether or not a big hit, a flag indicating whether or not a probable big hit, or a flag indicating a loss for sub-transmission in the RAM 101c based on the result of the win determination in step SP52. In the command buffer (SP53).

  Next, the main control board 101 sets a variation pattern command, which is a command corresponding to the variation pattern, in the sub-transmission command buffer in the RAM 101c (SP54), and ends this special symbol variation waiting process.

  Here, according to the present embodiment, the main control board 101 adds information (random number information) related to the big hit determination random number (random number at the time of winning) updated at the time of entering the game ball to the starting port to the variation pattern command. . The main control board 101 sets the variation pattern command to which the random number information is added in the command buffer for sub transmission in the RAM 101c.

  Note that the random number information added to the variation pattern command does not have to indicate the random number value of the jackpot determination random number as it is, for example, the random number value of the winning random number, a plurality of random number values, random number attribute information, or the winning prize Any information including at least one of information obtained by processing a random number may be used. Thus, the random number information generated in a manner that does not directly indicate the random number value while being based on the random number value of the jackpot determination random number can be referred to as “random number information not directly indicating the random number value”. Here, the “random number attribute information” is, for example, whether or not it is a winning value, or is a random value for which a specific effect (for example, a change in super reach, decoration accessory, etc.) is determined, etc. This is attribute information indicating various features corresponding to the acquired random number. In addition, as for the loss value, a category for all random numbers is set in advance by a predetermined range such as a loss value 1, a loss value 2,... May be attribute information. The “information obtained by processing the random numbers at the time of winning” may be, for example, information obtained by performing numerical conversion or encryption processing by a predetermined processing method on the random numbers of the winning random numbers. The “plural random values” will be described later.

  Specifically, an example of processing in which random number information is added to the variation pattern command will be described. The main control board 101 has 10H (10000) of the status (STTS) of the variation pattern command to be set in the command buffer for sub transmission. , 11H (10001), 12H (10010), and 13H (10011), random number information is added to, for example, the second bit and the third bit. If it is 10H, the second bit and the third bit are within “” of “1” 00 ”00”.

  In addition, since the random number value of the random number at the time of winning is information directly related to the winning of the big hit, prevention of illegal acquisition of random number values from outside the gaming machine and prevention of illegal games based on illegal acquisition of random number values Therefore, it is preferable to handle it in consideration of security. Based on this background, when random number information other than the random number value itself of the winning random number itself (random number information not directly indicating the random number value) is transmitted in addition to the variation pattern command as described above, Since the random number value of the random number is not output to the outside of the main control board 101, it is possible to expect the effect of ensuring the security for the random number while transmitting the random number information to the sub-integrated board 111. In general, the number of jackpot determination random numbers (winning random numbers) in gaming machines exceeds tens of thousands, and if random numbers themselves are used as random number information added to the variation pattern command, the size of the random number information may increase. Although it can be considered, if other information based on the random number value is used as the random number information as described above, the size of the random number information can be further suppressed, and the processing load between the main control board 101 and the sub-integrated board 111 can be reduced. The effect that reduces can be expected.

  In the above description, transmission of random number information from the main control board 101 to the sub-integrated board 111 is described as being added to the variation pattern command, but the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the random number information may be transmitted together with a command or signal other than the fluctuation pattern command, or only the random number information may be transmitted as an independent command. Further, the transmission path of the random number information is not limited to the path directly transmitted from the main control board 101 to the sub integrated board 111. For example, in the gaming machine 1, when a security board on which an electronic component for encryption capable of encrypting communication information is further provided between the main control board 101 and the sub-integrated board 111, an output from the main control board 101 The generated random number information (or communication information including random number information) may be configured to be transmitted to the sub-integrated board 111 after being encrypted by the security board.

  In the above description, the random number information is not limited to the random number value of the winning random number, but is generated in a manner that does not directly indicate the random number value based on the random number value of the jackpot determination random number. It may be “random number information that does not directly indicate the random number value of the winning random number”. In the following, as an example of a method for generating “random number information that does not directly indicate the random number value of the winning random number”, random number information based on the evaluation value for the difference is generated based on the difference between the random number value of the winning random number and the winning value A method will be described. At this time, the main control board 101 calculates the difference between the random number value of the winning random number and the winning value, and generates random number information based on the calculated difference value.

  Specifically, first, the main control board 101 calculates the difference between the winning random number acquired at the time of winning and the winning value. Then, the main control board 101 determines an evaluation value corresponding to the calculated difference. Here, the evaluation value corresponding to the difference is an evaluation value for which a threshold is set in advance, and specifically, for example, “small”, “small”, “medium”, Assume that four kinds of evaluation values such as “Large” are set. The evaluation value “Small” indicates that the random number at the time of winning was very close to the winning value, that is, the value was very close to the jackpot, and the evaluation value “Large” was the winning value of the random number at winning. It is a value far from the distance, that is, a value far from the big hit. Further, it is assumed that bit values “00”, “01”, “10”, and “11” are sequentially associated with each evaluation value “small”, “small”, “medium”, and “large”.

  Next, the main control board 101 that has determined the evaluation value corresponding to the difference generates a bit value corresponding to the determined evaluation value as random number information, and adds the generated random number information to a predetermined bit in the variation pattern command. . For example, when the main control board 101 sets “10000” as the variable pattern command STTS (10H) in the sub-transmission command buffer, the second bit and the third bit are “00”. Means that the random number information that the difference between the winning random number and the winning value is “minor” is added to the variation pattern command.

  For example, when the main control board 101 sets “11100” in the command buffer for sub transmission as STTS (10H) of the variation pattern command, the second bit and the third bit are “11”. Therefore, the main control board 101 adds the random number information that the difference between the winning random number and the winning value is “large” to the variation pattern command.

  In addition, the threshold value (boundary line) and the number of evaluation values in the difference evaluation value can be set as appropriate. By classifying the difference in this way, the distribution display of random numbers can be varied according to the difference acquisition status. You can make it. For example, the range of the evaluation value of the difference is as follows. “Small value” range is “hit value + 1 to +10” or “hit value −1 to −10”, “Large” range is “hit value +1000 or more” or “hit value” If the range width is set to be larger in the order of “Fine”, “Small”, “Medium”, “Large”, such as “−1000 or less”, the probability that the target random number information is classified is “ It becomes higher in the order of “small” <“small” <“medium” <“large”. If the distribution display of random number information classified based on such settings is performed, the distribution rate of random information classified as “small” is displayed lower, and the distribution rate of random information is higher as the classification is closer to “large”. Can be displayed.

  In this way, the main control board 101 can add random number information to the fluctuation pattern command and transmit the fluctuation pattern command to the sub-integrated board 111 by command transmission processing. Each time the variation integrated command is received, the sub-integrated board 111 extracts random number information from the target bits of the command, and extracts the random number information together with time information indicating the processing time of the command or order information indicating the reception order of the command. Are accumulated and stored in the storage area. As a result, the sub-integrated board 111 can create a history of random number information (for example, a history after the previous jackpot) based on time information or order information. In this way, the sub-integrated board 111 can know the random number information indicating the difference between the winning random number and the winning value.

  Next, generation of random number information using the above-described “plural random number values” will be described. For example, in the random number information, there is a method of including a dummy random number value as “reference information” in addition to the random number value of the winning random number to be “a plurality of random number values”. By mixing a genuine random number value into a plurality of random number values, it is possible to protect the random number value of the winning random number from being illegally acquired from the outside. In addition, when such random number information is added to the variation pattern command and transmitted, the receiving side sub-integrated board 111 is set to a predetermined process capable of extracting a real random value by a predetermined process. is necessary.

  Specifically, for example, when the winning random number is “7”, the main control board 101 uses a random number “7” together with a plurality of random numbers such as “70”, “100”, “120”, etc. Send to. In the sub-integrated board 111, it is possible to determine that the winning random number actually updated at the time of winning is “7” from the receiving order or the like. The reference random number may be created under a predetermined agreement based on the winning random number.

  As another example of “multiple random values”, a plurality of random numbers are determined based on a winning random number without including a winning random number, and the determined plurality of random numbers are included in the random number information as additional information. There is also a method.

  Specifically, for example, when the winning random number is “70”, the main control board 101 uses the upper limit value information “105” and the lower limit information “7” created from the random number “70” as the sub-integrated board. 111 may be transmitted. At this time, the sub-integrated board 111 recognizes the random number information that the random number value actually updated at the time of winning is between “7” and “105” from the received random numbers of “7” and “105”. Can do. According to such random number information, even if information specifying the random number value of the winning random number itself is not transmitted to the sub-integrated board 111, the approximate value (approximate value) of the winning random number can be transmitted. Accordingly, the sub-integrated board 111 is provided with sufficient information necessary for creating random number distribution information when displaying the random number distribution (details will be described later) while ensuring security for the random numbers at the time of winning. Can do.

  In the above description, the case where the main control board 101 generates random number information has been described. However, the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment does not limit the board for generating random number information. Random number information may be generated in the sub-integrated substrate 111 that has received information according to the above.

  Next, the update of the random number by the timer interrupt process in the main control board 101 will be described in detail. In the timer interrupt process, the main control board 101 adds or subtracts a predetermined number of count values counted by a counter held in advance to update the count value. Here, a case where the count value is updated by adding +1 will be described. The updated count value is a “big hit determination random number”.

  When the timer interrupt process is executed after the power is turned on, the big hit determination random number counted by the counter is “0”. The jackpot determination random number counted first is generally called “initial value”. When timer interruption processing is executed next time, the big hit determination random number “0” is incremented by +1 by the counter and updated to “1”. When timer interrupt processing is further executed, “1” is updated to “2”.

  In this way, the main control board 101 updates the jackpot determination random number every time the timer interrupt process is executed. On the other hand, in the timer interrupt process, the main control board 101 updates another count value called “initial value determination random number” in the same way as the big hit determination random number update process in parallel with the big hit determination random number update process. That is, the main control board 101 updates the jackpot determination random number, and similarly updates the initial value determination random number. The random number counter for updating the big hit determination random number is configured as a loop counter which starts counting the random number from the initial value and starts counting from the initial value again when returning to the initial value. The initial value of the random number counter is updated every time the count loops, so that the update of the big hit determination random number cannot be predicted and the big hit determination random number is prevented from being illegally used. Note that the initial value at the time when the gaming machine is turned on is 0.

  Further, the main control board 101 updates the initial value determination random number in processes other than the timer interrupt process. Specifically, the main control board 101 normally executes a process not related to the big hit called the main process, and executes the timer interrupt process at a predetermined timing while executing the main process. The main control board 101 also updates the initial value determination random number in this main process.

  For example, in the timer interrupt process, when the big hit determination random number is updated from “0” to “1”, the initial value determination random number is also updated from “0” to “1”. When the timer interrupt process ends and the process proceeds to the main process, the initial value determination random number is further updated from “1” to “2” in the main process.

  The timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms, but the process itself may end in 2 ms or in 3 ms. Since the process shifts to the main process when the timer interrupt process ends, the number of updates of the initial value determination random number increases or decreases depending on the processing time of the main process.

  That is, when the timer interrupt process ends in 2 ms and the processing time of the main process is 2 ms, for example, the initial value determination random number is updated from “1” to “2” and further updated to “3”. On the other hand, when the timer interrupt process is completed in 3 ms and the main process is 1 ms, the initial value determination random number is updated from “1” to “2” by +1.

  As described above, the main control board 101 updates the big hit determination random number by the timer interrupt process and updates the initial value determination random number by the main process and the timer interrupt process. The number of updates of the initial value determination random number is larger than the number of updates of the jackpot determination random number, so that the difference between the updated random numbers increases with time. In addition, the update of the big hit determination random number and the update of the initial value determination random number can be made at different timings, so that the renewal of both is not related, so that the big hit determination random number cannot be predicted. Yes.

  The main control board 101 updates the jackpot determination random number to the maximum value, and then updates it to the initial value in the next timer interrupt process. At this time, the main control board 101 uses the initial value determination random number as an initial value.

  For example, when the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number is “1000” and the timer interrupt processing cycle is 4 ms, the main control board 101 sets “0”, “1”, “2”,. 999 "and the jackpot determination random number are updated. When the total number of jackpot determination random numbers is 1000, the time taken to update (round one) the jackpot determination random numbers from “0” to “999” is 4 ms × 1000 and 4000 ms.

  Similarly, when the maximum value of the initial value determination random number is “1000”, the main control board 101 updates the initial value determination random number every 4 ms that is the period of the timer interrupt process, and also in the main process, the initial value Update the random number for decision. Therefore, the initial value determining random numbers are “0”, “1”,... “999”, “0”, “1”,. Updated.

  In this case, the main control board 101 circulates the jackpot determination random number once and then acquires the initial value “500” from the initial value determination random number in the next timer interrupt process. 999 "is updated to" 500 ". The main control board 101 increments the jackpot determination random number by one. At this time, the big hit determination random number is added while circulating between the lower limit value (for example, “0”) and the upper limit value (for example, “999”). That is, if the big hit determination random number starts from “500”, it is updated as “500”, “501”,..., “999”, “0”, “1”,. The

  The process of updating the jackpot determination random number after one round using the initial value determining random number using the initial value determining random number is referred to as “initial value determining random number updating process”. When the big hit determination random number is updated by the initial value determination type random number update process, it is difficult to predict the updated big hit determination random number, and it is possible to prevent illegal hitting.

  When the main control board 101 updates the random number by the timer interruption process, the main control board 101 compares the updated random number with a predetermined hit value indicating a big hit and determines whether or not they match. The main control board 101 determines that it is a big hit if it matches, and determines that it is lost if it does not match. Then, as described above with reference to FIG. 107, the main control board 101 adds random number information to the variation pattern command, and sets the variation pattern command with the random number information added to the command buffer for sub transmission. The set variation pattern command is transmitted to the sub-integrated board 111 by the command transmission process.

(8-2) Processing in Sub-Integrated Board A process until the sub-integrated board 111 displays a random number distribution in the display area 42 based on the random number information received from the main control board 101 will be described.

  When receiving the variation pattern command from the main control substrate 101 in the command reception process (see FIG. 37), the sub integrated substrate 111 extracts and acquires random number information added to the specific bits of the variation pattern command. The sub-integrated substrate 111 cumulatively stores the acquired random number information together with time information or order information as described above.

  Then, when the player finishes the game through the so-called “Humari”, the sub-integrated board 111 analyzes the random number information accumulated in the RAM 111c and the history thereof, processes the analysis result, etc. 42 displays a random number distribution. The creation of the random number distribution by processing the analysis result and the display mode of the random number distribution displayed in the display area 42 will be described in detail later. For example, as shown in FIG. 109 and FIG. There is a mode in which the number of acquisitions is taken on the vertical axis and the distribution state is shown based on the history of acquired random numbers so far.

  FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing processing for displaying determination information. Here, the display of the determination information is to display the determination information (random number information) based on the winning determination information (big hit determination random number) used in the special lottery, and corresponds to the display of the random number distribution information. Hereinafter, the determination information display process (random number distribution display process) by the sub-integrated board 111 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub-integrated board 111 acquires the number of starts from the previous big hit to the present (SP11). The number of starts from the previous big hit to the present is stored in the RAM 111c. At this time, the sub-integrated substrate 111 reads the random number information from the last big hit to the present from the record information. Note that if a big hit has not yet occurred after the start of operation of the gaming machine on that day, the processing may be performed based on the number of times the game machine has been turned on.

  Next, the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether or not the product of the number of starts from the previous jackpot to the present and the jackpot probability obtained at SP11 is 1 or more (start count from the previous jackpot x jackpot probability ≧ 1). (SP12). This is to determine whether or not the current gaming state is a so-called “Humari” state (Humari state), as will be described later.

  For a gaming machine where the number of starts from the previous jackpot is, for example, 100, and the probability of jackpot is 1/400, the value of [number of starts from the previous jackpot] x [probability of jackpot] is one-fourth. It becomes as follows. In addition, as the number of starts from the previous big hit increases, for example, 400 times, 800 times, and 1200 times, the value of [number of starts from the previous big hit] × [big hit probability] is 1, or more, such as 1, 2, 3. Become.

  That is, if the value of [number of starts from the previous jackpot] x [probability of jackpot] is less than 1, considering the theoretical probability (for example, 1/400), the player is hooked even if the jackpot is not lost I rarely feel that. On the other hand, if the value of [Number of starts from the previous jackpot] x [Hit probability] is 1 or more, considering the theoretical probability, it will not be strange even if the jackpot is closed. You will feel like you are.

  In step SP12, it is determined whether or not the value of [number of starts from the previous big hit] × [big hit probability] is 1 or more. However, the determination formula is not necessarily limited to this. When the random number distribution is displayed only for this, a determination formula such as [number of starts from the previous big hit] × [big hit probability] ≧ 2 (or 3, etc.) may be used.

  The determination in SP12 is to determine whether or not the current game situation satisfies a “predetermined condition (displaying the distribution status of random numbers)”. ) Is an example of a determination formula based on. In other words, the determination in SP12 is not limited to the determination formula based on the number of games (number of fluctuations) as shown in the example, but may be a process for determining whether or not the “predetermined condition” is satisfied. Good. Here, the “predetermined condition” means that, for example, a game of a predetermined number of games (for example, the probability denominator number of jackpot probability) or more since the previous advantageous game (for example, jackpot) is won, as described above at the beginning of (8). If the game is not won for the next advantageous game after being played, or if the next advantageous game is not won even if the game is continued for a predetermined period (for example, 1 hour), or the game corresponding to the predetermined amount This corresponds to a situation where it can be determined that the player is likely to end the game, such as when the next advantageous game is not won even if the number of balls (for example, 2500) is entered.

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in the determination at step SP12 (SP12; N), it is determined that the determination information display processing is not necessary, assuming that the game state has not reached a level where the player is aware of the stalemate state. Determine and exit.

  On the other hand, when the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in the determination at step SP12 (SP12; Y), the sub-integrated board 111 shifts to the processing at step SP13, assuming that the gaming state has reached a level where the player is aware of the marital state.

  Next, the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether or not there is an increase in the number of holdings within a predetermined time (SP13). The number of holds is stored in the RAM 111c. This step is for determining whether or not the player has stopped the game, but may be substituted for other processes that can determine the situation in which the player has stopped the game.

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in the determination at step SP13 (SP13; N), this determination information display processing is performed assuming that the player is not conscious of stopping the game because there is an increase in the number of holds. Exit.

  On the other hand, when the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in the determination at step SP13 (SP13; Y), it further determines whether or not the player is in a gaming state in which a game ball is currently being fired (SP14). .

  When the player is operating the operation handle 18, a touch sensor built in the operation handle 18 detects a player's operation and generates a detection signal, and transmits the generated detection signal to the payout control board 102. And the payout control board 102 will transmit the received detection signal to the main control board 101, if the detection signal from a touch sensor is received. When the main control board 101 receives the detection signal from the payout control board 102, the main control board 101 generates a command related to the launch state based on the received detection signal. Then, the main control board 101 transmits a command related to the generated launch state to the sub integrated board 111.

  Therefore, the sub-integrated board 111 can determine whether or not the player is currently firing a game ball as described above based on the command regarding the firing state from the main control board 101.

  In this step SP14, it is determined whether or not the sub-integrated board 111 is in a state where a game ball is currently being fired, so that there is no increase in the number of holds (SP13; Y), the player stops the game. It is possible to distinguish whether the game ball has not been won or not because the game ball has not been won in the start winning opening 45 instead of because the game has been stopped. In the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, random number distribution display (random number distribution display) is required in the former case, and random number distribution display is not so necessary in the latter case. In other words, it is meaningful to display a random number distribution display for a player who wants to stop a game, and displaying a random number distribution display to a player who does not stop a game is from the viewpoint of the confidentiality of random numbers. It shouldn't be as aggressive as the former. Further, even in the former case, since it is not necessary to make the random number distribution display other than the player browse, the sub-integrated board 111 limits the time for performing the random number distribution display within a predetermined time (for example, within several tens of seconds). You may make it do.

  If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains an affirmative result in the determination at step SP14 (SP14; Y), there is no increase in the number of holdings (SP13; Y). It is determined that no game ball has entered, and the determination information display process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in the determination at step SP14 (SP14; N), there is no increase in the number of reservations (SP13; Y). As a result of the player stopping the game, step SP15 Move on to processing.

  Next, the sub-integrated board 111 determines whether or not the last variation display of the decorative symbol has been completed (SP15). More specifically, the processing in step SP15 is to determine whether there is no remaining number of suspensions and whether the variation display of the effect symbols has been completed. If the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a negative result in the determination at step SP15 (SP15; N), the sub-integrated board 111 waits until the last variation display of the decorative symbol is completed. On the other hand, when the sub-integrated board 111 obtains a positive result in the determination at step SP15 (SP15; Y), it displays the random number distribution in the display area 42 as the distribution display of the determination information (SP16), and ends this determination information display processing. To do. The mode of the random number distribution displayed in step SP16 will be described in detail later.

  Also, in order to confirm whether the player has the will to finish the game, in addition to the above processing, there is no ball lending card inserted in the CR unit (or there is no card balance remaining) The determination system can be further enhanced with respect to the determination of the intention to end the game.

  Note that the processing procedure of the determination information display processing is not limited to the above, and any other processing procedure may be used as long as the player can extract a specific index in a gaming state in which the player is aware of humility.

  Specifically, for example, regarding the display timing of the random number distribution, the timing at which the last variation display of the decorative symbol is finished (SP15 and SP16) is the timing at which the big variation is not expected in the last variation display of the decorative symbol. The distribution may be displayed.

  Here, for example, when the first stop symbol is “7” in the last variation display of the decorative symbol, the second stop symbol is different from the first stop symbol “8”. It is an aspect which becomes. In this case, no big hit is expected regardless of the number or character of the third stop symbol, so the random number distribution may be displayed at the timing when the big hit is not expected. In this case, the random number distribution can also be shown to the player who removes his / her seat from the front of the game table before the last change display is completed.

  Further, regarding the determination of whether or not the game has been stopped, it is determined based on the number of holdings and the firing state (SP13 and SP14), but not limited to this, for example, a remaining amount detection sensor for detecting the remaining amount of the upper plate 28 It may be determined whether or not the game has been stopped based on a detection signal from the remaining amount detection sensor and the number of holdings. Specifically, when there is no increase in the number of holdings and there is no detection signal from the remaining amount detection sensor for a certain time, it is determined that the player has stopped the game.

  In addition, when the above-mentioned “predetermined conditions (predetermined number of times, predetermined period, predetermined number of consumption, etc.)” are satisfied, the random number distribution can be obtained by pressing the operation button 38 as an aspect that meets the player's willingness to expect. You may decide to show it. In this way, the random number distribution can always be browsed when the player stops the game in a situation where the “predetermined condition” is satisfied. In addition, when the performance or the like on the liquid crystal display 116 is in a predetermined mode (for example, a situation in which the player's feeling of exhilaration is enhanced, such as when super reach occurs), the predetermined mode. The random number distribution is displayed in the display area 42 in a range smaller than usual so as not to hinder the game, and a mode different from the predetermined mode (for example, when all the symbols after the start of the change are changing at high speed) In the case where the feeling of exaltation is not enhanced, the random number distribution may be displayed on substantially the entire screen. By performing such display, the gaming machine 1 can display the random number distribution so that it can be browsed without hindering an increase in the player's feeling of exhilaration due to effects or the like.

(8-3) Display Mode of Random Number Distribution Hereinafter, a display mode of the random number distribution displayed on the display area 42 by the sub integrated substrate 111 will be described.

(8-3-1) Creation of Random Number Distribution Information In the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the sub-integrated board 111 is a random number acquired from the variation pattern command received from the main control board 101 and accumulated in the RAM 111c. Based on the history of information, random number distribution information necessary for displaying the random number distribution in the display area 42 is created. In the present embodiment, the random number distribution information created by the sub-integrated board 111 is a random number (for example, winning random number, jackpot determination random number) having a difference greater than or equal to a winning value in winning determination of an advantageous game (for example, big hit). It is created in an emphasized manner.

  First, when creating the random number distribution information, the sub-integrated board 111 can appropriately select or extract necessary random number information from among a plurality of random number information stored cumulatively in the RAM 111c. For example, the sub-integrated board 111 creates random number distribution information based on all random number information stored in the RAM 111c for a predetermined period (for example, all random number information acquired in the game from the previous big hit to the present). Alternatively, random number information that satisfies a predetermined condition may be extracted, and random number distribution information may be created based on the extracted random number information.

  In addition, as described above, the random number information added to the variation pattern command is not only the case where the random number value of the jackpot determination random number is directly indicated, but also the case where the random number attribute information or information obtained by processing the random number is indicated. There is also. Therefore, when the sub-integrated board 111 creates the random number distribution information, a creation process corresponding to the type of information indicated by such random number information is performed.

  Hereinafter, a procedure for creating random number distribution information based on random number information will be described with reference to some specific examples.

(8-3-1) When the random number information includes a winning random number When the random number information itself indicates the random number value of the winning random number (including the winning random number), the procedure for creating the random number distribution information Will be explained.

  First, the sub-integrated board 111 extracts, from the random number information stored in the RAM 111c, random number information indicating a winning random number far from the winning value according to a predetermined condition for the total random number information in the game from the last big hit to the present. To do. Here, the “predetermined condition” is a predetermined number, a predetermined ratio, a predetermined range, or the like, and may be other conditions.

  To give a specific example, when the total random number information is 1000, that is, when a game of 1000 rotations has been performed from the previous big hit to the present, the sub-integrated board 111, Random number information is extracted from the total random number information for the number (600) corresponding to 60% of the total random number information. The sub-integrated board 111 creates random number distribution information for each random value (or a predetermined range of random values) for each winning random number indicated by the extracted random number information. In this case, “the number corresponding to 60% of the total random number information in order from the winning value” corresponds to the “predetermined condition”.

  As another specific example, when the value (total random number value) that the winning random number can take is 0 to 2999 (3000 pieces) and the winning value is 1000, the sub-integrated board 111 is around the winning value. Only the random number information indicating the winning random numbers other than 15%, that is, other than 551 to 1450, is extracted. The sub-integrated board 111 creates random number distribution information for each random value (or a predetermined range of random values) for each winning random number indicated by the extracted random number information. In this case, “a range excluding 15% before and after the winning value” corresponds to “predetermined condition”.

(8-3-1-2) When the random number information does not include the winning random number The random number distribution information is created when the random number value itself does not indicate the winning random number (the winning random number is not included) The procedure to do is explained.

  First, as an example, a case where a plurality of random number values determined based on a winning random number are included in the random number information and a range of winning random numbers is indicated by the plurality of random number values (see (8-1)) will be described. To do. At this time, the sub-integrated board 111 calculates an average value from the upper limit value and the lower limit value of the range indicated by the random number information. Then, the sub-integrated board 111 sets the calculated average value as the “temporary winning random number value” and performs the same processing on each random number information stored in the RAM 111c to calculate the “temporary winning random number value”. In addition, the random number distribution information may be created by the same process as described in (8-3-1-1).

  As another example, a case will be described in which random number information based on an evaluation value for the difference is generated based on the difference between the random number value of the winning random number and the winning value (see (8-1)). At this time, the sub-integrated board 111 refers to the evaluation values (for example, “small”, “small”, “medium”, “large”) indicated in the random number information, in order from the evaluation value far from the winning value, that is, A predetermined number of random number information may be extracted in order from the evaluation value “large”.

  By creating random number distribution information according to the procedure shown in (8-3-1-1) and (8-3-1-2), the sub-integrated board 111 can be used in any of the above cases. Based on the random number information stored in the RAM 111c, the random number distribution information can be created in such a manner that random numbers (or evaluation values) having a difference greater than or equal to a predetermined value are emphasized.

  As described above, the gaming machine 1 sets a predetermined condition and creates a random number distribution. Even in this case, since the special lottery for determining the big hit determination random number is the complete probability method, There is a possibility that the random number distribution display is far from the “display mode that allows the player to recognize the deviation from the value”. Therefore, there is provided a validity determination means for determining whether or not the created random number distribution is in a proper display mode, and if it is not determined to be valid, one condition of the random number distribution information creation procedure (for example, the above specific example) , Using condition changing means (for example, changing 60% to 30%, etc.) that changes the ratio of the random number information extracted from the total random number information), again based on the changed condition A random number distribution may be created. By providing the configuration that allows the condition to be changed in this way, the gaming machine 1 can display a random number distribution display in an appropriate display mode even if the game result in the maritime is a unique result. As another example, for all 1000 random number information, if there is only a result close to a winning value such as a “hit value + 1” random number value, the random number distribution display is “game result and hit value”. In addition to a display mode that allows the player to recognize the deviation from the value, there is a possibility that the display mode may give an impression of an unnatural game result. Therefore, even in such a case, in order to display the random number distribution in an appropriate display mode, the gaming machine 1 randomly extracts 1000 outliers, creates random number distribution information for the distribution, You may make it display to a person.

(8-3-2) Display of random number distribution information The sub-integrated board 111 displays the random number distribution information created by the above-described method in the display area 42 as a random number distribution. Below, the display mode and effect of the random number distribution displayed in the display area 42 will be described.

  FIG. 109 is a diagram illustrating a display mode example of the random number distribution displayed in the display area. In FIG. 109, the random number distribution is configured with a random number on the horizontal axis and an acquired number on the vertical axis. As for the range of random numbers on the horizontal axis, 3000 random numbers from 0 to 2999 can be generally set for a gaming machine that employs software random numbers, for example. In the case of a gaming machine that uses hardware random numbers, 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535 can be set. The total number of acquisitions on the vertical axis indicates the number of winning random numbers (for example, 1000).

  Although illustration is omitted, the horizontal axis of FIG. 109 may include a scale of a predetermined width (for example, every random value 1000) or the like in order to indicate a guideline of the random value of the displayed random number information. . By describing such a scale or the like, it is possible to display the random numbers acquired by the special lottery in such a manner that the player can guess the random number values with a predetermined accuracy. In the example of random number distribution display shown in FIG. 110 and FIG. 112 described later, such scales may be described although illustration is omitted.

  In the random number distribution shown in FIG. 109, the position of a predetermined hit value is shown on the left side, and random number information whose hit value is a predetermined value or more away, that is, random numbers distributed on the right side far from the hit value is emphasized. It is shown in the form.

  Generally, when a player enters a lot of game balls and the number of lotteries is large (for example, 1000 rotations), if the player cannot win a big hit, the player will be aware that the game will end. However, if the game is terminated in this state, the interest in the gaming machine 1 is not satisfied, and sometimes the game is terminated without disbelief in the gaming machine 1 or the game is terminated. You may continue playing while thinking about. In particular, from the situation of the game situation that has not been won for a big hit (advantageous game) for a long time until now, "Is it possible to win a big hit in a little more?" In spite of the idea that “the game media can be acquired”, the gambling will be enhanced despite the fact that the player has not been able to win a big hit, and there is a possibility that excessive investment will be made.

  However, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the random number distribution shown in FIG. 109 is displayed at the timing when the player stops the game in the “hamari” gaming situation as described above, the random number distribution display is performed. Can be recognized that the random number at the time of winning has greatly deviated from the winning value in the game so far. As a result, the player understands that it is not intentional that he / she has not won the advantageous game, and can finish the game in a form in which the unsatisfactory gaming feeling for the gaming machine 1 is wiped out. become. In addition, if the player has unsatisfactory expectations for the end of the game or the winning of the advantageous game, the investment amount will be increased by continuing the game for a long time while the gambling feeling for the game is excessively increased. Although there is a risk that the player's disadvantage may increase, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, by displaying a random number distribution as shown in FIG. 109, excessive gambling is suppressed. It can be expected to entertain and entertain the game moderately.

  FIG. 110 is a diagram showing another display mode example of the random number distribution displayed in the display area. The display format of FIG. 110 is the same as the random number distribution display shown in FIG. 109 in that the horizontal axis represents a random number and the vertical axis represents the number of acquisitions. 110 is different from the line graph of FIG. 109 in that the random number distribution is shown by a bar graph, but the effect shown by the random number distribution display shown is not a big difference. . The feature of the form in the random number distribution display shown in FIG. 110 is that the first half and the second half of the game history in the humiliated state can be identified. 109 and 110, the total number of displayed random numbers may be displayed, or a more detailed random number distribution may be performed when an arbitrary random value is selected by the player. Also, as described in the description of FIG. 109, the width of the acquired random number value may be specified for each component of the bar graph of FIG.

  In FIG. 110, the first half of the game humor is shown as a white bar graph from 500 hits to the previous big hit, and the second half of the game hamari is shown as a black bar graph from 501 to 1000 rotations. Yes. According to this form, it is shown that random numbers far from the first half of the game's humiliation were acquired, and in the second half of the game, random numbers farther than the first half were acquired. . In other words, the random number distribution display shown in FIG. 110 can give the player the impression that the proportion of random numbers farther from the winning value has increased as the game progressed.

  As the random number distribution display shown in FIG. 110, the first half and the second half of the game are displayed separately, so that the player who has viewed the random number display understands the low level of the game so far, Even if the game is continued, it is estimated that the possibility of reaching the winning value is very low, and the dissatisfaction with ending the game at the present time can be solved. In addition, since it will be possible to resolve the future of game continuation, it will provide an opportunity for players to think about the expansion of disadvantages caused by increased investment when they continue to play, and suppress excessive gambling for games. The effect to obtain can be expected. Note that, as shown in FIG. 110, the method of dividing the game into two parts, the first half and the second half, is an example, and may be displayed more subdivided along the time series. In such a case, The low level of the game from the past to the present can be further suggested by the player.

  Until now, in order to simplify the explanation, the case where there is one winning value has been explained, but in actual gaming machines, a plurality of winning values are defined among a large number of big hit determining random numbers. It is common to be. In the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, even when there are a plurality of hit values, it can be handled.

  For example, when creating random number distribution information based on the distance (difference) from a winning random number and a predetermined range, the winning value is based on the winning value closest to the winning random number among a plurality of winning values. What is necessary is just to determine the difference and range with a random number.

  That is, for a winning random number indicated by each random number information, a difference (or standard deviation) from the nearest winning value is calculated, and by extracting random number information based on the difference (or standard deviation), a plurality of winning numbers are obtained. It is possible to extract random number information of winning random numbers far from any of the values. Then, by using the random number information extracted in this way, the same process as in the case where there is one hit value described above is performed, so that a random number having a difference greater than a predetermined value for any of a plurality of hit values can be obtained. It is possible to create random number distribution information that can display the random number distribution in an emphasized manner.

  In addition, when the random number distribution display is performed so as to indicate the difference from the winning value in this way, the difference is determined in a predetermined manner, for example, by classifying the difference between the random number value of the winning random number and the closest winning value. You may make it display in the aspect which can be estimated with the precision of this. For example, as described in (8-1) as an example of the width of the evaluation value of the difference, it is classified into “Fine”, “Small”, “Medium”, “Large” based on the difference from the winning value, and classified. Random number distribution display with explicit boundaries. For example, by displaying ± 10 from the winning value on the boundary line between “Fine” and “Small”, the winning random numbers classified and displayed as “Fine” have a difference of 10 from the winning value. At the time of winning a prize that is classified as “Large” by displaying ± 1000 from the winning value on the boundary line between “Medium” and “Large” It can be inferred that the random number was a loss value that was 1000 or more away from the winning value. And by performing the random number distribution display in which the boundary of classification is clearly shown in this way, the player who browses the random number distribution display can estimate the random value with a predetermined accuracy even if the random number itself cannot be specified, It is possible to expect the effect of dispelling the suspicion of the player with respect to the fairness of the lottery by having confidence in the certainty of the displayed contents.

  Further, the display mode of the random number distribution is not limited to the display mode indicating the number of acquisitions with respect to the total random value as shown in FIGS. 109 and 110, and the display mode can indicate the difference between the winning value and the winning random number. If it is. For example, for a winning random number to be displayed, a difference from the random number to the nearest winning value may be calculated, and a distribution display showing the difference from the winning value may be performed. Moreover, the projection generally used as a distribution diagram or a scatter diagram can also be applied to the projection method.

  FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of a procedure for extracting random number information. A curve s indicated by a solid line in FIG. 111 indicates a relationship between a winning random number (for example, 1000) and the number obtained. The total random number value is a total of 65536 from 0 to 65535. In FIG. 111, assuming that there are a plurality of winning values, a portion where the winning values are continuous (or close within a predetermined difference) is defined as a “winning zone”. FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining an example of random number distribution information created based on the extraction of random number information shown in FIG.

  In addition, a boundary line t indicated by a one-dot chain line in FIG. 111 is a boundary line for distinguishing 60% of winning random numbers in order of increasing distance from the nearest winning value. The region a indicates a set of 60% winning random numbers in order of increasing distance from the nearest winning value with the boundary t as a boundary. As an example of extracting the random number information, the sub-integrated board 111 extracts only the winning random number shown in the area a, performs a predetermined display process (for example, rounding process on the boundary, etc.), and the like in the display area 42. Create random number distribution information to be displayed. FIG. 112 shows an image of random number distribution information created by extracting the winning random numbers shown in the area a. When the random number distribution information is displayed in this way, winning random numbers that are close to the winning value are excluded, and winning random numbers that are far from the winning value are highlighted and displayed as shown in FIG. It can be expected that the player can be convinced about the previous game situation where the advantageous game (bonus) could not be acquired because it was not acquired, and the dissatisfaction with the gaming machine 1 at the end of the game can be eliminated. Therefore, the gaming machine 1 suppresses a situation in which excessive investment may be performed by continuing the game indefinitely while the player thinks about the end of the game, It is possible to suppress an excessive increase in the mind.

  In addition, a boundary line u indicated by a broken line in FIG. 111 indicates a boundary line of random values 15% (± 15%) before and after the winning value. The area b shows a set of winning random numbers having a value farther than 15% before and after the winning value with the boundary line u as a boundary. As another example of extracting the random number information, the sub-integrated board 111 extracts only the winning random number indicated by the area b, performs a predetermined display process (for example, rounding process on the boundary, etc.), and the display area. The random number distribution information to be displayed in 42 is created. When the random number distribution information is displayed in this manner, winning random numbers far from the winning value are highlighted and displayed by excluding the acquired random numbers with a winning value of ± 15%. Similar to the random number distribution display by the random numbers at the time of winning indicated by a, the player is convinced of the game situation so far that the winning game cannot be obtained because the winning value cannot be obtained, and the game at the end of the game It can be expected that the dissatisfaction with the machine 1 is eliminated. Therefore, the gaming machine 1 can suppress a situation in which excessive investment may be performed by continuing the game indefinitely while the player considers the end of the game, and can promote an appropriate game. It is possible to suppress an excessive increase in the player's euphoria with respect to the gaming machine 1.

  In addition, as indicated by “rotation number 1,000” on the horizontal axis in FIG. 112, the number of winning determinations in the period to be displayed in the random number distribution may be clearly indicated (the same applies to FIGS. 109 and 110). ). Here, the “number of winning determinations” is the number of times that the big hit determination random number is compared with the winning value in the special lottery, and matches the number of fluctuations of the special symbol. For example, if a big hit determination random number (random number at the time of winning) is acquired and drawn at the timing when the game medium enters the start opening regardless of the number of reserved numbers, The number obtained by subtracting the number of overflows that entered the starting port beyond the upper limit corresponds to the “number of win determinations”. Further, from the player's viewpoint, the “number of win determinations” matches the number of rotations in the game. By displaying such “number of winning determinations” in the display of the random number distribution, it is possible to allow the player to recognize that the same number of winning determinations as the previous number of games have been performed. The effect of convincing that the lottery is surely performed every time can be expected for each game. Furthermore, when displaying the random number distribution information, in order to indicate that the total number of acquisitions displayed matches the “number of winning determinations”, a display is made to clearly indicate the acquisition number for each random value. In this case, it can be expected to present to the player the result of the determination of winning as many times as the number of games more reliably.

  In addition to clearly indicating the number of win determinations, as described above, the random number value of the winning random number can be estimated with a predetermined accuracy, or the difference with respect to the winning random number is determined with a predetermined accuracy. As can be guessed, it can be expected to increase the player's confidence in the display contents of the random number distribution display by providing an auxiliary description such as a scale, and dispel the player's doubts about the execution of a fair special lottery The effect can be expected.

  In addition to this, as an example of a display mode that can indicate the divergence between the winning value and the winning random number, for example, the display width on the display axis of “random number” By making it sparse, it is possible to emphasize a random number at the time of winning a random number far from the winning value.

  Note that the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment described above as the gaming machine according to the present invention performs a lottery regarding the winning of the advantageous game for the game using the game medium, and wins the advantageous game and the advantageous gaming state is started. Then, the gaming machine is configured to provide the player with a game that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and the main control board 101 has a predetermined lottery opportunity (for example, a situation where the number of holds has not reached the upper limit). The lottery means for performing a lottery regarding the winning of the advantageous game by performing the winning determination by using the information for determining the winning that is determined each time the starting point of the game medium is filled), and the lottery result by the lottery means This is an example of gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state to any one of a plurality of gaming states including an advantageous gaming state and a normal gaming state. In addition, the sub-integrated board 111 displays determination information (for example, corresponding to random number information or random number distribution information) based on winning determination information (for example, corresponding to jackpot determination random number) used in the lottery by the lottery means. It is an example of the means, and the winning status display means for displaying the judgment information in a manner capable of identifying the winning in the winning judgment included in the judging information display means and the judgment information when the winning judgment is won are won for the winning judgment. It is also an example of a ratio change display means for displaying in a mode in which the ratio displayed outside the vicinity is higher than the ratio displayed near the determination information at the time of the determination. In addition, the sub-integrated board 111 is a gambling suppression means that can suppress the expectation of winning the advantageous game by displaying the determination information from the player so that the determination information can be viewed by the determination information display means when a predetermined condition is established. It is also an example. Note that the “information distribution state” displayed so as to be viewable by the player by the gambling suppression means is displayed in the display area 42 of the liquid crystal display 106 according to an instruction from the sub-integrated substrate 111, for example.

(9) Other Embodiments In the present embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the gaming machine 1 includes the sub-integrated board 111 created by integrating the production board and the internal processing board. The sub-integrated substrate 111 is an example, and does not need to be an integrated substrate. For example, a production substrate and an internal processing substrate may be configured separately.

  In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine has been described as an example of the gaming machine 1. However, the gaming machine 1 is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, the spinning machine (slot machine) may be used as the gaming machine 1. In this case, the slot machine includes a variable display control unit that displays the display result of the symbol information in a stopped manner after the reel row including a plurality of symbol information is variably displayed. The slot machine also includes an operation lever as a starting operation means, starts displaying symbol information fluctuation based on the operation of the operation lever, and includes a stop button as a stop operation means. Based on the passage of time, the variable display of symbol information is stopped. The gaming machine 1 may be a gaming machine (parrot) in which a gaming machine and a slot machine are fused.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Game machine, 38 ... Operation button, 40 ... Production device, 42 ... Display area, 44a and 44b ... Production lamp, 70-75 ... Character image, 76 ... White character image, 80a-80c …… Left / middle / right decoration pattern, 83 …… Dark image, 90 to 93 …… Mini character image, 100 …… Main board, 101 …… Main control board, 110 …… Peripheral board, 111 …… Sub-integration Substrate 113, second electrical control board, 114 waveform control board, 115 acoustic wave device, 116 liquid crystal display, 150, 152, 154 character body, 150h, 152h, 153f, 155 ... ... Stepping motor.

Claims (1)

A lottery regarding winning of advantageous games is performed for games using game media, and when the advantageous gaming state is started by winning the advantageous game, a game more advantageous than the normal gaming state is provided to the player. A configured gaming machine,
Lottery means for performing the lottery by performing a winning determination using information for determining a winning that is determined each time a predetermined lottery opportunity is satisfied;
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state to any of a plurality of gaming states including the advantageous gaming state and the normal gaming state;
Determination information display means for displaying determination information based on the winning determination information used in the lottery by the lottery means;
With
The determination information display means includes
A winning mode display means for displaying the determination information in a mode capable of identifying the winning in the winning determination;
About the determination information at the time of winning the winning determination, it is displayed in such a manner that the ratio displayed in the vicinity other than the vicinity is higher than the ratio displayed in the vicinity of the determination information at the time of winning the winning determination. A ratio change display means,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the determination information display means further displays a gaze feeling suppressing means capable of suppressing a sense of expectation for winning an advantageous game by displaying the determination information so that the player can view the determination information. A gaming machine.